Begin Reading

Table of Contents

About the Author

Copyright Page

Thank you for buying this

St. Martin’s Press ebook.

To receive special offers, bonus content,

and info on new releases and other great reads,

sign up for our newsletters.

Or visit us online at

us.macmillan.com/newslettersignup

For email updates on the author, click here.

The author and publisher have provided this e-book to you for your personal use only. You may not make this e-book publicly available in any way. Copyright infringement is against the law. If you believe the copy of this e-book you are reading infringes on the author’s copyright, please notify the publisher at: us.macmillanusa.com/piracy.

The following are the unedited transcripts of channeling sessions conducted on Maui from June 12 through September 3, 2020, in online workshops and in a small group convened for this dictation. Several seconds-long gaps in the recordings were reconstructed and are footnoted in the text. Selected questions from students have been included.

Introduction

THE CLAIM OF DOMINION

DAY ONE

We ask you questions now about what you believe, and who you believe yourselves to be. The identity you hold that has been claimed by you has been claimed in several ways—through your upbringing, yes, indeed your culture, but primarily through history, that which you have acclimated to without knowing it. You walk into a world with a sky and an earth and a sea. Everything has been named by those who came before you. And you acclimate to what you see, including systems of agreement, how things should be, based upon what they were. And you assume these things to be real. You go into accord with them, which means you align to them and know yourself in regard to their presence.

Each of you who comes before us has had a name given to them by a parent, by an authority, by an occupation, by a way of being seen in the world. And while this is not who you are, you appropriate the meanings of these names to be real. “This is what a banker is.” “This is who I am supposed to be, given the names I have carried.” And you acquiesce to the meanings of the names, the articulation of the name, the merit or mis-merit of the name, that you have been claimed by.

Now, the idea of identification also claims what you see. “I know a mountain by the name mountain.” “I know an evil man by the name evil and all that it conjures.” And you are in commerce with the self and with the landscape you express in through the language of history, which has been endowed with meaning. Your idea of evil, your idea of benefit, even your idea of God, is weighted with meaning, and, indeed, doctrine, that tells you what to feel and how you should respond and claim an identity with. And with is a word that we speak intentionally. When you are with something, you are in accord to it and in alignment with its meaning. The idea of who you are, the subjective self known by name—“I am Arthur,” “I am Alice,” “I come from this place,” “I am this of that many children,” “I do this for a living,” “These are my beliefs,” “These are my aspirations,” “These are the things I know to be true”—would be claimed by you separately. It is not a collective inheritance. It’s a collective idea of what you are, in agreement to a world, through the language that you’ve assumed and been in agreement with.

The teaching of today is, indeed, freedom. And with freedom comes faith. But when you know yourself as free, you are not denying what was. You are moving beyond it. You are lifting in strata and vibration beyond the codification of identity that you have utilized to get what you think you should have through the mask that you have worn that you believe to be real. The idea of who you are, identity, persona, is, indeed, useful. But you are not what you think. In fact, you never have been. The small self, who has aged, who has gone into agreement with things at different ages, has understanding born through experience and commonality through the collective agreements that she was born into. “In my home, we did this.” “In my country, we do that.” “In my religion, we believe this or that.” And your agreements to these things, in density, claim value, and value is meaning, what you give credibility to, credence to, meaning to, and what you see is always predicated on what you were taught to believe.

Now, our agreement to you, and our students as a whole, is to reclaim you beyond the persona or small self’s idea. But this cannot be done without permission. And if you wish to engage with us at this level of agreement, you will go on a voyage to the Upper Room, or to a new sense of self that is not predicated upon the ideas of history, which is always should—who you think you are and should be, based on prior agreement born in historical data. This is not a comfortable journey. Because you seek comfort, you want to bring your easy chair up to the Upper Room, and your television, and all the food in the refrigerator. You want the comfort of the old, when what is being asked of you now is to release an idea of who you have been so you may fully claim who you are.

Now, he¹ interrupts the teaching. “What is wrong with who we are?” There is nothing wrong at all, but you mistake the mask you wear for the truth of the being you are. You mistake the landscape that was claimed in history, and endowed with meaning in truth. You believe yourself to be lifting through a spiritual practice, when, in many cases, you are acting pro forma, speaking nothing and deciding what should be, based on what you were taught and have not experienced.

This is, indeed, an experiential teaching. We will not tell you what to believe. We will invite you to claim it, and then know it for yourself. To know is to realize, and when you are truly in your knowing, you express in the Kingdom, which is, indeed, the awareness of the True Self in expression, and the realization of the Divine in the manifest world.

We say these words to some of you and you invent a fairy tale. “Oh, how lovely to be in the Kingdom, where everything happens my way.” In fact, the Kingdom is the knowing of the Divine where it has been denied. It is an acclimation to the vibration of God that is, indeed, in all things, but has been denied in almost all things. You are not walking around watching the flowers bloom. In fact, what you are doing is operating as a doorway to a higher octave, the Upper Room, to call what you experience to it through your faith, through your knowing, and through your acclimation to what is always true, and must always be true.

What is true is always true. You think your opinions are truth. They are, indeed, your opinions. You may have them. But what we will say is true is that the self that you truly are exists beyond the monikers, the descriptors, the emblemizations that you have utilized to accrue a sense of self. “I am the one who is never loved,” “who always has more than enough,” “who never has anything.” “I am the one who must be better than others,” “who must refute desire,” “who must give in to the crowd.” These are ways of being known. You act upon them, believe them to be real. They are attributes, yes, ways of being known, but they have never been who you truly are.

Now, the True Self expresses in the body you sit in, and beyond the body as well. The misnomer has been, the confusion has been, is that you await the Kingdom in heaven when you release the form you have taken. You believe all things are of God, but nothing can be when you deny God in form. Indeed, your experience of God or divinity is increased in a higher octave, beyond the density of manifestation that you have accrued in this form and through collective agreement in this shared landscape. But the antidote to this is really a very simple one. Release the density. Release the fear that is the basis of the density. And be lifted, one and all, to your true natures—beyond the masks worn, beyond the identifiers or emblems that would decrease you or diminish you, because the true value of who you are bears no weight upon your profession, your special gifts or your lack thereof. The True Self you are knows itself beyond history, beyond subjugation by others, beyond the fear that the collective has used to manifest control.

The times you sit in are fraught with fear, and also with great potential. How you identify through these times will support, not only you, but all you encounter in a much higher way than you can imagine. To become the doorway to what we call the Upper Room is to be assumed by it, by the True Self who expresses in manifestation, and through vibrational accord lifts all things she encounters to a higher strata—beyond fear, beyond claims of separation, and beyond the reliance of historical data to tell you what you see and what it means.

This is a teaching of assumption. And the text we will write next will be the text of assumption, the true assumption of the Monad in expression that manifests the Kingdom. And the title of the next text, The Kingdom, will be sung by us as we direct the dictation and teach the Kingdom to those who will abide there.

Now, realization, as you have understood it, has been codified by manifestation. “That is a teacup,” “that is a doorway,” “that is a hinge,” and “that is a good man” or “a bad man.” The names things have been used to, have taken, are occupiers of space and identity. Everything you see in form is in space and holds identity, inclusive of the self you know yourself as. And the realization of the True Self is in some ways the dissolution of the idea of who you are, and the reclamation of who you have always been, beyond the idea of doorway or hinge or any name given. If you can understand that there is indeed one note, one tone sung in the universe that you can call God, and God is in manifestation as everything you see—the door, the doorway, the hinge itself—you can begin to walk through what you thought was a closed door into a realm of magnificence.

“What does that mean,” he asks, “a realm of magnificence?” You equate magnificence, Paul, with splendor, as it has been described through history. The magnificence we speak to is the manifestation of the Divine. Imagine stepping through a doorway and what you experience is that one note, sung in infinite ways And the claim of the Kingdom, and the manifestation of the one who has come to it—“Behold, I make all things new,” the alchemical claim of assumption, the Divine assuming the material realm—is known by you, not only in experience, but in a new tongue, a new way of speaking, of invocation that actually reclaims the manifest world in the high octave that exists simultaneously with the one you have understood yourself in.

Now, the trajectory of this teaching that we will be giving for several months is not a solitary teaching. It will be a collective act. And the students that are present for this, and for these dictations, will reach a level of vibrational agreement that they have not known thus far. And this may not be an easy passage, because the new comes at the cost of the old, and the idea of who you have been has been held sacred by you, but at the cost of your true divinity. So you must become willing, if you wish to share this journey, to undergo this passage of reclamation. To be assumed by the Divine does not mean you forget your old name, don’t know the occupation you’ve had for years. It really simply means You Have Come, You Have Come, You Have Come as the expressed Divine that may, indeed, know itself in all things.

This is not to dissuade you from accompanying us. It is to create the invitation in honor. We only teach those who wish to hear our words. The manifestation of the Monad, the Divine Spark, the Christed Self, in form and field, is a level of alignment and nothing more. You are not re-created as much as transposed from one octave to another. And the music of your expression may be sung by you in significance that will actually alter the vibrational realm that you have occupied in density.

To become the doorway to the Upper Room, where we will soon take you, is to claim authority over the manifest world. This is not to control, not to get what you think you should have, but to know true dominion. And the claim of dominion, which will be the title of this chapter, must be understood by each of you. Your level of realization that you have claimed thus far is, in fact, an invocation to a reality that you are in conference to. To be in conference to means to contribute to through your consciousness. How you hold anything in consciousness is how you are met by what you see. This is the law of energetic accord.

Realization comes, again, at the cost of the old, and the lifting to the true nature of the being you are disassembles aspects of self that seek to be known in a higher octave or new way. What is disassembled is what has been in compliance to doctrine, to agreement in fear, to control, and to the manifestation that fear has wrought in the manifest world.

“What does that mean?” he asks. Everything created in fear must now be re-known. The level of vibration invoked by fear, the claim of history in fear, the doctrines of fear that you have assumed in religion and in law and in bias, are all decrees of separation. The action of fear is to keep you separate from the Divine Self, or the Monad, and to relinquish the true authority that the Divine Self has in claiming a manifest world in a higher vibrational field than you would assume to be so. Our agreement to you is that this process of lifting beyond what was claimed in fear will be a pliant one, an agreeable one, because in fact the manifest world, through the claims we will offer you, will support you in releasing the reliance upon the old, and re-knowing who you are, and, consequently, who all are, in the higher octave that is, indeed, the Upper Room.

This is a teaching of truth, and what is true is always true. And our congratulation goes out to each of you who wish to attend to this class, to read these words, to know this being that you have always been and, in fact, denied, in agreement and coherence and compliance to the idea of fear that would tell you it is not allowed, can never be, and never could have been. The Divine Spark in its risen state is the resurrection, the Christ within, the Monad, the flame of the Source of all things that assumes the being you are and dismantles the old. The ability to know who one is and to claim a world through new eyes is the agreement of this class, and this class will not end when this teaching ceases. It will be the lives you live in accordance to a new way of being, if, indeed, you are willing and are agreeing to be on this journey.

We wish to take you now to what we call the Upper Room. The Monad, or the Divine Self, is the aspect of you that aligns you here—and the invocations we offer by way of attunement, and, again, attunement means vibrational accord—to a transmission of energy, the Divine as all things, that is present for you each. You may say these words, if you wish:

“I know who I am in truth. I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. I am free. I am free. I am free.”

And, now, if you wish to be lifted, to agree to be lifted, invite the Monad, or the Christed Self, to be the one who lifts. And you may say these words:

“I am in the Upper Room. I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

The Upper Room, or Christ consciousness, is the level of vibration that you are assumed in. You become the flame. You become the expression of Source, beyond the old, beyond the known, beyond the stigma that you may attach to the idea. You are lifted beyond reason to the truth of your being, and you are released from your complicit nature to the creations of fear, the monikers, emblemizations that you have utilized to disown your true nature. Our requirement for you is only one thing, your agreement to be lifted and to be assumed.

The claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come” is the Monad in articulation and manifestation. And when this claim is invoked, it seeks to re-identify itself through every aspect of you, which quite simply means that the idealization of the True Self re-creates itself at every impasse, in the face of every fear, in every obstacle it may encounter, the action of the Divine to assume itself in form and field and re-create itself in everything it witnesses. In the claim we will teach, “Behold, I make all things new,” a new world will be born, beyond fear, beyond acquiescence to fear, beyond the treason you have held against the Divine through your refuting of it. And the refusal to see the Divine in your fellow, in your world, in yourself, is the one pain that you continue to claim. And we will say the time has come to release the cause of suffering, which is the denial of the Divine in every aspect of self and in the world you see yourself in.

In the Upper Room, where we abide as we teach you, where we come to you to learn, to sing, and to be in an experience of you, is the place of knowing that you may now abide in. But to abide in the Upper Room indeed requires a transition of the vibrational field from lower to higher, and the body is included. The claim “I know what I am in truth,” the manifestation of the Divine as form, will be of benefit to you here. You do not exclude form. You do not exclude breath. You do not exclude anything you see from the tapestry of God that is unfolded before you and will be seen by you in the new eyes, in the new light, that you have come to see with.

We sing your songs for you so that you may know the words. We know who you are in truth. We know what you are in truth. We know how you serve in truth. You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.

This is the introduction to the new text. We thank you for your presence. We will return after a pause for Paul. Period. Period. Period.

PART ONE

Foundation and the Old

1

THE GIFT OF THE KINGDOM

DAY TWO

When you sing your own song, when you are in full amplitude, you become a transmitter of the Upper Room. The True Self as you, in his embodiment, in her agreement to be embodied, translates what she sees in vibration to a higher accord, where, indeed, it is re-known. The accountability you have in the lower octave, knowing things as they have been, how you have named them, is actually transformed, because you are in the presence of the Divine, and that is where you live and move and have your being.

Now, what it means to be accountable in the lower vibrational field is the alignment of will through choice, and everything you choose, every act you engage in, indeed you are accountable to. You understand this as karma, perhaps, but quite simply it is cause and effect. When your vibration lifts to what we call the Upper Room, the act of creation is actually rather different. Choice is different as well, because the attunement you hold is to your true nature, the Divine as self that knows who it is, and operates in accord with its own requirements.

Now, you doubt this. You cannot imagine yourself without a small self saying, “It’s time for dinner, time to wed, time to have children,” perhaps, “time to die.” You cannot understand that there is an aspect of self who is already fully engaged in a higher level of awareness and claims what it encounters in the Upper Room.

Now, cause and effect in the Upper Room are somewhat different than you have known them. The challenges you face in the lower vibrational plane are the accountability to prior choices, and we will say this is true for the individual and the collective as well. The collective as well quite simply means that when humanity decides to claim itself as separate from Source, it announces itself in accountability to its lower creations. You are accountable to war. You are accountable to deceit of yourself and others. When you lift to the Upper Room in a singular way, which quite simply means the Divine Self, or the Monad, in expression, what you have done is lift above a lower vibrational field, and the choice that is made as the True Self is never contrary to Divine Will.

We will explain this for each of you. The idea of Divine Will is confused to you. You still think there is a God with a beard who would have you do this as opposed to that, or, prior ideas, that there is a God who will punish you for your poor choices. When you align in the True Self, as the True Self, in what we call the Upper Room, the alignment you hold is inclusive of will. Now, you have been gifted with will. You all have choice. But as will itself is lifted, in octave or vibration, you move to a level of alignment that exists beyond separation. You are no longer deciding in opposition to, but in agreement to your own true nature.

Now, the escalation of vibration that you experience as you ascend has requirements. The True Self, as itself, is not encumbered by the choices of history, or your idea of what has to be, and the liberation you undergo is in some ways a peeling away of that which has vested you in denial of the Divine. In other ways, what it is is a transcendence of, a rising beyond, what was claimed in fear, or perhaps anointed by the collective as what you should expect or have be. This idea of transcendence, which we call resurrection, must be understood, not as an act of will as you have known will, but an acquiescence of will to its true nature. Understand, again, that all things are of God or may be re-known as of God, and the denial of Divine Will, which you perceive to be outside yourself, is actually reclaimed by you when you know who you truly are. Underline the word know. It, again, means realize.

The realization of true nature, of your own true nature, comes in stages, lest you fear it, lest you decide to run. In fact, what you are doing is, ideally, reclaiming what has always been that perhaps you have denied, or, better still, re-deciding that who you have always been is not what you thought you were. This re-decision is done as the small self, because it is his willingness, her agreement, to undergo this challenging journey of resurrection, regardless of outcome. Yes, we said this correctly—regardless of outcome. The caterpillar does not know, when it enters the cocoon, how it will emerge, and the process it undergoes is indeed challenging to the organism that claimed itself as caterpillar. The release of the mold of the cocoon itself emerges a butterfly in a translated state. It has been transformed by undergoing an alchemical process of becoming its True Self. Now, what this does not do is disregard what the caterpillar has been. The caterpillar was perfect in its prior state. But what has emerged, what is now announced as new, holds different properties. What crawled the earth now lifts above it. And the incarnation you undergo as the one in the Upper Room is somewhat different than what you would think or expect, which is why we say for you regardless of outcome.

Paul interrupts. “I don’t want to get a plane ticket unless I know the destination.” Well, this is a teaching of faith, and what you undergo must be undergone in an awareness that the true nature of your being—underline true, and know what is true is always true—is of the Source of your being. Underline of. You are not separate from your Source, but in the lower octave, where the collective has invested in separation, you believe yourselves to be.

Now, each of you says yes to the journey before you at the level of agreement that you can come to. You decide as a small self to reclaim your true identity, but presume it to be what you want. In fact, your true identity has no career, no name given by her parents, does not age, and does not die. Your true nature, the eternal self that exists beyond form, but can indeed be known in form, is what you become. So your criteria for what it means to be enlightened or ascended must be released, because the journey you will undergo not only requires agreement, but agreement to the unknown. What you have known, what you have collectively known, has claimed you in the predicaments that you find yourselves in. Again, cause and effect. When a civilization wars against its brothers, it incurs what you call karma, and you understand yourself in any moment as the result of all your prior choices. Your prior choices, individually and collectively, has claimed you where you sit today, humanity at a crossroads, where what is new indeed may be claimed, and what is old seeks purview, seeks to conquer, seeks to defend itself in the ways it has had.

We will explain this. When you have a king who rules in fear, you have a kingdom ruled by fear. You find what it is to be fearful of, to confer and agree with the kingdom you abide in. A kingdom in fear expects to be afraid, and you mandate fear as its own currency. You will be made afraid, or taught to fear, or taught to abide in fear, because the ruler you have is fear itself. When you lift beyond the old to what we would call the New Kingdom, you must release the attachments to what was, the belief that it must be so. But because you have been party to fear and all of its creations, through self-identification through fear and through identification of what you see, who you see, what could happen, as fearful, the alignment you have held will seek to denounce the freedom that is before you. And the freedom that is before you does not resemble what you’ve known. You have no document, no certificate or diploma to tell you who you truly are as a free being. So even your ideas of fear and your ideas of freedom are born in historical data that soon may have no relevance.

We will explain this for Paul. When you understand yourself as having been a citizen of an old kingdom, one known in fear, you really don’t know anything else. Perhaps you have a fanciful idea of what it means to be fearless or liberated from fear, but that remains something conjured until it is made manifest or realized as so. And this process that you undergo in this teaching is not only the relinquishing of your citizenship in a lower octave of vibration, it’s actually reclaiming the citizenship of your birth, or your true inheritance. You don’t have to earn the Kingdom. It has always been there for you, but it was mistaken. It was thought to be in a heaven that you attend to when you die. You never thought that you could know the face of God, witness the face of God, as all things. Underline all. Everything you see and can even imagine is of one tone, one Source. In the beginning was the Word, the one note sung.

When the one note is sung into manifestation, everything you see becomes it, as it has always been, known by the names it has taken. Everything you see—yes, in vibration—is this one song played at different levels of vibration, some in density that you may know of in fear or you could not imagine to be of the light, and some in higher ways. Because you are co-resonant beings, because your vibrational field, individually and collectively, aligns to a reality in physical manifestation, all things that you see before you, you understand yourself in every way as an occupant of a manifest world that you are concurring with. In the field that you hold and know to be yourself, the active principle of the Divine is still present. It has not been abandoned. But because you’ve confused yourselves with the idea of the false self, and you have claimed a kingdom—a small kingdom, yes—in a requirement of co-resonance with the small self, you cannot understand what it means to lift.

Now, the speaking of the Word into being is the gift of the Divine that has been bestowed upon humanity. You have become creators—indeed, you have—but you’ve created in a kingdom of fear, and that is the separation you believe yourselves to be in, as a small self and a collective citizenship that lives outside of God. Now, once you understand that your true inheritance, the Divine as who and what you are, is what claims the Kingdom into manifestation, the true Kingdom, we say, may be met by you in an articulated state. Articulation is manifestation. You are in an articulated state, in a body, in an energy field, and everything you perceive is an articulation of consciousness in agreement to you—or, simply put, vibratory accord, a-c-c-o-r-d, a-c-h-o-r-d as on a piano. As you lift in tone, the chord that you play as the resonant being you are confirms itself in the manifest world, and the world is actually changed by nature of your presence. You idealize this because the small self has an idea of what this should be and look like. “In my heaven, we do this. We certainly don’t do that.” That is the heaven of the hypocrite who wants it to be a country club where her rules are obeyed. What you perceive in the Kingdom is the presence of the Divine where it has been faltered, failed, by the small self who has been veiled in fear, in deceit of her own true nature.

Now, some of you may believe that this is a heretical teaching, to become the manifest Divine. We will tell you what heresy is, and, very simply put, it is the denial of the Divine, not the acceptance of it. To deny the Divine in your fellows is an act of heresy, and to deny it in yourself must be the same. The articulation that you undergo in the process we engage you with, as we said, happens in stages. There are challenging aspects to this process, and only challenging you because you are being invited to release an idea, and nothing more, of who and what you are and have been. And your attachment to your pain, or your self-importance, or your delusions of grandeur or spirituality, will be met by you as you walk this path. But you must understand. You are divesting the self of what has expressed in lower amplitude.

The attunement to the Word was spoken through us to the man before you many years ago now. But it is the primary attunement for invocation of all that follows. And we will invite you to say these words after us:

“I am Word through my body. Word I am Word. I am Word through my vibration. Word I am Word. I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word. Word I am Word.”

As this is claimed, you activate the Divine Self to express as form, as field, and in a reclamation of your true name and nature—I Am.

Now, the Divine who has come as you knows full well who she is, knows what she is in form, and knows how he expresses. And this is the attunement that we offer you to support this engagement at a level of vibrational accord—again, a-c-c-o-r-d, or a-c-h-o-r-d. These are spoken in agreement to the vibration that informs the language, and the oscillation of the claim in invocation supports, not only the body, but the complete energetic field in a new recruitment to its innate divine nature. And these are the words we speak:

“I know who I am in truth. I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth.”

The Monad speaks these words, or the Divine Self, who needs no convincing because she knows full well who and what she is.

Now, the claim of freedom is what we require to in fact lift you to the Upper Room, because it’s an agreement to lift beyond the known, beyond the expected, and beyond the mandates of fear who would tell you not to come, do not enter, don’t go to the Upper Room, because if you go you will not be the small king ruling the small kingdom anymore. You will become one of many, the Divine in pluralization. And that is the word we will use today to comprehend unity, the singular of many. Now, the speaking of these words, “I am free, I am free, I am free,” announced in the energetic field, will claim you in a release of the ties or tethers that you have utilized to bind you, to hold you, to keep you attached to fear and all of its creations. All is the important word here, and will be as we continue to teach. All fear.

Now, you think you need your fear. He pretends he requires it still, because he wishes to know himself as he has been. But in fact you don’t require it. Prudence you require, discernment you require, but not fear. It has never been your ally. Prudence is saying no to swimming with a shark. Prudence is saying yes to taking an umbrella in the rain. The awareness of the requirement of any act is always in alignment to your true nature and highest good when you release the fear that has been asking you to claim it, to perpetuate itself through you. Again, the action of fear is to claim more fear. In the announcement “I am free,” you are not disregarding the old. You are not pretending you weren’t afraid. You are confirming the aspect of self that abides in the Upper Room who has never been afraid because he cannot align to fear. Underline the word cannot. If you wish fear, you have to go back downstairs to the lower vibrational field where you may learn through it some more. In the Upper Room, which is what you enter in freedom, the alignment you hold and eventually will learn to manifest through, you are unafraid. And not only that, you do not choose in fear, and because you are no longer choosing in fear you are no longer incurring the cause and effect that has kept you in a cycle of perpetual re-creation.

Now, we will explain what this means. When we speak of karma, we don’t speak of it as an evil. It is a simple opportunity. And once you learn in the Upper Room that you are not required to choose in fear and would have no need to, you are released from the ramifications of low choice. That does not mean you don’t embody again. You may have requirements to. This is not a teaching of escaping form. This is a teaching of realizing form as of Source.

Now, the claim “I am in the Upper Room,” the announcement of being, activates you, and, in fact, lifts you. But you must understand again that this is claimed, not by the small self, but by the True Self who already abides there. You may say this, if you wish:

“I am in the Upper Room.”

And announce the self, and feel the field in oscillation and in lifting. And, once here, ask the self: “What is there to be frightened of?” And you will find that there is nothing.

Now, in our prior texts we spoke the words “I Have Come” as the announcement of the Monad in presence and form come as each of you. It’s a very simple expression. The Divine Self has come, and is in expression. But, as this is claimed, you undergo the process of alchemization or re-creation. Imagine releasing every closet in every home you ever lived in, every cellar bin, every trunk in the attic, those things that you’ve kept in darkness, maybe for a rainy day, that you hide from the self, certainly hide from the world. The release of these things is a process that you undergo. It is not always easy, but the gifts that come from it are beyond speaking. You know yourself, finally, as a vehicle for the Source of your being, beyond the false ideas of separation, of shame, of anger, the need to vilify your brother, which simply means you have vilified yourself, that has kept you in abeyance in the lower field or strata. The one who has aligned at this level, who says the words “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” announces its energetic field in service to the Divine. And that is the claim “I know how I serve” in expression.

The speaking of the claim “I know who I am in truth, I know what I am in truth, I know how I serve in truth, I am free, free, free, I am in the Upper Room, I Have Come” is the process of ascension. It is the Word, or that first song sung, that first note sung, in full expression as the being you are and can only be. You are not making yourself holy. You always were. You just denied it. You are not making anything holy. It already is. You have just denied it. And the denial of the Divine, as we have said so often, is the only predicament humanity truly faces, because every pain you experience may be known as the denial of God, or the impossibility for God to be where you have decided it can never be.

Nothing is transformed until it is seen, and all that will bring it to the light is the revealing of it. And when you say yes to the aspects of self that you have denied, you become the liberator of others. You no longer hold them in your field. You become the doorway that others may walk through in their own ascension, or alignment to what we will call the Kingdom—again, the presence of the Divine that can be seen in all manifestation.

Now, those of you here who read these words, who hear these words, are known by us already. We know you beyond your shame, beyond your fear of being seen, beyond the choices you’ve made in fear, the karma you have incurred, beyond the denial of the Divine as the self and others. We see you in your beauty, we see you in your right to be, in all you have known and may know. And as we sing for you now, as we make this sound for you each, we lift you to the Upper Room, where, indeed, you may be made new.

On the count of three, Paul.

One. Two. Three.

[The Guides tone through Paul.]

Each of you here is being seen, is being known, and we will say these words for you now:

You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.

And as we teach you, as we know you, as you are realized in our knowing, we say these words. You have come, not just for the self, but for the transition humanity now undergoes, for the reclamation of the sacred where it has been denied. And in remembrance of the Divine that has always been here, and simply seeks its own revelation from one who has the eyes with which to see, we thank you for your presence. Period. Period. Period.

(PAUSE)

When we dictate through him, we are well aware of your questions. What we wish to do now, after this brief pause, is continue a point that we intended to make and must be seen as certain. We begin here.

The organism that you are, the properties of the body and the energetic field, have things that they undergo in a lifetime that you accrue through experience, and experience is your teacher. We are never telling you that what you have learned was invalid, or unneeded for your growth. When you incarnate, you claim a path, and it is a path of learning and you choose the lessons that will benefit you most.

The claims that we offer you here are, in fact, known by you in several different ways. The authority that the small self holds, that would seek to use these claims for self-glory, must be understood as the aspect of self that is actually being transformed through the process that you undergo with us. But the Divine as who and what you are knows these words already.

Now, the encoding of each attunement in the vibratory field simply awakens the aspects of self that have always been in accord to them. In other words, friends, we are not claiming you as what you are not, but what you have always been and denied. The resonance of the energetic field, and the resonance of the body itself, is in some ways awakened through the encoding we offer in the language we use. It is available to you whenever it is invoked. But please understand, friends, this invocation is not about you getting what you want at the level of personality. It’s about releasing the idea of self that is demanding these things. So to claim “I know who I am in truth” is not to ennoble the small self, but to recognize the Creator within. “I know what I am in truth” is not the glorification of form. It is the reunification of form with its true nature or Source. “I know how I serve in truth”—again, an invocation by the Divine Self for its full expression to emerge.

Because we are teachers first and foremost, and because we care about the well-being of our students, we do our best to teach you well and claim you in your own authority as the one who must choose. We don’t want your honor. We want you to claim the Divine as your own birthright because, indeed, it is. The purification or the release of the old that you do undergo through these teachings—in stages, yes—are with merit, and they have their own outcome, yes, not as you would prescribe them. In fact, they will be better than what you think, and we use that word for Paul because it’s a teaching of a degree—better than it was before, and better yet than it will be as you continue to walk forward.

Now, the scale that we teach with is not what you think. Your idea of benefit is still, in most ways, mandated by the small self, who thinks a raise in pay, a finer house, a happier marriage is the gift of the Kingdom. “The Gift of the Kingdom,” and that will be the title of this chapter that we are, yes, beginning on this fine day, is being the Divine Self. And its attributes, its claims, are what you meet in everything you see. Period. Period. Period.

Yes, this is in the text. Stop now, please.

DAY THREE

When we teach you about what you may be, how you may come to be known, we try to teach you in outline, with an understanding that how the outline is filled is done through alignment with the individual will, which is still present, but in a modified state. The individual will, you see, the aspect of you that claims and knows in alignment to the higher, is present at each level of vibration. In a higher vibrational state, even the will is assumed in agreement to its Source. So while it is still will, while there is still choice, the choices, in some ways, are made in a higher agreement, and the higher agreement is knowing, and knowing is faith.

The realization of the Divine as who and what you are, the realization of the manifestation of it, comes in articulation. Articulation simply means that the agreement to form is made new. The agreement to form itself is made new. And the challenge here is that the body that you hold is in coherence to a manifest landscape that operates in low self, or low vibration, or low agreement. In other words, the claims you have made collectively about the manifest world enshroud the manifest world in density—everything is of God, but operating at different levels of oscillation or tone—and by enshroud we mean dampened, diminished, placed in shadow. And the corporeal form that you have taken, the Divine as who and what, come in form in the low field, claims agreement to the Divine that is also shrouded, or oscillating low. When you release the shield, the vestments, the fears of being who and what you have always truly been, the Divine Self as you, the lifting of tone in your body claims all things in a higher degree than they were previously known as. If you understand that the Divine, present as all things, can only be known by you at the level of accord you have come to—in other words, what you see is in agreement to who you think you are—you will understand that, as you lift to the Upper Room, the sight that you hold claims all things in a higher accord because it cannot not do so.

If you understand this principle—that the song sung in a high note is not trying to be high, it simply is, and that that note confirms itself in the field around the singer—you will see that there is no effort involved. It is about being, and being at a level of alignment where the release that you have undergone at an individual level goes into accord or agreement with all that you see. In other words, you are unshrouding, unmasking, divesting what has been covered, or shielded, or known or held in fear, to the divine nature that has always been present, but hidden. The mysterious world, you see, the unseen world, is not what you think, and your fear of the unknown ultimately must be seen as the denial of God.

Now, if God is all things, God is also in the unknown, and, as the unknown, God may be witnessed, and to witness the unknown and know it as of God is to claim faith. To perceive a world that seems to be unfolding in chaos, or disruption that you wish not to see, as of God is not amplifying the negativity or the fear. In fact, it is releasing it, divesting it, allowing it to be re-known, because what is beneath all things, the infrastructure of all manifestation, is that one tone, that one note. The Word is all things that you may know of as God. Because you put yourself in shadow, because civilizations have been built in shadow, you see a world in shadow and believe that to be the only world there is. Simultaneously to the world that you perceive is the higher, but you do not see the Kingdom until you lift to the Upper Room or the level of consciousness where you are no longer investing in or provoking fear. To provoke fear means to expect it. “We are in uncertain times, the worst is yet to come” is an act of faith in the disregard of a loving God. “Now, what does that mean?” he says. Anything unknown may be invested in fear. A darkened room where you may walk, where no things are seen, are only frightening, what is unseen, because of the unknown. When the light is turned on, all things are made new. And your regard for what you witness in the light can claim what you see as of Source.

Now, some of you say, “I know who I am. This is my job. This is my life. This is how I demand to be known. I would like a spiritual life so I may find comfort in my fear, but I don’t want to do any heavy lifting. I don’t want to be challenged. I certainly don’t want to become the Word made flesh. That’s for someone else, if it can even be so.”

In fact, what you are saying is you wish to rest in shadow, and you may choose this if you wish. It’s what you have known, and the comfort of the known is often enough for an individual who seeks to hide from the light. You may walk into that dark room with a flickering candle, you may hold it before you and begin to see what might be there, or you can become the flame, the flame that lights the darkness, that illumines the world and transforms all it encounters through the alchemical act of recognition. “The Divine is present in all I see, regardless of what it has been claimed as or been known as.” To claim the darkest thing that you can see as in the light transforms what has been held in darkness. It does not mandate more of the same. You don’t summon more darkness. You cleanse it through the lifting.

Imagine a ship that was sunk to the bottom of the sea. It is covered in barnacles. You can’t see what the ship once resembled in the depths of the darkness of the sea. The lifting of the wreckage of the ship being brought to the light is a passage the individual undergoes, and also the passage that manifestation undergoes when a city is made new, when a government is made new, when your relationship to your bodies are in fact made new. Imagine that lifting thing, that old ship, if you wish, being brought forth, slowly and carefully, to break through the surface of the water. As it has been lifted, the sand that has accrued in the bowels of the ship, the barnacles clinging to the side, are washed away, are released, and what is lifted above the water surface is seen in a new environment. You may think of it as the Upper Room. Now, what was underneath the water lived in a world underwater. The landscape under the ocean surface looks a certain way. The sun may be seen in reflection through the waves, but the darkness is where you abide. When you are lifted by degree to the surface of the water, you lift at the level that you can hold. As you divest what the ship has held, what it has accrued underneath the waves, you are lightened. And as you are lightened, you draw closer to the surface of the sea, where the water is only informed by the light from above. By the time you break the surface, you have acclimated to this level of light. But you still find yourself in a new world, not under the ocean floor, half buried in the sand, but upon the ocean surface, and made new.

Now, this is the passage that we have been inviting you to, and will take you through as you allow it. And allowance is a key now, because to allow this passage is to be the ship in an agreement to lift and release those things that have been hidden or have stayed in shadow at the depths of the ocean floor. Some of these are things you might understand—“that terrible incident when I was a child,” “the way my father treated me,” or “how my teachers taught me wrongly.” But much of this has been accrued through the collective, through generations of acclimation to a darkened room, where the idea that the light can be so present that it can transform what it encounters is seen as impossible because it has not been so.

This is not a new teaching. In fact, it’s a very old one, and it predates your idea of time. When they say there is nothing new under the sun, that is ever true. But much has been forgotten, and much has been a distraction from your rediscovering or reencountering your true nature. And by distraction we mean those things that humanity has created that you may deem as a false god—the money of the world, the acclaim of the world, the desires you think you should pursue to be the person you think you should be. The being that you are, unfettered, lifted to the sea to break through to the surface, is the one who comes, and the one who announces the words to the world before him or her: “I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.” To be lifted is an agreement to a process of transformation. It is not a convenient process. It is an alchemical one, because the matter that you know yourself as is in fact transformed, alchemized, as it is transposed to a higher song or higher level of accord, where what it meets, what it sees, what it sings to, is also of ilk, or like accord.

The light that you are perceives the light that is all things. It does not deny a man entrance to the Kingdom. It welcomes every man, every woman, every being, with open arms, because you have become the gateway to this manifestation. At this level of vibration, you are lifting what you encounter, not by choice, but by being. And because you cannot deny God in any form it shows in, there is no darkness to hide from, only darkness to be re-seen as of God. Now, some of you fear this. “There are terrible things in the world. I will not see them as of God.” When you release the idea of terrible and the meanings that it has held, when you release the subjective view of what you would like or wish to see, what you do is dismantle a structure.

Now, imagine the bones of a house have been decorated to resemble something frightening. It is decorated with dark turrets, and a dungeon where perhaps terrible things have occurred. To release the dungeon is to know the dungeon beyond the name dungeon, and to release the idea of judgment of what has occurred. And suddenly you have a basement, and nothing more. And suddenly you have what the basement is made of, perhaps stone and sand, and stone and sand have no merit other than what they are. You do not judge it, but you can accept that the stone and the sand are of the earth, and the earth is of God.

Now, we are taking you through a descriptive process of deconstruction, when the only real purpose here is to illustrate that you are the one that makes something wrong, makes something dark. And to re-see what you see doesn’t make what happened there okay, does not apologize for the thing that has been, it’s to receive it beyond the names it has been given or the power that it has been endowed with, because what you put in darkness, what you call evil, what you demand to be in darkness, calls you right beside it. To lift something that has been named in these ways is not to forgive it. It is to re-know it. And this is the act of the one who has been given dominion. Nothing is more powerful than God unless you make this thing more powerful. While the collective does this, and you’ve gone into agreement with the collective to it, the antidote is present in this teaching, which is, again, the claim “I am free, I am free, I am free.” The one who knows who he is, knows who she is, knows what he/she is, is indeed free, because she is not bound to heresy or the denial of the Divine which has taken form in your plane through the names you have gifted things.

Now, this is a teaching of alchemy or transmutation, and the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” as sung from the Upper Room, is the claim of the Divine in witness to itself, and indeed it transforms what it encounters. Just as the shadow is obscured in the darkness, it is revealed by the light as what it has always been, merely something that has filtered or denied the Divine that has always been present as and for it. Our attunement today to the teaching, “Behold, I make all things new,” is to support all of you in a higher level of attunement, but you must understand that the broadcast of this claim in the vibrational field is the result of the prior attunements. These are not magic words, and we are not asking you to play a concerto before you have learned the scales on the piano. At this moment, most of you are simply understanding that you are as a song that has been sung in a tone or a vibrational field in accord to a manifest world. And you are understanding, theoretically, that you can lift to a higher level of attunement and then manifest or claim a new world into being through the witness of the Divine. But the alchemist, the one who knows who he is, what she is, how she serves, who has come in divine form, does not ask for this. She aligns to it through will. And the demonstration of the effect of the prior claims, as a chord played on a piano, is the tune you sing in agreement to all that has been named in any language other than God.

We will explain what this means. If, indeed, there is one note sung in the entire world, in the entire universe, and this one note is sung into manifestation or articulation, the Divine as all things, and everything made in form is in vibration at varying tone, in high and low tone, you will understand that all reclamation is is the realization of that one note, God as the only song, and everything seen may be lifted, unveiled, re-seen, in its true vibrational knowing. The Divine knows what it is. The cactus knows it is holy. So does the butterfly. They do not question their true nature. You are the ones that deny your divinity, and because you’ve been so intent on this you’ve denied it in everyone else, built borders and walls, decided who is worthy and who is not, and this is the decree of fear and separation. To lift beyond the walls, to lift above separation, is to see all things as they have truly been—of God, but in denial of it. And as you are in the higher octave where you cannot deny God, where you will not deny God, in fact you are lifting all you see, simply by being. Through your own relevance of vibration, a new world is seen.

Now, if you wish, imagine a world before you, a world that you have known that has been held in shadow or known in fear. Imagine that this world has continued to affirm fear, because it has agreed to it because it knew nothing more. What we would like you to do is witness this world from the Upper Room, and reclaim it in a higher tone, a higher agreement, through alignment and agreement to what is always true. You may say this, if you wish:

“I know who I am in truth. I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. I am free. I am free. I am free.”

And now you may say this:

“I am in the Upper Room.”

And now see the world, the world in shadow, spinning before you, and make this claim to all you see:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, this is a claim of realization, and in this claim you become the doorway that transmutes the lower to the higher, that lifts what it sees, not through effort, but by alignment. The claim “Behold, I make all things new” will be revealed in this text as the key to the Kingdom, as the way forward as to what manifests—heaven, if you may understand this—on the manifest plane. The manifestation of heaven on earth is misunderstood. It is the presence of God, the true presence of God, that is heaven. To walk in this light, to abide in this love, to know everyone as your brother, as your family, is the decree of the Kingdom. Your tribes, you see, how you perceive yourselves in separation, while they have dignity, they are also fraught with fear. To know your brother as yourself, to love your sister as yourself, is the key to the teaching. And it is the Divine Self who has this capacity, not the personality structure, who has been invested in fear, and perhaps believes she is not worthy.

We take you here, to this Upper Room, again and again. It is our classroom. It is where we meet you. This is, indeed, in the text. We will take a pause for Paul. Period. Period. Period.

Stop now, please.

Q: How do the Guides create their pedagogy? How do they learn, and how do they perceive what the collective needs to hear?

A: Oh, we would love to answer this one, but we’re going to have to keep Paul out of the way. These are the kinds of questions he gets frightened by. Now, we understand who we are, because some of us have known ourselves in form, others of us have had no need to, but our awareness of who we are mandates we know who you are, and consequently the requirements of not only the individual, but a civilization or even a species, to transcend what it has created in fear. And the simplicity of this teaching is that that is the teaching. You are being taught to transcend, not through force of will, but alignment of will to a new agreement of what is always true.

Now, when you ask of pedagogy, what is the history of this pedagogy, the history of this pedagogy predates language because everything prior to language is simply idea. When idea is given language, it is actually lowered, because to give something a name actually diminishes it, or reconciles it to a defined state. And the totems you have used in history, whatever gods you have known, created in form and symbol, were in fact reduced by man to idols, including the man on the cross who was the Christ, who knew himself as of God. To become the Christ is never to be Jesus. It’s to know who you are beyond codification and even of language. Now, the transition of a species—in this case you all—to its true nature, which is Source, is not only an idea, but an idea that has been ordered to provide consequence, and by consequence we mean result. The result of this teaching, if this teaching is adhered to, is a new recognition of value, of being, of presence, and of God. The distortions of old, including the codified language of religion, are actually released as you lift beyond them. This doesn’t make them wrong. It simply means they are not applicable at this level of tone or field.

Now, Paul wants answers. “Well, where are you from? How long have you been teaching?” We predate humanity as a species, but we are of humanity because we are in love with you. And by that we simply mean we are you, but in a higher articulated state. Those of us who were in form were disciples, in some ways, of the truth of this teaching in whatever form it was taught in, and much of these were taught before what you know of as recorded time. But if you believe that there were not civilizations prior to recorded time, you would be mistaken. This is not the first time humanity has reconciled to be lifted. It will not be the last either, because you will always have choice.

Now, reconciliation with your true nature has been taught in most orders of mystical thought throughout time, but in different language and in an adherence to the gods that you have known by different names. All these gods are one God, known in separation. We do not deny them. We are assumed in them, because, as of God, there is nothing separate. So the Divine as all things must be inclusive of the god of the mystery school, the god of the Babylonians, or the god of what you would know of as Atlantis, and prior. There are names, there are traditions, that have endured throughout time that are taught still in some way or other, but they are fragments of the whole, best memories pasted together through different traditions. They are still available, and they are this teaching, but this is the complete teaching that was intended and will be delivered through Paul as long as he is willing to sit still long enough to take the dictation. What humankind does with these teachings is up to humankind, but they are being delivered again for the times you sit in. Period. Period. Period.

Q: I had a similar question. The world is crazy, crazy times right now, and is this the dismantling of the kingdom that we see around us now? And if so, has this happened to previous civilizations? So just where is this all headed?

A: Re-creation, assumption, and the new made seen, made visible, by your agreement. We have said this many times. Humanity has a choice. You stand at a crossroads. This is, indeed, a dismantling of the old, and a revealing of what has been hidden, and the denial of God that has been playing out in all different ways. Cherish the one beside you. Know yourself as worthy. Honor your brothers and your sisters, even when you disagree with their politics or their religions or what they would do to be heard. You are all deciding, one and all, how you will move forward. And this transition may be graceful, or may be very difficult. It depends highly upon your choices. The act of fear, to claim more fear, will always be present, and you may elect to choose it. But, understand, when you claim fear and separation you contribute to the chaos and the darkness the chaos brings. You are not denying the chaos by lifting to the Upper Room. You move to a placid sea where you may lift what you see to a new way of being, a new realization. You cannot do this in the low field. All you can do is pick up a stick and throw it at someone. In the higher realm, there is no fear, all men are one, and your realization of this supports the realization of all. Paul interrupts. “Has this happened before?” Of course it’s happened before, in recorded time and prior. All the civilizations that predate you have gone through rises and falls, and you are in one now. The dismantling of the old need not be horrible, but you cannot predicate your well-being on what you have known, because the time has come for all things to be made new. Period. Period. Period.

DAY FOUR

We have come to teach you about what you are, and the manifestation of what, the being as the Divine Self that has come as each of you and seeks to be announced in the claim “I Have Come.” The manifestation of the Divine in form—articulation, if you wish—is a process you engage in when you come to an agreement that the Source of all things is indeed the Source of who and what you are. And how this progresses will be this text, if we are allowed to teach as we wish.

Now, each of you have come before us with some awareness of your innate nature. “I comprehend my divinity. I understand that I must be of God, and without being of God I would not be.” So while you say yes at a certain level of agreement, you can’t comprehend re-articulation, and what this really means is that the matter that you are, the form that you have taken, is re-known through undergoing a process. You may call it a process of re-articulation, manifestation, or simply agreement to what is always true. The denial of the Divine, as we often say, is the only real challenge you face, but re-articulation at this level indeed comes at the cost of the old. And the one who has come as the new—re-known, re-spoken, “I am Word”—has come in a way that dismantles structure.

Now, to understand what this means is really very simple. You stand in a room at a level of oscillation or vibration that you have not known thus far. The impact of the oscillation or manifestation actually transmutes, reclaims in a higher way, that which was known prior. You are not doing this through intent—simply by being. And the agreement we come to you with, and you may hold us to it if you wish, is that this may be done.

Now, you are understanding yourselves in a doorway of great potential. “Yes, this may be done, but can it be done, and, indeed, will it?” We will say this to you. We are laying out a treatise on the manifestation of the Divine in form, not so you may be deified, but in some ways returned to your true nature, the true agreement that was imparted to you at the very birth of your species, and of course at the direction of the True Self, who seeks this embodiment because, indeed, she knows who she is.

Now, when we teach through the man before you, we do our best to withstand his concerns, his confusion, or perhaps resistance to the teachings that come through. Each of you comes to us with your own concerns. “Who will I be if this happens?” “What does it mean to be this?” And, in fact, “what does it mean to re-articulate or re-see a world that has been known in old ways?” You will complicate this in every way you can. What you can’t understand is all this is restoration, clear restoration, and what this planet is undergoing now is a sweeping of the table so that the new may be seen, may come into form, may be reclaimed at the cost of what you thought was so. Dominion, you see, is the speaking into being, articulating the Monad as who and what. And the claim we offered you when we began these teachings, “I am Word,” is the spoken agreement for the Creator, come as all things, to be sung, to be spoken. And the articulation of each of you through the claim “I am Word” is the agreement that was made when you were first conceived in the idea of articulation of being, of manifestation.

Now, some of you say to us, “I can conceive of this in theory. I can undergo a process you say. But I must have my way. Things must go as I say they should. They must be as I have seen them. I will have my spiritual life. I will be honored by it as long as I get what I want.”

The days are ending of getting what you want. And we say this for all of humanity. The days of deciding what will be, through a template of the old, is being released. And what will come in its place, a higher template, a higher way of agreeing to what can be, comes in its place as you all say, “It may be.” It must begin with that. “It may be. It may be so.” This opportunizes everything. Each of you who says, “This is the most I can know myself as, the best the world can be; the worst has been seen, it will not get better,” reaffirms a closed door. The Upper Room, where we teach you from, is wide open. You are pouring into it, one and all, to say, “Yes, I may. Yes, I may sing a new song, be known in a higher way, be made new by the agreement to be who I have always been, and refused, denied, chosen to ignore, and said no to.” When the door opens, the light floods in. The light has flooded this plane and illumined the darkness. And the chaos you are withstanding now is what happens when you begin to see what has always been, what you have chosen to deceive yourselves through, or to deny the light in. When the light comes to a darkened room, it exposes what’s been hidden. And when what is seen as hidden is re-known, reconceived as of God, it is in fact lifted to a higher way of being, a new thought, a new conceit of potential.

What you damn, damns you back, yes. But what you bless, which simply means what you claim the presence of the Divine as, will be lifted, and all things will be re-seen in this acknowledgment: “I am one with the light of all things.” Underline all. It is going to be the most important word in this text—the light in all, all things, nothing excluded. The Divine as all things doesn’t make things okay, put a Band-Aid on a wound that is seeping. What the claim does, the inherent Divine in all things reclaims what has been ignored, what has been denied, what has been refused, said no to, in its true state. Underline the word true. It is also an important word. What is true is always true. And the innate nature of all things is the Source of all things, in varying ways, spoken into being—what you call a tree, what you call an ocean, what you call a human being. All things are of one Source, and, as all things are lifted to their true nature, they sing a new song, in agreement, in congruence, with the Divine as all.

Now, what it means to be one with Source must be discussed in this text because it is deeply confused for most of you. The idea of re-articulation, being re-known in a higher octave or the Upper Room, is simply understanding that what you are and have been is in union, regardless of what the small self or the directives of culture or society or historical data might tell you. The idea of separation itself, the idea that there is something between you and Source, must be re-comprehended in order for this teaching to continue. The manifest Divine must be all things, and all things must be seen anew, or, in fact, reclaimed, in the bright light that is here. When you first turn on a light in a darkened room, you see what was, what you have amassed in fear, hidden in shadow or darkness. What you see before you today in the world you know is the remnant of what has been, which is all the denial of God in varying ways of expression. When something is re-known as of God, it is re-sung, spoken anew. And to be spoken anew is re-articulation.

The action of this text, and there is, indeed, an action to it—Paul has been asking, “What is the action of this text?”—is the re-articulation, not only of the being you are, but of the plane that you express through. “Behold, I make all things new”—underline the all again—inclusive of the body you hold, inclusive of what is seen, and what has been denied. Each of you says yes to embark on this journey. Each of you says, “Yes, I will. Yes, I may. It can be so.” But to look beyond your shoulder to the shore that you are releasing, as you find yourself in a new sea, calls many of you home to the known, to what was once agreed to, because the understanding of what was is far easier to cope with than what has not yet been spoken into form. What will be spoken into form, in this text and the ones after, is the manifestation of the Monad in agreement to be known by all mankind, all humankind, if you prefer.

Now, the process humankind undergoes is quite distinct. What, in fact, you are is an aspect of God, known through individuated consciousness. And as individuated consciousness is reclaimed in union with Source, the small self—the one who thinks she knows the ropes, will get his way, may even ascend to the Kingdom on his own terms—is terrified. “I will not be renounced. I will not be ignored. If I don’t have my way, I will not go on this journey.” The reclamation of this aspect of self that we indeed call the small self, and we call it that in love, is the transition from thinking to knowing. Thinking has its place. You are gifted with thoughts. You be a thought in articulation, if you truly know it. But to understand knowing, to comprehend the self in knowing, does not displace the egoic structure. It actually reclaims it as of God and allows it to live in its own agreement that in some ways has been usurped by its higher being. Underline its higher being. If the ego is not of God, then nothing is.

So the reclamation of the idea of self has been party to this teaching in every text we have written. “I am Word through my body, Word I am Word, I am Word through my vibration, Word I am Word, I am Word through my knowing of myself as Word,” the first attunement we ever brought you, claimed identity in knowing. When knowing is activated—“I know who I am in truth, I know what I am in truth, I know how I serve in truth”—the liberated self, the one who has come to this agreement, can claim “I am free,” and claim the Upper Room as where she stakes her life, where he is in his expression. And all things may be known here, in a re-articulated state, once the resident of the Upper Room confirms the one thought, and the only thought, needed for conscious ascension. All things are of God. All things. Everything must be. The denial of the light is what claims you in shadow. The denial of the inherent divinity in anyone or anything puts it in shadow, calls you beside it. You live in a ruined kingdom, thinking it is splendorous. When a ruin stands before you, know God as ruin and see the ruin remade in an articulated state of a degree that the small self cannot even imagine.

Now, the denial of God first is the self you know, and then the denial in all things, which is the action of the god of fear. “I will deny God in all ways” is what you must come to, and say no to. “I have chosen to see the light where darkness has prevailed. I choose to see the light where I have been fearful. I choose to see the one before me as he truly is, beyond what I would think, assume, or decide should be, based on my ideas born in history.” The alchemist is in the present moment. That is where the magic occurs, not yesterday or tomorrow, but in the present moment. You may only know God in the moment you sit in, and everything is perceived, all things perceived, in the moment you sit in.

Now, some of you say to us, “Well, I understand the theory. You may say it is so. It is too much to ask, will not be done.” We are not asking this of you. We are supporting you in your own claims. The dismantling of a civilization is before you now. The choices to affirm what was, or what can be, are before you now. Everything you thought was so is soon to be released, to be re-known, to be reclaimed, in a higher state of being. And, again, when the light is called into the darkness, what it exposes is what has been seen and chosen to be denied, by the individual or the collective. That is where you stand today. But where you will be taken is far away a much better way of establishing being.

We will explain this for Paul. Because you have lived in the basement so long, you assume the world is a basement. Everything you’ve collected in this basement has served a purpose of one kind or another. You assume your world, your idea of a world, must be what every world is. And that is not so. So you lift to the Upper Room. You have an idea of who and what you are in a new state. You experience the consciousness, and perhaps the lifting of matter, which we have taught you in prior texts and will resume here for the newer student. But you don’t understand that a world made new is unlike what you perceive, and also what you perceive in form now. Imagine a crystal with many facets. You look into the crystal. The view varies from what angle you look at and how the light moves through it. In an articulated state, as the Monad, you are perceiving through a lens of truth—underline truth—not convenient truth, not personal truth, but universal truth. And that is simple. All is of God or nothing is. When you see something of God, and you are in vibration at this level, what is seen is lifted. It is spoken into being in a higher accord.

The Kingdom is claimed, not by the individual, but by the collective. A new world is born when each human being that has hidden from the light reveals herself to it. And what happens when the individual is revealed is that she reveals to others the light she has always been. The idea of illumination in some tower on some singular mountaintop, where the sage may exist in her piety, is in fact replaced by the being that you are in a new way of expression. Your vibration, which is the oscillation of your field from the level of the Upper Room, is what claims things new. And the agreement of this text, the alignment to this text, will be the re-patterning of the manifest world so it may be re-seen and reclaimed.

He interrupts the teaching. He has too many questions. They will be answered through these teachings as you can align to them. The challenge we face with where we take you now is that you cannot conceive of it through the practical lens of prior association—what it means to be of God, what it means to be enlightened. Even the idea of re-articulation, which we have explained, is so moored in old language that it is diminished by your seeking to understand it.

When you be as you have always been, when your true nature is expressed, there is no explanation required. You simply be. And in your being you know, in your knowing you act, and the action of the one who has come is the expression of God in the claim “Behold, I make all things new.”

Each of you says yes to embark from the shore of the old. You want a map to direct you. We will offer you, as we can, the way to navigate a new sea, to call forth the wonders that exist beyond the old. We will not demand anything of you. You must be in choice. But the agreement we gift you with is that we will be here with you. We will sing with you. We will hold your hand to support you in steadying the sail when the winds feel too great. And we will say yes, we will say yes, we will say yes, to all who say, “I am willing to be re-known.”

Indeed, this is the end of the first chapter. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

2

THE GIFT OF BEING

DAY FIVE

You ask yourselves questions about what will be. You reference the known, outcomes based on the known, what you have seen, what you have believed could be. When we speak about the future, we speak about potentiality, and any future is claimed with a mandate of potential, what you believe can be or will be when you understand that the idea of the future itself is simply a possibility.

Now, your choices today indeed inform tomorrow’s ideas, practicalities, the things you can choose or undertake. When the collective changes, when a great choice is made to re-comprehend identity on a collective scale, everything goes up in the air because there is little recourse to the old that will sustain you through a shift of this magnitude.

Now, identity, as you understand it, the idea of self, can be understood as a way of being in the world with a name and attitude, an idea of self that goes about its business, does the best she can, and claims opportunities to learn. The True Self as who and what you are does not release this, but the small self that you have understood as who you are is in some ways moved to the side, or re-seen in a higher way. In other words, while personality exists and is operative in the Upper Room, it is not commandeering the ship. It is a passenger, and a passenger that is loved, and, indeed, cared for, by the captain or the True Self.

Imagine a sea now, a vast sea with millions of boats turning in a high wave. When the tide is changed, when the sea is rough, the personality will seek to control, mandate destination, do what it can do to withstand the storm. In a higher way, the voice that you hear that says, “Be still and know,” is the voice that calms the sea. It is the True Self that will hold your hand while you steer, that will hold the rudder while you worry. The wind itself, the great change that you are upon and experiencing collectively, will continue. But you will do so in steady accord. You will arrive to the destination that is appointed to you, perhaps not where you expected to be, but where you have been gifted to be, in the claim we offer you, “Behold, I make all things new.” Now, each of you says yes at an individual level to a transition to what we call the True Self. And what it claims for you is the life that you find yourself in, perhaps not the life that the small self decreed should be but that the True Self knows will be in greatest support of realization. And, again, realization is knowing, and when you know who and what you are, you know who and what others are as well. The agreement we have made for you at this juncture is to support this transition, both at the level of the individual and of the collective. The transition you are now undergoing, the species itself, is moving beyond fear to what may exist beyond it. But you don’t move beyond something without facing it, without seeing its consequences, so that the choice may be made by each of you in a higher way. We offer you this today as a way of moving through fear:

“The sea that I sail upon is wide. The sea that I sail upon is calm. And the sea that I sail upon is claiming me in accord with my highest purpose, my highest good. And my true nature is revealed to me through this transit.”

If you understand the idea of transit, moving from one place to another, you will understand what you are undergoing now. The trials of the past will one day fade, and what you see before you, in the ever-present now, is great potential. And understand potential quite simply means something that may be claimed. To claim a new world into being is to decree the new world is present. And, again, the claim “I know who I am in truth, I know what I am in truth, I know how I serve in truth” will claim you in agreement to the true nature who is claiming her inheritance, the Upper Room and the Kingdom that may be seen here. The claim “Behold, I make all things new” is, indeed, a claim of re-articulation and manifestation, as the Divine Self bears witness to itself in all manifestation. The idea of making something holy becomes quite impossible when all you perceive is of God. And the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” the announcement of the presence of the Divine in a re-articulated state, in fact lifts what matter is to the highest octave it can be known in while maintaining form. Underline those words, please—while maintaining form.

Now, each thing you see when you look out the window, or perhaps around the room, is in vibration. Everything is of Source and known by you by name. “That is a footstool.” “That is an arbor tree.” “That is a window.” The codification of meaning in most cases decides for you what a thing will be or should be, and your relationship to that thing, indeed predicated by history. “This is what a window is for” and “what a footstool is.” When you understand that the Source of all things has been now known as footstool or tree, you can reclaim it in a higher octave. All you are really doing is re-seeing what was known in one way in a higher octave.

Now, you must understand that the higher octave is present already. It has not gone anywhere. Each of you rises to the Upper Room through the acclimation to it, or vibrational accord that you can comprehend and agree to. The very simple claim “I am in the Upper Room” will support this lifting. And the agreement to be lifted is actually not done by you as the small self, but in the assumption of the small self that happens through the act of vibration in a higher way. In other words, the claim “I am in the Upper Room” supports the octave of acclimation or agreement that the Upper Room supports.

“Please explain this,” he says. “I am becoming confused.” The act of lifting to a higher accord is not done by the small self. The act of lifting itself supports the assumption or appropriation or agreement by the small self to the high frequency that is the Upper Room. So while the claim is made in accord with the True Self, the choice to speak the words, the act of lifting, in some ways moves beyond the small self’s purview, because the small self cannot lift itself to the high octave through force of will.

Now, in the high octave, the agreement is made to behold all things anew, and, again, not through will, but through the agreement of what has always been so. In other words, the tree as vibration, the footstool as vibration, the window as vibration. You are not discounting what things have been. You are re-seeing them with the eyes that know who they are and perceive all things in agreement to truth. Now, this is alchemy. It is the act of alchemy to perceive Spirit in the face of something other. Because the alchemist knows all things as of God, his or her perception can actually translate the vibrational field or the essence of anything to its true nature. You are not changing things, improving things. You are seeing what has always been in a higher state of consciousness.

“What is the purpose of this?” he asks. “I understand the principle, but I want to rest my feet on a footstool. I want to look out a window. What is actually changed here?” Well, what is in fact changed is less the object than your relationship to the landscape and all that expresses in it. Underline the word all. It is not just the footstool that is made new. It is, in fact, all things. And the congruence you hold from the Upper Room to this new landscape is simply a new way of being expressed in a manifest world. We have said many times that any song may be sung in a higher octave. And what you are doing here, in some ways, through your tone or through your alignment, is summoning the Divine that has already been present to a level of witness where all things are made new.

“Well, again, I understand the principle,” he says. “But what is actually happening?” Imagine you have a song sung in low vibration or low tone. Everything the song calls to it must be of like accord. When you lift to a higher vibrational tone and the song is sung, you are calling to you all things that are of like resonance. So in fact the world is lifted, not only through your decree, but through your presence. And the decree is very simple. “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, if you wish to work with this in practicality, you may be surprised by your experience. It is not as if you are walking up the supermarket aisle, deciding what will be lifted and what will not be. It is your experience of being and the experience of what you encounter in a higher resonant field. This high field is present now. You simply have not been aligned to it. Your direction, since your inception on this plane, has been to be in agreement with a manifest world that has operated through an idea of separation, the collective idea that you are not one with your Source, or could never be. Now, the idea of union, which will be addressed in this text, will now be understood in the simplest way we can offer it. You have never been separate. You’ve just believed yourself to be. And in this decree of separation you have maintained vibration, or a level of accord, that claims experience as separate. When you lift beyond separation, what begins to happen is the lifting of the landscape, the high landscape that has already been present. What you are seeing is revelation, the old becoming the new in a re-seen state.

Now, we will offer you an assignment, and we will say this carefully. If you make the choice today to go into the alignment that we have taught you, “I am in the Upper Room,” maintain the vibration of the Upper Room through intent, “I am in the Upper Room, I maintain the frequency of the Upper Room,” and then go for a walk, begin to understand that you are beginning to witness a world with new eyes. The realization of the Monad, or the Divine Self, in actualization is the triumph of the Divine over the lower identity that has known itself in separation. As you continue to acclimate to what we call the Upper Room, it becomes effortless to maintain the octave. You have a new foundation because you have chosen it at the cost of what was once in separation.

Now, the decree “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” which we have taught in prior texts, has been crucial to this manifestation. Again, the claim “I Have Come,” a claim of dominion, supports the process of re-articulation in an individual that re-acclimates every aspect of self to the Upper Room, or the level or octave that this vibration claims to itself. Now, to claim something to itself quite simply means that in the Upper Room, in a re-articulated state, you have simply manifested in a new way. And by agreement, which very simply means vibrational accord, you have claimed everything you have encountered to you at this new level.

The Kingdom, as we say, is the realization of the Divine in all things, and the one who perceives this is simply in alignment to it. She is not trying to fix something, improve something that once was. She is perceiving it in a higher state, without the residual affect or meaning that has been gifted to it through prior collective accord. In other words, to comprehend the meaning of the claim “Behold, I make all things new” is to comprehend what something has always been beyond the meaning it has been endowed with—what a footstool does, what a window should look like, what a tree will be. When things are moved to an agreement of essence, they are in vibration in a much higher way than you have been used to in the lower octave. And the senses that you see, experience, comprehend a world through, are being re-appropriated in a higher alignment so that this perception becomes far more normal than what you once knew. In other words, the self that believes herself as separate perceives all things in separation. When you understand Source as all things, you begin to perceive all things as an expression of Source, which is what they have always been. The realization of this, and the knowing of this, is actually an act of reclamation. And the manifest world is in fact lifted to you, summoned, if you wish, by this agreement to be in alignment at this level of tone.

Now, everything in tone quite simply means that everything expresses in a scale of high and low and in-between. The octave that you are accustomed to operates this way, as does every octave that expresses beyond it. When you enter the Upper Room, when you manifest at this level, in some ways while you are at the high end and beyond of the octave you have been accustomed to, you are still at the low note of the octave beyond it. In other words, you have taken the stairs to the fifth floor, which you thought was the top floor, only to find that there was a floor beyond it. In the Upper Room, there are rooms beyond. And your acclimation to the Upper Room and what may be seen here, what may be called into being through your presence, must be understood as the Divine. We will say this now. If all things are of God, all things may be re-known as of God. And your articulated state in the Upper Room commands, by nature of presence and being, that what you anoint, by presence and being, by how you have claimed something from this high level, supports its realization of itself in just such a way.

He has too many questions today, and they were expected. “But what does the world look like? How do we operate in this world? What is the benefit of lifting something? Why don’t we just do what we do and make the best of it? Finally, that’s all we have to do.” We would like to answer this in several ways, and the text we are dictating now intends to answer all these questions in sequence. But you must understand that what you are now being taught is about expressing beyond the old, and attuning at a level that you can’t comprehend yet through the litany of history that would try to explain this for you.

Imagine there was a color that has yet to be seen. You enter into a room that is this color. You have no way to understand it. It is not in the spectrum, but it exists. When you go to the higher, you have to arrive in increments. You have to align at the level of accord that you can comprehend, because the identity you have held is still operative, has things to do, and has not been eradicated. It is being assumed, which is very different. In other words, we will not thrust you into the new color where you have no bearings, no language, no way to discern. We will introduce you to the color, first as a fleck, then as a pool. And then, as you become acclimated to the pool, you may begin to experience the vastness of it. This is how most of you adjust to high vibration, through a process of acclimation, through wading into the ocean a step at a time as you get used to the temperature. You can dive in, if you wish, but you may be frightened when you encounter the unknown at a level of agreement that your consciousness has not fully aligned to.

Now, the demonstration of this teaching will, in fact, be the lives you live. And how you contribute to the awakening of humanity is simply your expression at this level or tone. You have aligned, you see, to a level of agreement. “I know who I am in truth, what I am in truth, how I serve in truth.” And from the Upper Room you lift what you encounter because what you see is made new, and is, in fact, lifted by your vision—again, the idea of “Behold.” What you see, what you comprehend, is made new by bearing witness to it, not as it has been seen, but as it can only be seen in the higher way.

Now, this teaching will continue as we can work through Paul to support the dictation. He has been concerned today. “Am I hearing well?” You are hearing fine. You are concerned about the content, which is actually none of your business. While we honor your presence here, and we honor your choice to be a student of this work, we would appreciate it if you would allow us to complete the lessons before interrupting. There will be ample opportunity for us to take every question you may ever have. We will take this one because he is insistent. “What happens to a world when it is made new?” It becomes the Kingdom. And that is the answer, and that is what awaits for you as this treatise continues.

We thank you for your presence. Stop now, please. Indeed, this is in the text. Period. Period. Period.

DAY SIX

What you understand, born in history, is the subject of this teaching.

Now, your idea of what was informs your sense of self—what it means to be a man, what it means to be a woman, what it means to be mortal. All of your experiences, in one way or another, are informed by these things. And the strata of vibration that is the Upper Room, while it may hold these ideas, does not hold them in solid ways. In other words, your sense of self has become elastic, beyond the idea of male, female, and even mortality.

Now, the rigidity of structure that the physical form has held, by your experience, constitutes the reason for your agreements to form. In other words, when you see something and you know it is mortal—be it a man, a woman, a tree, perhaps—you comprehend the finite. These things will die one day. They will not be here one day. And while that is true at this level of vibration, the density that form has taken will transform, will not be what it was, the True Self is eternal. And when you understand what the True Self really means or intends for itself, it is simply asking you, the one who aligns to it, to release all ideas that may be considered finite in order to agree or align to what expresses beyond it.

Now, while form may be seen as finite at the level of vibration you are aligned to, in the strata or experience or octave the collective has aligned to, it also may be comprehended in elasticity. And to understand the idea of this is simply to agree that what you see before you can indeed be re-seen in multiple ways. If you look at an object from one angle, you have a perception of the object. You will accrue data in order to describe it. You will think you know the object. But if you reverse your perception, perceive the thing from another angle, more will be revealed. You believe you understand reality, from the vantage point that the collective has held. But in fact what we are doing with the students of this work is supporting you each, if you wish it, in a re-perceiving of reality beyond its diminishment and the diminishment of form as you have claimed it through the collective alignment to a vibratory echo. Now, we will use the word echo here, now and again. And in this instance we simply mean you are experiencing an object in tone that exists in other ways. At the level of vibration you have come to, in this way your perception agrees with what you were taught to see, what a thing is called. And, again, to call something by name renders it as finite. Even the fire, the flame, is known in a finite way when it is called fire in any language you may use.

The alignment to the higher has several requirements, and to understand that anything may be re-seen is to simply understand that there is another way to perceive that which has been known in form and can be agreed to now from a higher vantage point. The understanding some of you have about what the Upper Room is—Christ Mind perhaps, a place of higher wisdom, higher claim, higher accord—is true. But until you experience it or know yourself there—and underline know, it means realize—you are simply understanding a potential. Now, a potential may be realized when it is, indeed, claimed. But to truly claim something in your inherent worth—“I am worthy of this claim”—requires you to say yes to a transition in identity beyond the linear way you have ascribed meaning to things, how time informs things, what mortality or immortality is, through your projection of these ideas onto the manifest world to a higher way of being.

Now, the trajectory to the higher is what the last text was about, the transition of identity and the discomfort one experiences as one aligns to a higher octave and begins to release the residual detritus that you have accrued through your occupancy in the lower vibrational realm. To stand in firmness in what we call the Upper Room is to make a new agreement of being. Underline the word being. It is the essence of this teaching in all ways. “I am being in the Upper Room. I am expressed in the Upper Room. I am announced in the Upper Room. I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

Now, the requirement of this alignment has been discussed prior. It is the release of the known, or, if better put, the codification of meaning that the known has held, what a thing must be called at the cost of what else it may be. You are not denying the tree is a tree, or the gender of the being before you. You are simply not limited to that description as an anchor of vibration. Alchemy, you see, in some ways is the re-speaking of the Divine as form beyond what it has presented as.

Now, the vacuum you experience in the lower vibrational realm can be explained very simply. Your understanding of what should be, based on precepts, prior instruction, the delineation of how reality should function through collective ideals, supports the re-creation of what was, the replication of the old. And every effort you make to move beyond these prior prescriptions, what a man should be, what a woman must be, the properties of a tree, if you wish, simply claim these things in a slightly altered state. “A man need not be masculine to be a man.” While this is true, it’s only a slight variation and is complicit to the original idea of what a man should present as. It holds the status quo deeply embedded in its potential. When you go to the Upper Room, you are ascribing something very different to the healing that will ensue when things are, in fact, re-known beyond the prior descriptors—in other words, man as expression of God, and man simply being the idea that the Divine is expressed as. If the fundamental truth of all things is, indeed, God, everything else then can become fluid. And by fluid we mean elastic, beyond the singular formation of the original language that humanity has used to codify its experience.

Now, you have lenses in a pair of glasses. Your vision is altered when the glasses are put on. Perhaps you see more clearly. Perhaps, if it’s a poor prescription, your vision is interrupted, distorted, and blurred. The agreement to finite form, which you occupy through the collective, is simply one pair of lenses that you have become used to. Re-perception, in some ways, moving to the higher accord and then agreeing to what you see, is the equivalency of a new prescription. It is uncomfortable at first. It’s not what you thought it was. Your beautiful aunt, who you so long admired, is now seen as something other. You wish to leave the room when she enters. The young child that you thought was inferior is now seen as the font of wisdom. The ways of seeing things in new ways, whatever you are choosing, disrupt the old, rename the old. And until you become comfortable in the higher perception—“Whatever this thing is I see, it must be of God”—until you can claim this in truth, you will be manufacturing a sense of identity, trying to prettify things. The once beautiful aunt, who is now seen as shrewish, will again re-articulate in her true nature, her true divinity—but only when the glasses are worn in a regular way.

Now, the idea of going high and low, from the upper to the lower, will be addressed in this text periodically. But the primary reason that you all fall back downstairs is your decision to what you see, how it should be known. “That awful thing.” “That terrible predicament.” “Those terrible people.” “That frightening aspect of myself that I never want to see again.” Until these things are seen anew, you will do your best to avoid. And from the Upper Room, which is inclusive of all things, you are no longer avoiding, because you have come in a higher vibrational field that cannot exclude. When you are excluding anything or anyone from what we call the Upper Room, the higher octave, Christ Mind, whatever you wish to know it as, as long as you are excluding from this, you cannot be there in any sustained fashion.

Now, again, the passage of taking occupancy here, beginning to rely on the new glasses as truthful, as something that you can trust by way of your experience, is in many ways what this text will be teaching. But your agreement is required, because without your agreement there is no passage.

He interrupts the teaching. “I thought all of humanity was going through this passage. Is it just those of us who agree?” In fact, humanity is undergoing great change, and the principle of change is to make obsolete what was. When you were seven years old, six was but a memory, five was a long memory, and three was forgotten. The transition humanity makes now in most ways will be done through agreement to withstand change, because the requirement of these changes is to know the self in a new way. When the old is taken from you, and you realize the old cannot be replaced in the ways you wish, you receive the new because it’s a necessity. You may learn through these choices, and we say many will. When you begin to acclimate to the changes that are occurring, indeed you ride the wave, you surf the change, you are party to the change. You are not overcome by it. You are not trying to grasp the old. Because a wave knows itself as of the sea in a continuum, the True Self agrees to the required passage, does not demand what was be what it was, and simply says, “Yes, I Have Come.”

Now, this does not make you small. It does not make you a victim to change. It makes you participatory to the agreement that what once was will now be seen anew. And the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” the re-envisioning of reality with the new pair of glasses, the lenses cleaned and perfect, will support you all in re-articulation of consciousness that may then be known as your physical reality. Please underline the word as. It is crucial to understand this. When something becomes this, it is re-known, and in its higher state you are knowing it as it has always been. The fundamental teaching of receptivity or vibrational accord, which is key to all of our texts, must be understood as the premise for the new. When you are in alignment to what expresses in a higher octave, when the old is no longer counted on to be foundational for you, you move into congruence with a landscape that expresses in a higher way. What this appears as to any individual will be known by them through perception. If you are mandating that the old be seen, you are stumbling with the new vision, relying on the old prescription to inform what you see, and demanding it be known in consequence to how it was originally named or claimed. Again, we will say this. When you name something, you diminish it, you concretize it, you define it, and there can be no elasticity, or no real transformation, until it is re-sung. And we use that word intentionally—re-sung, or intoned anew, in higher agreement.

Now, to claim something in a higher way is to say yes to what it has always been. And if you begin to say yes to what you see from a higher purview, it will then reveal itself. It’s really very simple if you understand it. Imagine you are walking through a house. You know what a couch is. You know what a chair is. You understand the room, the shape of the room, and all things in the room that have been named. In a higher way, you enter a space that holds objects, or things known as objects. You are simply saying yes to what you see without demanding that it be seen through the old language or prior description.

He interrupts the teaching. “We cannot forget language. We rely upon it. I want to sit on the sofa, not in the chair. Which is which without language?” Well, you’ve just answered a very good question. What is it without language but an idea that has been made into form that is now carrying a name that has requirements attached to it—what a couch should be, and perhaps how it differs from a chair. Imagine you walk into a garden with flowers you have never seen. We have already called them flowers, and decided that the place may be called garden. And in this idea we have already limited how you can perceive where you are—the idea of garden, the idea of flowers. What if you walked into a field of potential where things might be re-known? The simple “Yes, I am willing to re-see what I have seen, without the design, the patterning that has been placed upon it by those who came before me, I am willing to see these things anew” will actually support you in the act of re-articulation. But because in some ways your indoctrination in the lower field has been so complete, it feels abhorrent to you, or impossible to you, to find a new way of understanding.

Paul is seeing a man arriving in a new country. He doesn’t yet know the language. He wants what he wants in the old way. He will seek to go to the restaurant where he can order what’s familiar, and by the name he knew it as. In fact, what you are encountering is actually beyond the known, and you are not limiting yourself by the old language. You are simply knowing yourself as elastic to it, and it as elastic to how it’s maintained itself. Any word is made up of letters. The idea of chair can be spelled out for you. Each letter holds significance in vibration. And the meaning attached to the thing, as it has been named, is known by the individual—“My favorite chair”—or by the collective—“That comfortable chair”—or in some other way if it has been designed as such. “That modern chair.” “That old chair.” The descriptors have meaning, and the meanings in some ways claim you in relationship to what you see. From the Upper Room, the idea of re-articulation is very different. You are not reupholstering a chair, forgetting that a chair may be called chair. You are seeing the chair at its essence, a vibratory thing that has patterning that consequently may be re-known in a higher scale.

He interrupts the teaching. “So is it still a chair in the Upper Room?” In fact, it is beyond what it was. It does not discount what it was. The seven-year-old that you were does not discount the five-year-old. But she sees herself at a different height, having different experience. Her name may have been Alice then. It still may be Alice now. But Alice’s idea of Alice has been what is transposed to the Upper Room. So the one who sees the chair has been changed, and the chair itself, in its lifted state, is in fact re-known by the individual who is perceiving it. You understand basically that everything is in vibration, in coherence or form, that has been named, that is in manifestation, as a thing done. And underline the word done. You perceive the chair to always be a chair, but you don’t perceive the six-year-old to always be the six-year-old. And it’s really that simple. Everything may be re-known, and, in the re-knowing of it, the vibration of it is in fact transformed. When vibration is transformed, what it aligns to will be manifest in a different way. Your comprehension of who you have been is what is undergoing the change, not the essential you, not the one who is eternal. The one who knows who he is, is who has come, is who says, “Behold, I make all things new,” and, in re-articulation, re-comprehends a world, and lifts the world to herself in the perfect way that the True Self can. Once you understand that re-articulation is the act of God, and not the small self pursuing enlightenment, it becomes a very easy task. You become receptive, to be worked with, to be alchemized, because just as the chair is re-known, so is Alice, so is Frank, so is Brent and Paul. You are each being re-known in the altered state or vibratory accord that is the Upper Room.

“Now, is this a collective act?” he asks. “Is the world doing this?” Indeed, it is, but in different ways. The premise that we have spoken of prior, the unmasking of the false self to reveal the new, is where you sit as a collective. What is now being seen, in all its uncomfortable ways, is what you have claimed in fear, how you have decided one against the next, what should be, based in fear. And all war is, you see, is fear in some articulation. War is fear. Poverty, as you have claimed it, is a product of fear, as is greed, and so on. Your agreement to the new simply requires that the old be seen, because nothing will be lifted to the light until it is first placed in the light, seen in the light, and agreed to as of God.

Now, this is an important understanding. “Look at that terrible thing that’s been revealed, we cannot have that terrible thing” is a beginning to an understanding of change. But until what is called “terrible” is re-seen or re-known in the light, it would only be put back in darkness to take some other form, some other way of being hidden. When things are revealed, there is great discomfort. No one wants to see their small self in full fear. You seek to avoid it. But until you understand how frightened you have been, how you have acquiesced to collective fear and chosen in these ways, you will not see how you have participated to the landscape that the lower realm expresses in. You are in accord with everything you see, high, low, or in-between. In low vibration, or when you are operating in fear, you are in accord to all the fear that is. When you escalate in vibration, you confront these aspects of self that demand to be tethered to fear out of a belief in safety or false teachings that have taught you you should be afraid. As you untether, you lift beyond what you’ve known. The claim “I am free, I am free, I am free” is in support of this vibration. And as you enter the Upper Room, a new level of oscillation or tone, you are greeted by the potential that is already present here. And, indeed, that is what you are saying yes to.

To say yes to what is in the Upper Room is to see reality with new glasses. You must have the eyes with which to see the Kingdom, and the eyes that see the Kingdom are in alignment to the level of vibration that pre-exists what things have been called—before the chair was a chair, before the tree was a tree—what has always been, the one note sung in vibration that claims all things in manifestation. As we often say, there is one note sung in the universe, articulated as all things. To return to the one note sung is to return to your true nature.

Now, while your true nature expresses through you, you are still of the whole, of the collective, and your role is changed within the collective. Imagine that you were a song being sung all the time. The vibration of your tone, in echo, encounters the manifest world, and then lifts it to itself by nature of being. The idea of the Word made flesh has been somewhat misunderstood. The Word is already flesh, because all things are of God, but the vibratory tone, in de-escalation in finite form, is what is now being addressed so it may be transposed.

Now, everything you see, high, low, and in-between, has been invested with meaning by you. “That is a good man,” “a great opportunity,” “a terrible event.” And in most cases how you decide what a thing is, is confirmed by the collective. “We all thought that was terrible” or “a great opportunity.” To re-see something beyond the meaning it’s been held within is to say yes. Paul is seeing the image of a nut being cracked open. When the shell is cracked open, the true nature of the nut is seen and can be tasted. You are so busy looking at the shell, confirming the name the shell has taken, that you don’t know the fruit of the nut, because you can never place it on your tongue until it is released from the shell.

Our authority with you, as we are allowed to continue, is not to break the nut open. That will happen of its own accord through the process of ascension or escalation, because you cannot maintain the shell or the mask, at a certain level, and continue this process. But our opportunity through this process with you is to shepherd you through it, and, indeed, we intend to. Who you become in an altered state in the Upper Room in a higher accord does not diminish you. It does not rob you of your uniqueness, or the quirks of personality, perhaps, that you enjoy as you. It actually reclaims every aspect of you in a wonderful way.

Imagine a light that shines upon all things. Imagine your being, being entrenched in the light, received by the light without obstruction. You then become this light, and the lantern that you are indeed will illuminate all you see. And, hence, the claim we teach in this text: “Behold, I make all things new.”

We are grateful for your presence. We will continue this teaching tomorrow. Period. Period. Period.

DAY SEVEN

You answer questions. You choose your answers based upon a list of possibilities. A question may be answered in so many ways. The question we ask you now, if you are willing to listen to these words, is really very simple. Are you willing to know yourself beyond protocol, beyond prescription, beyond even the idea of the name you have carried? If, indeed, you are willing, we will begin a process with you of re-creation.

Now, the process of re-creation involves several things. Willingness is the key, because without your permission little will be done. But the agreement to the changes you undergo—and the changes will be, indeed, great—come with a price, which is the way of being in agreement to the idea of self that you have become accustomed to. Now, there is no fear here. You are not moving from one stage of agreement to another. More so what you are doing is you are revealing the self that has been hidden, has been denied, has been refused. In order to do this, to release the idea of self that has been denied or refused, you must go into an agreement that it is present.

We will explain this for Paul. The True Self is present always, but the idea of self, the systems of agreement and behavior that you have become so accustomed to, seek to deny the Divine because they believe themselves to be in jeopardy when the light reaches them. The release of the old, the birth of the new, the re-creation of the Divine at the cost of what was, is a process we have been discussing in several texts, but this is indeed a text where it activates in a resolute state. Now, the changes you undergo from the small to the high, from the false to the true, are really something to see. The first thing you understand is that your agreement to being has been in so many ways an agreement to be what you think you are at the cost of true knowing, and when true knowing is claimed in the face of any idea of self, any fear you may hold of self, any demand you have to be a certain way, when the new is brought forth to confront the old, the old says yes at the level of shift that it can attain at each step.

We will describe this for you now. Imagine there is a log on the shore, embedded in the sand. The tide comes, begins to move the log. The log seems entrenched in the deep sand, but as the tide continues to encroach upon the log, the log is dislodged. The idea of log, the piece of wood stuck in the sand, is released from its bearings and then finally rejoins the sea. When the log is moved to rejoin the sea, it is actually assumed by the sea, and its dismantling, or its release, comes in stages. You are not being eradicated. In many ways, you are being merged, supported by the very tide of the Divine that would seek to keep you in love.

Now, transformation that comes at cost is not what you want to hear. You want to take your pill, feel better, go about your business. And you would presuppose, if you are comfortable taking your pill, that that is the growth that you will attain. But to subvert something that has been hiding, something that seeks release—again, the log in the sand—is to demand to stay as you were, when what might be brought to you is so much greater that you cannot even conceive of it. Transition, you see, from one state of consciousness to another state of consciousness has requirements. And the release of the things that would anchor you to the old, bind you to the old, mandate that the old maintains itself, are the things that will be brought to light now. This is a very simple claim, and when you claim these words, “I am willing to be re-known,” you are simply inviting the process of the wave to overtake any aspect of self that would stand in the way of the Divine Self’s realization.

Now, some of you get frightened here. “I just want to have a good time. My Divine Self can’t have a good time. I know it. I just don’t want to be fearful of this or that. If you can take those things from me and leave the rest, I will be satisfied and supported.” These are false suppositions. The action of the Divine to reclaim any aspect of self, to dislodge any boulder, to move any detritus that seeks release, is an act of great love. But when one is undergoing change, when the old is present seeking release, when the wave begins its ride upon the shore to reclaim what it encounters, the unease you experience is the operative act of one who is undergoing change and seeks the old to maintain itself until the new is fully known. It cannot happen in this way.

Now, we teach in gentleness. We don’t wish to rock your world. We wish to claim you in a higher way as you can operate individually through the changes. In other words, if your name has been Henry, we are not about to tell you your name is Jonathan. Why would that help you? But to release the idea of Henry, or what it means to be Henry, as if you are taking off an old shirt and perhaps donning a new one, would allow you the process of engagement. “I am releasing this idea so that I may be re-known and reclaimed.”

Now, the True Self as you is the anchor for this process. Underline those words, friends. The True Self as you is the anchor for this process. When you become frightened, you revert to ask the personality self to commandeer change, and you do this for good reason, because the personality structure has been made for you through your experiences, and you can only rely on your experience to predicate an outcome, a list of possibilities to answer your questions. You would prefer to rely upon the old, faulty as it may have been, than offer the self to the new, to the wave that comes, seeking to reclaim all things. Now, if the wave is the Divine and the action of the Divine, permeating consciousness, permeating matter, reclaiming all things, you must understand that the act of reclamation, the act of being re-known, is indeed a holy act. And the gift you give the Creator is your willingness to be on this journey.

Now, manifestation, the human being you know yourself as, is in agreement to matter. It’s the level of alignment you incarnate in. You move into a world, from a place of Spirit, where things are known in form, known by name, and this must include the self, be it Henry or Jonathan, Alice or Ann, who has claimed an identity and is choosing to embark on this journey. Our agreement to you today is that the Monad, or Divine Self, in its activated state, will act as the reclaimer.

Now, if you wish to replace the word reclaim with redeem, you will have a deeper understanding. The concept of redemption is, in fact, misunderstood. What redemption truly is, is the Divine reclaiming anything to be in accordance with truth. When one is re-deemed or reclaimed, they are not being dismantled as much as re-known, re-aligned, re-seen. And, again, the stick sitting in the sand, now floating in the ocean, that appears to disappear over time—as the ocean has its way, it is re-shaped, it is re-known, and one day, finally, will dissolve into the sea, where it will stop being known as stick and simply be of the whole that has amassed it. That is, in fact, the process of any soul in its patterning, in its agreement, to come in form. When form is no longer needed, incarnation stops, and the idea of self is in fact transformed beyond the delineation that you would use as persona, the names given a thing. What is of God simply is of God. If it has a name, it becomes reduced, or, in some ways, in a more dense vibration. The denser the vibration, the heavier the weight of it, more illusion, more idea of separation, can be claimed. When you are lifting in vibration, all you are really doing is releasing density, those things that would bind you, weight you, stick you in the low level. When you are re-known, when you are overtaken by the Divine, the alchemical process of re-creation ensues.

Now, when you are aligned in the Upper Room, the patterning continues, or the re-patterning, if you wish, because when you are made new, the release of ideas, systems of accord, ways of being known, fall from you, and actually without effort at a certain point. Imagine you are walking in a desert in a heavy cloak. The sun bears down upon you. Without thought you throw the cloak from your shoulders, you continue to walk, and any other clothing is released that would claim you from the self that seeks to be made new. In other words, you are re-seen as what you truly are through this passage, because the light that you are in can no longer support the darkness or the dense vibration you have become too accustomed to in the lower vibratory realm.

Now, as we have said many times, this is not a selfish teaching. This is not self-improvement. This is realization. It is the path of the Christ, the path of the true teacher, the path of the mystic, the one who seeks realization. It is not the path of the one who wants to get his way, rule over others, amass fortunes and keep them to himself. This is the path of the gift of being. And that will be the title of this chapter, “The Gift of Being.”

Now, when you know who you are, and you are in your being, and the light that you are shines upon what it encounters, you become the alchemist that transposes matter. Or, to return to the prior metaphor, the expression of the sea as you is what overtakes those boulders, those things that you encounter, not only in self, but in those you encounter. Imagine you are vibrating at a level or octave where, simply by being in proximity, the amplitude of your vibration will begin to clear or re-know the one before you. Not with the intent to heal or fix. You are operating without intent. Your act is to be, at this level of light. The encoding of the light that you are, which knows itself in recognition of all things, is what is doing the work. Imagine this. You are not separate from your brother. You believe yourself to be. The light that you are in embodiment knows this well. “I am as of my brother.” And because you lack separation at this level of accord, the vibration of your being greets the vibration of the being before you and lifts her, it, him, to its true nature. Now, you are not fixing, again, nor are you spiritualizing them. You are, quite simply, knowing them. And, again, to know is to realize.

He interrupts the teaching. “So what happens to them? We meet them. They meet us. The vibration is high. What ensues?” Very simply, what ensues is a higher agreement to be. You are giving permission to everything that you encounter to be re-known, to acclimate to the tone you sing, or to vibrate at the level of accord that you have become accustomed to. All healing is known in this way. It can only be done this way. You are agreeing to the Divine by nature of presence with the Divine, and the light that you are reclaims what it encounters. How an individual attends to this in some ways is predicated on what they can hold and what they can allow. You may be in the face of someone who chooses suffering. She has decided it is her path to learn. You do not tell her she is wrong. You realize the Divine that expresses as her, that expresses beyond the suffering that she has chosen to learn through. You give her the option, in this way, of choosing another way because it is now present in her field through this interaction with you. But you do not judge her act if it is to refuse. You know the potential that has been seeded—again, a dark room entered by the light. That which was hidden must be seen. That which you chose to ignore, chose to deny in self, will be encountered, and, again, aligned in a higher vibrational field.

The re-patterning of an individual, the reclamation of an individual, does not override will. Will is a gift. You have will. And the choice to say yes to this amplitude of light is one an individual may make on his or her own behalf. But to witness another and know the light that they truly are does not require permission from the other, nor as the sun shines upon the darkness does the darkness give permission to be seen anew. The action of the sun requires no permission. It shines upon you. You are in the sun when it shines. The choice to hide from the sun may be taken. But we will tell you this. Each of you, when you perceive another in their true nature, in their divine sense of expression—“I know who you are in truth, I know what you are in truth, I know how you serve in truth, you are free, you are free, you are free”—each of you who says these words realizes the one before you, beyond the name they have taken, beyond the choices they have made, beyond their agreements to fear and their obligations to the small self’s purview. You become the liberator because you know who they are, and to know is to realize.

Now, our offering to you today, which is the assimilation of self by the Christed Self, the Monad or True Self, and, again, assimilation, the wave that overtakes the stick in the sand, the tide that rises, that calls things back to the sea itself, this assimilation is undergone by you as you can acclimate, not more quickly, not less quickly, than you can align to. And the words we speak for you now, for those who are new to these teachings and for those who are well schooled, is the claim of the one in agreement to align, beyond the known, beyond the idea of self, beyond the name claimed or chosen. And these are the words we ask you to speak after us:

“I am choosing to be re-known. I am agreeing to be re-known. I am aligning to the re-creation of every aspect of self as may be known in the higher light, the divine light, that has come, that has come, that has come.”

Now, when you speak these words, in fact you invoke process. You give permission. The manifestation of the Divine in you and as you that seeks to reclaim you moves into an agreement to encounter all aspects of self that require re-seeing, seek illumination, or perhaps would deny it. We lift you here to the Upper Room for this process to be encountered, because in the Upper Room there is no fear. And when you choose the Upper Room, when you align to the Upper Room, when you say, “I am in the Upper Room,” you are simply saying, “I Have Come.” The Divine as who and what you are, in this agreement, is what tends to your needs, which supports you in this process of re-articulation.

We will stop in a moment. Paul is asking, “Do we stop now?” We have something to say to Paul, and we will take this opportunity to do so. Not only are you safe, you are loved. And this is the agreement made for you, for the work you do, for the choice you make, for the alignment you have tended to thus far. We say this for you now:

You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.

We thank you each for your presence. We will return tomorrow and continue. Period. Period. Period. Stop now, please.

DAY EIGHT

What you ask for in fear, what you decide can be in fear, a potential outcome, if you wish, must now be understood as a way of navigating reality that can be corrected or made new. The idea of correction, “I will not do what I have done,” is somewhat different than the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” because in this claim the very idea that was once held as fearful is no longer known in such a way. The idea of transcending an old way of being is only comprehended by you through your idea of what was, and perhaps what can be. And realization comes at the cost of the old. And the lifting to the new in fact releases you from what predicated the fear to begin with.

Now, some of you say, “Yes, but fear is useful. We need a little bit of fear. Don’t drink the poison, you will get sick. Don’t drive on the wrong side of the road, you will be hurt.” In fact, those are ways of understanding self in discernment. There need be no fear in realizing a high choice. Now, we have said prior that when one knows, one is no longer thinking about the answer because the answer becomes present, and in the present moment the idea of self is actually transformed. We will say this for Paul. Your idea of who you are actually exists in the past and the future. If you were to truly come into the present moment as the Divine Self, you would move to an idea that actually bypasses logic or your ways of referencing self. To become fully realized, to be present fully in your knowing, is to create an idea of agreement to the universal yes, the universal truth, the universal accord that is, in fact, present now and simply waits for you to align to it.

Now, the small self’s idea of what will be, through history, is useful still, yes. “I need to know what side of the road to drive on.” “I need not drink the poison.” But you must understand that these things are not lost in knowing. They are assumed by knowing. And what is known in knowing is exactly what is required to navigate the reality that you come to now. And the reality you come to now—as we say, the Kingdom, or a higher level of articulation that transposes the physical realm, and, in fact, lifts it to itself—is the way of being for one who knows who he is, and consequently agrees, says yes, to the Infinite.

Now, the idea of the Infinite is challenging for anyone. You cannot grasp it. It cannot be grasped. But it can be known, and to know the Infinite is to be known by it, and this is the missing link for many of you. In your striving for God, in your religious fervor for some idea of salvation, you lock yourself in a room with the idea that the key must be given to you, or you must work your way out to know God beyond your seeking. In fact, true reverence, and we use this word intentionally, is the awareness of the profundity of God. And to be in awareness, at this level, is in fact to know God.

Now, by profundity we don’t mean there is not joy, there is not laughter. But the initial introduction to a state of unification for any being who has operated in separation is indeed profound. It is a knowing in the bones, a knowing in the soul, an acceptance of what has always been, and the recognition that what has always been has been refused, has been sought after as something other, has been seen as something far away. If you understood in this moment, this very moment, that the presence of God, the Infinite, Infinite Self, the Self that is all things, all knowing, all wisdom, all love, is present for you, and you are of it, if you truly understood this, you could never be the same. But because you have been seeking or asking, finding ways to correct behavior that you think will make you worthy of God, you forget the one thing that is always true. You only need to be, and receive the cosmic yes, the cosmic agreement to being, that is, in fact, your right, and always has been.

He interrupts the teaching. “Well, that sounds too simple. So I sit here and say yes, and go into agreement with communion. Is that what you’re saying?” In fact, it’s what we’re saying. To move into communion is to move to receptivity, to allowance. And that is a form of reverence. And its profundity—“I know who I am in union with all things, I know what I am in agreement to all things, I know how I serve as of the whole”—will unmask the small self and liberate you, finally, we say, from the idea of self who has been known so long through separation that she cannot imagine other.

Now, some of you say, “Yes, I want some God when I have a difficult day. I want a little bit of God when I am thinking spiritually or aspiring to my spiritual nature.” Please stop aspiring, and begin to be. The answer is so simple. The truth of your being, the Divine Self, knows who it is beyond separation. And the equivalency to this, in vibration, is accord to the inherent Divine that must be in manifestation as all things.

Now, desire is useful in some stages. You understand how the bud of the flower seeks to reach the sun to open its petals. But the flower is not striving. It is being as a flower can only be. The aspect of self that has longed for God, understood that there could be union, is not the small self. It is the God within, the bud of God, the light of God, seeking to break through and align each aspect of self that would be in denial of it to the great yes of high accord. The great yes of high accord is not a small act. To say yes with every cell of your being, to say yes with every idea of what God could be, to say yes without design of outcome, but simply agreement to be in God, can call forth the equivalency or accord required to translate you to the Word. Capital W, yes. It is always done in offering. It is never mandated externally. The God that we see, that we experience ourselves as of, the God of all things, holds you each in reverence and honors the will that has been instilled in you. It only awaits your yes, and the assumption begins.

Now, to translate from the small w, or idea of self, to the Word, the action of the Divine as may be known in form, is not only an act of deliverance from the old, it is the agreement to what can only exist beyond it. And that is the claim “Behold, I make all things new.” The be in behold is the teaching of this class, the being of it so you may hold it, perceive, align, and agree. And in this yes, which is agreement, all things are made new by equivalency. We will stress this word because it’s important for you to understand. Everything is in equivalency, or vibrational accord. The tone you operate in, the vibrational echo of the tone, claims a reality. The accord you have existed in through the collective has a range, high and low and in-between. In the Upper Room there is new equivalency, and the vibrational strata that you operate in is the agreement to be lifted beyond the old, the old precepts and the old idea that you are not one with your Source.

Now, the degree of knowing, of being, in union, will vary drastically, dependent upon what they hold in vibration. Imagine you have a God that wishes to gift you the Kingdom. You cannot be holding your bags, your pile of money, your desires of the flesh in a way that would prohibit the receipt of God. You may have more than enough of all that you need, but that is not what deliverance is. Deliverance is the reception, the unmasked, open-armed reception of God, the one who is all things. And you are accepting God as all things, the one and all. Do you understand the principle?

Now, the fears you take or hide in the Upper Room—“I just want a little bit of assurance that I will get my needs met the way I say I should”—can be understood as the one, or the asking one, who seeks to know that God wants what he or she wants. “You know I want a lot of money, so you will give it to me in the Upper Room, yes?” In fact, what you are asking for is that your old experience or desire re-creates itself, perhaps in a slightly more acceptable way, in the Upper Room. There is an old paradigm. You will be sacrificing all things, you will be begging on the streets, you will be in a cloistered order, never to enjoy the body again. Those are paradigms of history. You may learn who and what you are through any path you take. But you must understand that the Divine as all is inclusive of any need you have. Underline that, friends. Inclusive of any need you have. And the True Self who knows, and knowing is of being, is the one who is in agreement. So there is little conjecture, little idea of what can or should, and a great knowing of all that is. All that is, is inclusive of what you require. It does not deny you pleasure, but if pleasure is your god, and you seek pleasure at the cost of all other things, you will find yourself fallen, de-escalating in vibration. When you comprehend that it is the Father’s good wish, God’s good wish, the Mother’s good wish, if you prefer, to give you the Kingdom, you will lay aside the things you think are so imperative, in the faith—underline faith—that you will be met as you need to in the Upper Room, and that the consequence of this transition, the receptivity to the all in the all that is, will be the Source of supply.

Now, you may say, “Well, I believed God would bring me love, and I have no love. I believed God would bring me opportunity. I don’t see any opportunity.” Your idea of what God should give you must now be replaced by what is. And the simple claim you may work with, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” can hold all desire and agreement to receptivity. The small self wants this and that the way she thinks it should be. When you come to the Upper Room you begin to move towards receptivity, agreement to receptivity, which, again, is equivalency, what is needed to receive. You must go out and find a job, bang on every door, have the perfect résumé, the perfect work history, for what you think you should have. If you are called to act to meet any need, from the Upper Room, you will know what to do. It is not about sitting and waiting to be handed things, but it is indeed something other than banging on a door, demanding entry. “God Is, God Is, God Is, and I am in receptivity,” the great yes to all that expresses or can be claimed in God.

Now, Paul is alarmed at the use of the word claimed. “I thought we weren’t claiming anymore. I thought we were just being receptive.” In fact, to claim God as all things is to claim everything you could ever require. Don’t you see this? Don’t you see how you have diminished God, put it in a jar with a lid, labeled it “What I Need,” put that jar on the shelf, and gotten angry at it when it didn’t deliver what you think you should have. Instead, something else occurs now. “I Am. God Is. We are moving in agreement to what must be.” Underline the word must.

This will be a challenging teaching for some of you, because indeed you have will and choice and selectivity still, and this will occur at every level, but in different stages of refinement. The idea of what should be is not what must be, and the soul in many cases has choices he has made, it has made, she, if you wish, to progress through alignment to experience. And there are things you may see in the world that you would seek to refute. “That cannot be God’s will. God would not allow such a thing.” In fact, what you are seeing is the outpicturing of prior choice and thought through humanity’s choices to deny the Divine. Anything abhorrent to you, that you have put outside of God, is seeking light, seeking to be re-known, but its abhorrence to you is generally born through your agreement to prior act of causation that has accrued in manifestation.

If you think of a war, and a headline “War Has Been Declared,” you are perceiving the outcome of prior thought, prior discussion, prior legacy, going back thousands of years. The idea of war itself can be re-known, can be brought to the Upper Room, and reclaimed in love. But it loses the name, it loses the idea, it loses the action that war has held. “What a terrible thing that war is.” The lineage of war is ancient, and it is humanity’s choice to deny the Divine, deny the Source of supply, deny unity in others, that is its basis. What must be, we suggest, is what has been claimed and now seeks outcome. If you are driving towards a wall at a very high speed, the outcome is you hit the wall. The choice to lift beyond prior choice, prior accord, in the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” in fact delivers you from the must that the collective has accrued.

Now, where you sit as a species, at a precipice of choice, will have result, dependent upon how and what you choose. If you continue to decide to discriminate against your brother, to deny your sister food or shelter, to decide one is worth more than another, you will deliver yourselves, yes, to a must that you will not enjoy. It will be the result of your acts that claim this species in darkness and not of God. The moment one says, “I am in union with Source,” moves into the alignment of the Upper Room, and claims the Kingdom for all she sees—“Behold, I make all things new”—a new light shines upon what is encountered by it. The light illumines what was in darkness, what was in darkness may be re-known, and you change or alter the trajectory of what was to what is, and can only be.

He has many questions. We will answer them throughout the text. But we are beginning to teach you what it means to move to a unified state of understanding, expression, and, most importantly, being. And the being that you are, the True Self as you, in its requirement to flower, to be delivered from its shell, to move into agreement with its true nature, is the act of the one who says yes.

We say yes for you, as you agree. We say yes with you, as you consent. And we say yes to you, even on those days when you wish to say no and hide in shadow. We see you in your beauty, we see you in your right to be, in all you have known and may know. And, as we say these words to you, please accept them in our love.

You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.

Period. Period. Period. Stop now, please. This is in the text, yes.

DAY NINE

When you ask questions about what you should be, the idea of should actually claims you in a wrong-mindedness. The should itself, the implicit agreement to an idea that was, will actually overtake the reliance you now need on true potential, known in the infinite now as you be. Now, when we teach through Paul, we come through different ways. We work with the body. We align his consciousness to ours. And the words that we speak through him are of benefit to those who are willing to hear, willing to be in receipt of them.

When you ask questions of yourselves—“What should I be?” “What am I here for?” “How am I to know what I will do?”—you ask the self to become the one who knows. Now, when you truly know, you work beyond the idea of should, because there is no should in knowing. There is only being. And any agreement to a potential is simply made by saying yes to what you know.

Now, when we teach today, we are having to move beyond the young man’s resistance to being taught in a different way than he is used to. The teachings he has received through us in ways have moved him forward to a level of alignment where he is less sure of what has been. In fact, the past he has known is becoming malleable, and the understanding of this—the past as malleable—will be helpful to all of you, because you will all reach this place where you have to surmise that what you thought happened, who you thought you were, or what once was, was perhaps very different than what you had believed.

The choice to see with new eyes, to behold a new world, indeed comes at the cost of the old. But your idea of self, your very idea of who and what you are, has been so manifested through prior experience that you cannot understand that what appears to be a sheet of ice protecting you from the water beneath it is simply a way of comprehending separation. The ice above the water is still the water, just in another form. When you begin to understand this, and the sheet of ice begins to disappear, you find yourself momentarily flailing, seeking for the old to buoy you in a sea that now appears strange and you think will overtake you. The sheet of ice that you walked upon was simply a way of knowing self in distance from the water, but you have always been in the water. You have just not understood it.

To withstand the changes we teach, which indeed come in sequence, requires an individual to understand that the idea of separation itself, just an idea, can be understood as something that may be released. You must underline this. May be released. To release the idea of separation, to comprehend self in unity, is to go into an alignment with what has always been, but in some ways you have been precluded from experiencing, through the agreements made by the whole, and also by the senses, who have become in alignment to the manifest world you have known. When you begin to lift to the Upper Room, the senses themselves will undertake a passage. And what was once seen, what was once felt, will have to be comprehended in a higher way. “How is this done?” he asks. “We can’t change the senses. They are just what we are, how we experience.” In fact, the senses support experience. They are the translator for you. “What is hot and cold?” “What is blue and green?” “What smells like fire?” “What tastes like broth?” These are ways you know what you encounter that have been filtered, in some ways, through prior agreement and experience. “We know what smoke is and how it should smell, and we taste the broth and we know what it is made of.”

The agreement to lift in octaves and to begin to shift from the old alignment to the new and claim the senses in a higher accord is actually very simple. It is not done through will, but by alignment and agreement. And the choice each of you will make today, if indeed you are willing to be taught this way, is to claim a new way of moving to experience, aligning in experience, so that the senses themselves can be taught to agree to what has already been, but in some ways has been filtered, or precluded from experiencing, through the density and the habitual density that you have become so accustomed to that you literally cannot see the forest for the trees. Everything in vibration can be attended to in consciousness by the one who knows who he is. And what this means, very simply, is that the whole being that you are becomes experiential. You are, in some ways, the being or the oracle that claims what she sees in a higher way, and is able to speak what she sees into being through the alignment that he or she has come to.

“What does that mean?” he asks. When you have an experience of something—“I am in a snowstorm,” “I am lying in the sun”—and you are able to express what you feel, you are aligning the being you are, claiming language to support experience, and in some ways supporting manifestation. You are claiming the sun. You are claiming the snow. When the senses themselves move to a higher amplified state, they are simply accruing more information, beyond what was supported by heredity, beyond the rules of logic that you seek to use to decipher reality, to move to a new comprehension of manifestation.

Now, the Kingdom itself, the awareness of the Divine in all things, is always what you see, and what you experience. The experience of the Kingdom is an amplification of the senses, in an agreement to the Source of what is, beyond the filter that is offered to you or you have agreed to in low vibrational alignment. Again, once again, when we teach the Upper Room, we are simply telling you that there is a strata of experience that exists beyond the known that, once agreed to, you move into comprehension with. The small self believes that what the experience of the Upper Room will be will simply be what she has known in a prettier way, perhaps a way that appeals to her sense of spirituality. In fact, what the Upper Room is, is the level of vibration and consciousness that the Christed Self experiences the world through. And the Christed Self, or the Monad, as expressed by you, simply cannot decide that something is outside of God, because it could not be so. So in this accord, this tonal agreement, the manifestation of all things by your own experience becomes the presence of God. Do you understand the idea? The presence of God is the Kingdom, and to be in the presence of God in all ways is the manifestation of the Monad that has been kept secret, in some ways by decree, or sought for in wrong accord throughout time. How humanity aligns to its true nature and supports a new world being born is not a heretical teaching. In fact, what it is, is the receipt of what has always been yours, but indeed has been denied by you, individually and collectively.

When you understand that the walk to the corner, as you have known it, has been a complete diminishment of your capacity to experience a world, you will begin to understand that you can begin to claim the higher experience while in body. But it must be acclimated to. You cannot walk out the door into a world that doesn’t quite resemble what you have known, that doesn’t feel like it has felt, without thinking you have gone mad. In fact, what happens here is that the filters that you have used to decide what things should be, and your acclimation to those shoulds, are released, so you begin to see what has always been there.

Now, Paul is uncomfortable in this dictation. It doesn’t feel right to him. “Well, you’ve said in the past the Kingdom is what we have known, but from a higher perspective.” Again, that is true. But it is your experience of being, in the Kingdom, that claims you in the higher alignment. And if you expect to see with the old eyes, hear with the old ears, taste with the old taste buds, you will find yourself seeking to re-create or replicate what you have known prior, when in fact what awaits you is of a higher accord, and can indeed be experienced in a very different way.

Some of you say, “Yes, I would love to have a higher experience. Perhaps this weekend I will imbibe something, have a higher experience.” That is not this teaching. This is about a level of alignment that you accrue, through agreement, that supports the entire being you are in movement to a higher way of experiencing the world. And the world, you see, is only one thing—an expression of God, known in form, that you have named, decided what should be, and expect to find. If you understand that everything you experience can be re-known, can be re-seen, and that you may operate effectively within it, you will understand the gift of this teaching. The claim, again, “Behold, I make all things new,” is inclusive of all, and we must include the senses now, because that is in many ways how you determine what you feel, and, consequently, how you be.

“On this day I choose to give permission to the being that I am to release any way of seeing, any way of feeling, any way of experiencing, that supports separation. On this day I say yes to a new level of alignment, where my experiential nature becomes in alignment with the Source of all things, so that I do not seek to re-create what I have been taught to see, and instead see what has always been. I know who I am in truth. I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. I am free. I am free. I am free.”

Now, in this alignment, you undergo a shift of creation. What you claim must be transformed when what you begin to experience is transformed. In other words, what you knew of as the blue sweater may appear somewhat differently, and in fact what is happening is that the limitations that you have been offered through alignment in the lower vibrational plane is replaced with a vast array of creation that can now be comprehended. When we operate through Paul, we are bypassing logic, utilizing his senses, aligning in physical form, to the extent that we can, to broadcast the teaching to those who would wish to hear it. In some ways, what you will do is simply transform the idea of being to include what has been prohibited or denied by your alignment to the lower. When these things are available to you in an experiential way, how you perceive what you see will actually be released to a new way of knowing. Now, you are not trying to figure things out. This has never been that teaching. But, indeed, it is a teaching of reception, and you become the receiver, and the senses that you know yourselves through are indeed enlisted to become the way you calibrate yourself through what you see, feel, taste, and hear.

Everything is in tone. Everything is in vibration. And what you perceive in dense form can be re-seen in higher accord, not through an act of will, but because of the level of alignment that you have come to. The choice, in fact, will be yours. As you say yes, this great yes to be, you claim an encounter with the physical plane that must be known in a new way. You cannot maintain the old address from the Upper Room. Your experience of the new place you abide, coming at the cost of the old, gives you great benefit. And how you perceive the man you are, the woman you wish to be, the one you think you have been, is all altered through this level of agreement. When the past becomes malleable, when you understand that what you thought was, was born in limitation with the old filters in place, you begin to have a wonderful experience of what can be comprehended beyond the known. Period. Period. Period.

We will stop the teaching for today. Paul is very worried. “Is this in the text?” Yes, it is. Period. Stop now, please.

DAY TEN

When you decide what will be, when you command an outcome, when you are directive in these ways, you must understand that you are claiming an idea into form based upon a prerequisite. Now, while you may choose these things, you don’t yet understand that what is being offered you here is far beyond that—the gifts of the Kingdom, the realization of the Monad, wherein all things may be claimed. You justify the old, based upon your idea of what was, but your idea of what was is merely something that you have chosen, a descriptor, a way of deciding based on prior evidence. And we must say to you that most of what you have seen or decided upon was operating in shadow.

Now, to operate in shadow simply means that you are aligned to a level of light that you can operate through. You can see around the room in shadow, but what you see is shrouded, clouded by the dim light. When a bright light is brought to you, when all things are revealed, they may be transformed. And even your idea of history, who you have been and what you think you require, is made new in this process of alchemization.

Now, the rising light is here on this plane. What was held in shadow, what was denied light, what was hidden from light, is being revealed. And the tumult you experience in many ways is the residual affect of things being seen, things being comprehended or perhaps re-seen, that were thought to be other. Each individual goes through a similar process of reconciliation with his own true nature through the re-seeing of self, re-experiencing of self, that is party to this teaching. And the claim we offer you today, “I Have Come,” the announcement of the Monad in expression, must be understood by the new students so we can fully take you where we intend to bring you as a collective.

Now, the Divine Self as you, who indeed knows who it is, is in alignment to the great All That Is. You are an aspect of this, a significant one, but your sense of separation precludes your unity. When the Monad, or the Christ within, is alighted and sung through your being, its announcement from the Upper Room is the claim “I Have Come.” Now, in this claim, what you do is you align the self to a participatory act of reconciliation, which simply means that the Divine Self or Spark is given mandate to accept each aspect of self as of itself, and the consequence of this is reconciliation. The resurrected self, the light that is within you, in a resurrected state, knows itself in union with the Monad that is exemplified as all things.

Some of you believe that the process we take you through is significant to your small self’s desires. In fact, the small self is party to this process. She is re-known, it is re-known, through this engagement. But we must tell each of you now, those aspects of the self that you seek to keep in shadow, be it your fear, your anger, your shame, your deliberate actions against others, must be re-known, and consequently reclaimed, in a higher or assumed state.

Now, recognition of one’s inherent divinity has a requirement. Once recognized, the Monad, or the Christed Self, embarks upon the action of reconciliation, and the claim “I Have Come,” the announcement of this, supersedes the past or reclaims what was thought of as past into the present moment where the Monad can only express. Understand, friends, your idea of yesterday, with every detail you could summon, is simply a fantasy, an idea of what was, and how you would fill in the blanks of what you don’t recall would have to be understood as an attempt to maintain an idea of self in consort to what was unknown. “I was having dinner with my friend. There were people dining nearby. They were very loud. I remember being angry at the noise.” What you don’t recall are the people at the other table who were holding hands, or the chef’s whimsy as he was tossing the salad table-side. You have claimed what you see, created a meaning for it, and you predicate the memory upon the frame you have chosen for the memory. Paul is seeing a photo album full of old photographs. Turn each page, and you have a different idea, a segmented image of something that once was. What has been left out of the frame is all that was present that now no longer exists because your memory has no attachment to it.

Now, the alignment we are teaching you today, which is actually necessary for where we wish to take you, beyond separation, beyond the known, is the acquiescence to the potential that even history may be re-known from the higher perspective of the Upper Room. You are not erasing a blackboard, throwing out the photos in the album. You are beginning to understand that everything once seen was invested in meaning by prior command, cultural acceptance, or acquiescence to history through a narrative that the collective agreed to. “We were a happy town until…” “We were a well-known family until…”

The idea of narrative and the recycling of history is, in fact, an attribute of the small self that can only know itself through history. In other words, the small self or the mask only understands what it has been taught prior. When you begin to release the mask you have worn, which is the idea of self, and just the idea, the evidence that the small self has accrued to maintain identity is actually relinquished in offering. The release of the mask, which many of you will undergo, is a challenging process because the mask has been hiding much. You don’t want your neighbors to know how you feel. You don’t want your husband to know what you did. You don’t want that memory to become public knowledge. The aspect of self that seeks to maintain the mask actually claims itself in shadow, because the shadowed nature of uncertainty continues itself in agreement to a denial of the light.

Now, when the light comes and all things are made new, this must be inclusive of any aspect of self that you have denied, chosen to agree to in fear, to sublimate or repress or deny. When the mask is released, what the mask has held will move towards liberation. And when these things happen you are often confronted with the realization that who you thought you were, what you thought you were, in any regard, was an illusion. The idea of self, finally, is illusion. It is a useful mandate for transaction. “My illusion meets your illusion. We have an illusory conversation about what we believe to be important.” But you also understand that you are not the mask, and that the True Self as you, finally, is who and what is expressing in any situation.

Now, we will explain this for the new student. Everything we teach thus far has been in agreement to one truth. You are not separate from God, but believe yourselves to be. And the process of alignment, in sequence, through energetic attunement, has been brought to you in a design that you may attend to, each step of the way, through your own agreement to what exists, and who, in fact, you are in agreement to that in a higher accord. Dominion at the level we teach surpasses what you were taught otherwise. “I should get what I want.” Instead, you become the recipient of the Kingdom. You move to grace, because you are in supply in agreement to the Source of all things. And because you now operate in knowing, and knowing means realization, the claim is made for you through your alignment to your own inherent nature.

The gifts of the Kingdom are being taught in this next text in a very different way than many of you have been taught thus far. Your acquiescence to what was, in all ways in solidity in agreement to lower vibrational form, has contributed to the dilemmas that you find yourselves in—the belief in scarcity or dis-ease, the things that you’ve all created and moved into accord to that have their very basis in the denial of God. When you understand what this truly means—you have built civilizations in the denial of the Divine, and everything you have been taught is reflective of that—you will begin to see that the reconciliation we are teaching to one’s true nature indeed comes at the cost of the old. And the realization of the True Self, realized in the increments we teach, will support you in a new way of being. Underline the word being. It is not what you think. When you are truly being, you are expressing in infinite time, in the mode of infinity, in the awareness of the clock to understand where you are in relation to others, but well beyond it. In other words, friends, the Infinite Self is known beyond time, and your agreement to form, in manifestation, supports you in being able to attend to this while embodied.

Now, the justification for the old must be addressed now. Because something was, or it was once agreed upon, does not make it right, nor does it make it true. And you may look at any decision. “We will amass an army.” “We will burn down the town.” “We will subjugate this population and have them slave for another.” All of these choices, made in consequence to fear, have claimed you in an agreement to an idea of being that is not only known in fear, and not through small self’s intention, but through the codification of meaning that things have been given, that you don’t understand much of what is happening now is reconciliation with the new that has in fact come to replace the old.

The claim “Behold, I make all things new”: To be, and to be in an engagement with all things. All things means all. New means present in the higher octave. “Behold, I make all things new” is a clarion call, the large sound of transformation that has come to this plane. And the changes you undertake are, in many ways, the realization that what you thought was real, or perhaps righteous, or perhaps necessary, was not at all. When the old begins to fall, there is a tumult. Many of you will seek to maintain the old, the idea of what was, when what is seeking to be birthed is so far greater.

We sing your songs for you so that you may learn the words, but each text we write is an invitation to align in the higher octave that the text is emitting from. And we will say this for Paul. Every text has been dictated from a higher alignment than the previous. Each text holds the vibration, and consequently invites the reader to the landing where they may be taught from. The eager student applies the teachings, is prepared for the next station prior to the next text coming out. The new student finds herself in a new classroom. We do our best to bring you each up to speed in our teaching, but you cannot rush manifestation. The body needs to acclimate. All of the energetic systems need to, as well. And the claim “I am free, I am free, I am free,” the release of the old, followed by the choice to abide in the Upper Room, “I am in the Upper Room,” aligns you to the pronouncement that the Divine Self holds in a higher level of incarnation, and, yes, expression—the claim “I Have Come.”

Now, while we have taught this prior, you must understand it, because the passage you undergo in the claim “I Have Come”—the release of the known, the self that has thought itself to be one thing, catapulted now into a higher level of alignment where what has been unseen now must be seen—is not comfortable to the self that is masked, to the self that seeks to hold on to the old. The small self is not a wrong idea. It’s just not who you truly are. We are not making you wrong. We are loving you anyway, despite the fact that you think that what you’ve experienced, and the meaning you have endowed it with, is not who you are, just what you’ve experienced and what you have endowed it with. The principle teaching today, as we support you in moving beyond the old ideas of what has been, is for you to understand that any idea you’ve held about who and what you are has been informed by false teachings.

“What does that mean?” he asks. Well, we will give you one example. “You are only as good as your family, or the stock that you come from.” “Nice guys finish last.” “You will never be this if you don’t look like that.” These are all ways of understanding self that are truly false, but you have aligned to them and, again, created civilizations where your adherence to norms, be they religious norms, cultural norms, or ideas born of the moment that you decide to acquiesce to, all of these things have no place in the Upper Room, because in the Upper Room what is not true, which simply means claimed in fear, cannot be aligned to.

Those of you who decide what should be, who speak your truths loudly, are simply claiming opinion at the cost of truth. The idea of personal truth—“My truth is this or that”—is also a false ideal. What is true is always true. And until you align to the universal truth of the inherent Divine, you will be poking at shadows, or raising a totem, an idol, to be worshipped. The idea of God as all things does not supplant the idea that there may not be a God that can be known in a deeply personal way. In fact the God of all that is, is also the call of the owl, or the spirit that comes in an invocation of love. You are not dismantling your old ideas, except simply releasing the meaning things have been given so you may move to a reception of what exists beyond the old, the codified, or the historic. Again, the claim “I Have Come,” the mandate of the new to be reborn as and through you.

Imagine a light that begins to burn in the center of your heart. The illumination from that flame begins to spread through the fiber of your being to consume all aspects of self that would negate it. The light is love, but the light is also fire, transforming what it touches in a blaze of beauty. As you become this great light, as you align as this great light you are taught through, you become the vehicle of the Divine. Your expression, “I know how I serve,” is the gift you offer, and your realization of another is the light itself being perceived in the one who has perhaps denied it.

We will say these words for you now. The treatise we are offering you will have great impact on an individual life, but also on the collective field. As you stand in light, you become that which illumines, and the claim “I Have Come” is this announcement. The action of the one who has come is the claim “Behold, I make all things new.” And the act of reconciliation that we are offering you in these pages, in this dictation, in this text, is the triumph of the Divine that you have been calling for.

“How are we calling for this?” he asks. The pain you see in your world is heard beyond this level of frequency. The suffering of this plane becomes a cry. It has, indeed, been heard. You are heard, all are heard, and all are seeking at a higher level to reconcile beyond what they have thought was so. In your being, you know your divinity, and you know you have been deprived it as expression. The time has come to say yes, the great yes, the cosmic yes, the loving yes, to all that will be. Period. Period. Period.

Indeed, this is the end of Chapter 2. Period. Period. Period.

3

BEGINNING THE NEW

DAY ELEVEN

Fundamentally, your idea of reality is predicated on a schism that has been apparent on this plane since humanity decided that it was in separation. Your fundamental sense of self, “I am separate from my God, I am separate from the man beside me, I am separate from those over there,” is in fact the result of the vibrational claim “I am not loved, I am not one, I am not worthy.” Now, the claims of negation of individual worth manifest in dense reality, and the causation for this, why you claim these things, is a mistaken belief that there is a God who could withhold love or deny you grace. In all ways, you deny grace through your fundamental alignment to the idea of separation.

Now, if you imagine that there is music playing somewhere, but the ears cannot hear it, there may as well be silence. But we are here to teach you that the music is playing, it is playing fully, and what has prohibited you from dancing to this music is the mistaken idea that it cannot be so. Now, once you lift in vibration to a level of agreement where you can even concede that there must be something more than the form you have taken or the pain you have known, once you can agree to the possibility of God, all things may be made new, in the increments that you can hold, at the level of adjustment or attunement that you can hold, to align to the music that is ever present.

The consequence of denying God, the fundamental denial of the Divine, “God cannot be,” is the cause of the chasm. And that chasm was created through different things, the fear you have known, the lack of love, the lack of worth, that you attend to. But in some ways the chasm is the direct result of idolatry. Now, we will explain idolatry to you. This is not a religious teaching. It’s a very simple thing. What is placed before God denies God. It’s truly that simple. And what you have made your gods, be it religion, be it the economic structures you’ve known, be it the desires you hold that contribute to your denial of the Divine, whatever these things may be, they circumvent the music, or they align you to the idea of separation. Now, you know a teaching, “Thou will have no other gods before me” or “I am a jealous God.” God cannot be jealous, nor could it be angry. These are illustrations of what becomes of one who creates a false god, puts it on a small altar, and demands his or her way be done.

Now, the will that you’ve been given, in true alignment, is of benefit to all. And the claim of the Kingdom, “Behold, I make all things new,” which we indeed will instruct you in tonight, is the reconciliation of the Monad, or the Divine, in the vibratory field that the body has known itself through. The escalation of the body and the energetic field through these claims we have taught you support you in recognition of what exists beyond the known, what has been claimed in fear, or what you have deemed greater than God. “My difficulty is greater than God.” “This illness is greater than God.” “The things we find ourselves fearing are greater than God.” What you make greater than God indeed becomes your god, and you claim these things in fear, or say there can be no God if such things express.

Now, our gift to you today, as we are allowed to teach, is the recognition of the inherent Divine, which will claim all idols, all decisions made in fear, in the higher octave of the Upper Room. You must understand, friends. You are not being denied anything. You are being gifted with the Kingdom, where indeed all things are available, may be known and claimed, treasured, in fact, as an aspect of God. Now, as God is all things, it can also be seen as an economic structure, as a way of being in the world in success, or, if you prefer, failure, because the Divine expresses in manifestation in alignment to the degree that you have acknowledged it. And if the soul suggests that there are lessons to learn through challenge, challenge there will be. And as you learn, and as you claim, and as you know yourself beyond the challenge, you are lifted to receive what expresses beyond it. Imagine you have a forest. You seek to drive through the forest. The shade is great. You can’t see a clearing. You go the best you can. But when you drive through the forest, you understand that there will come a time when you will leave the forest, find yourself in an open field, see the sun, and recognize where you have come to. In some ways, this is this teaching, although you’ve been driving in the forest for so very long that you perceive that to be the only reality that you can express in.

When you love one another, when you see one another in love, you claim the thing you see, the being you see, in accord with the Divine. But you perceive love to be an emotional expression, a desire met, how you feel. When you comprehend what love is, which is the expression of God as all things, you move to the light with much ease. And the path of love for most of you will be the highest service that you can provide, and that simply means being as love, being the expression of the Divine that expresses as you in love. “I am in love, in the vibration of love, and in the expression of love.”

Now, to trust this teaching in any way, shape, or form is to be accountable to the teaching and perceive yourself as operating in frequency. If you don’t perceive yourself as operating in frequency, this will be a figment, an impossibility. But if you understand that there is all vibration in all things, and you are an expression in vibration or tone, you can begin to understand that as the tone is lifted to the higher, reconciliation occurs—the Divine as you beyond separation, in union with all things—and then you may meet all things in this awareness. This is an act of love, and the entirety of this teaching is an act of love, if you understand the consequence of what we teach.

This is a teaching of being. It is not a teaching of getting your way, putting more cash in your pocket, getting the man of your dreams to do what you want. This is the teaching of alignment and reception to the Source of all things, so you serve as its conduit. Now, as its conduit, you are always agreeing, just as the faucet agrees to the water that passes through it. You are not challenged by it. You are aware that the vibrational field you hold, in a higher or assumed state, is claiming itself in this agreement, and the idea of the small self that seeks to run a kite up to God and get met there is actually replaced by your expression.

The claims we have offered you thus far, when invoked, support your alignment to them. When all of the claims are made in vibratory accord, which simply means agreement to them at a vibrational level, the announcement of your being, “I Have Come,” the alchemical claim of all the prior claims played in one note and one chord, invokes the response of union in the Upper Room. Now, each chord is expressed in vibrational alignment. You are in accord now to the world you see, the structures of man, the things created in love or fear. They all exist on this plane, and, because you perceive or see them, that guarantees that you are in vibrational alignment to them. Do you understand this? Everything you see, everything you experience, everything that could be, at this level of accord, is known by you in a vibrational agreement. As an octave has high and low notes, so does this dense field, and the releasing of this dense field to the Upper Room is the alchemical act of re-knowing, reconciliation, through resurrection.

Now, what resurrection is, is the reclamation of the being that you are at the level of the Christ, or, if you prefer, Monad, the singular aspect of the Divine come as you in a remaking, in a re-knowing, in a reclaiming of the matter and the consciousness of your expression. To align to this level of vibration will occur when the needs of the individual are expressed in agreement to the True Self. We will explain this for you. Your understanding of your needs, predicated in history, are required for you still. You know when you are hungry, you know the way back home from a distance, you know your children’s names. The artifacts of history are useful still. Turn left at the post office box, and then walk three blocks, you will find your way to the store. The map is useful still, the language is required still, but when a language is translated to a higher octave, when a map is re-known, it is reclaimed in the new way of being. In other words, simply put, the way to the post office box is comprehended by you through knowing, not through memory. Your children’s names are present, but who you know your child as, which means who you realize your child as, is somewhat different.

Now, you don’t understand this. He doesn’t understand this. He wishes we would talk about something other, but we intend to continue. The ramifications of these changes on an individual in fact reconcile you to your knowing, which is an expression of God. And the love that you know, as you gaze upon another, is not the love of the small self. “Look at my precious child.” “Look at my faithful spouse.” It is the recognition of the Divine in another through the eyes that know, through the heart that sees, and we use those words intentionally. The heart will see, the eyes will know, and your expression becomes of love. And the requirement of love is always to gift itself, without reconciliation or requirement to an intended outcome.

We will explain this for Paul. He is confused by the word reconciliation in the prior sentence. You are reconciled with what you see. “That is a pot. I will cook with it.” “That is a moon. I will gaze upon its light.” Your matter-of-fact nature—“What has been will be”—has aligned you to a manifest world. When you shift to the higher, your agreement to what is, is actually translated or transposed to a higher way of being, and the meaning that things have held are in fact released, because you comprehend them beyond what they have been, and what, perhaps, they truly are.

He interrupts again. “But a pot is still a pot. A moon is still a moon. Am I re-knowing the pot and the moon?” You are knowing yourself in a higher octave, and as a result of this your experience is translated to the Upper Room, and all things will express there, and that is the industrious claim “Behold, I make all things new,” inclusive of your child, the pot upon the stove, or the moon shining in the night sky. When something is re-known as of God, its level of manifestation is inclusive of the expression of the Christ or the God in all things. We have taught this prior, but everything in form was once idea, was once without form, and the translation of matter to the Upper Room is the reclamation of matter as vibration. You think manifestation is getting what you want. Manifestation is seeing what you see at the level of vibrational accord that you have aligned to, which must be inclusive of the meaning things have been endowed with—“that spectacular painting,” “that childish scrawl.” The meaning things have been given claim things in value. “I hate that big painting.” “I love the scrawl of my child.” You’ve just endowed things with other meanings. Everything you see is confirming your idea of it, and when you lift to the Upper Room, your alignment must be claiming what you see beyond the idea of memory as solid to the fluidity that is the creative force that now presents as pot or moon.

Each of you says yes to a spiritual life that you perceive to be convenient to your needs. We honor this. We hope you find happiness in these teachings. But what we are truly teaching you is the manifestation of the Divine in form, or in a reconciled state with the divine things that are always present that you have denied. And, again, the teaching of idolatry: “The moon cannot be holy. Only the sun is.” You decide these things. You endow properties upon objects. You denigrate the Divine or decide what should be seen as special, or how you should be seen in your uniqueness. There is no human being higher than the next. You have all come to learn. And the highest common denominator that you will ever experience is the love of your brother with no mandate for outcome or receipt or return.

To love another is to know them of Source. When one is truly loved, one is healed. But because you don’t believe you are lovable—your sinful natures perhaps, your challenging upbringing, how you were treated by this one or that one—the negation of the Divine and your ability to receive it has claimed you in a world where you’ve challenged yourselves even to remember your innate divinity. We know who you are. We know who you are beyond what you think, or what you would pray to, or what you would think yourself to need to be delivered by. We see you in the assumed state that the Upper Room provides. And by this we simply mean that the totality of your expression, the intention of expressing at this level, is what we claim you in, not as you think you should be, but as you are.

You want your way when you want it, yes. We understand this. But you don’t understand that the will itself, in its alignment to the higher, will claim with you—underline the word with—what the heart’s true desire is. Now, the heart’s true desire is the desire of God expressing in you. The child that says, “Teach me to write, I must learn words,” is desiring writing. One day he may emerge as the writer he truly is. “Give me an opportunity to serve,” says the one who seeks service, not from a mandate of need, but from the heart who knows her expression. These honors will be met in you. You will have what you wish in reconciliation with the Divine, not in separation from it.

Now, the teaching you are receiving today is a requirement for us to teach you the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” which is the attunement of this text. And the requirement of the teaching is some comprehension of the malleability of form and the creations that you are currently attending to. Look around the room. Whatever you see has been named by man or those who came before you. You know what a kitten is. You know what a ceiling is. You know what a window should look like. You are in the museum of history. To make the museum new is to leave the museum to go to the higher where the new may be met. And in your knowing of who and what you are, the true knowing of your expression, the lifting occurs, less by intention, and far more by being. The high note is not trying to be high. It simply is. And when the high note is sung, the reverberation of the note, in its expression, lifts what it encounters to itself. The Divine, expressing, expresses in all things. And your awareness of your divinity supports the agreement that all things may be re-known as of God.

Now, some of you say, “Yes, I want to go all the way with this,” but in fact you cannot through force of will. You can surrender the aspects of self, the boulders, if you wish, that would block your path. You can become willing to release the tethers to history. But you are not forcing. This is not a teaching of forcing the Divine to be as you or forcing yourself to comprehend the Divine. The teaching of union is the teaching of reception to what already is, and to receive is not to force. The one who receives must know himself as worthy of the reception, and this requires the release of the ideas that have mandated separation, the small self’s idea of what a God is and what one must do to be worthy of God, the small self who decrees, “I cannot be loved,” and claims a loveless God to support him or her.

The challenges come as you are ready for them, but you will be met by them, and you must perceive each and every one of them as opportunity, an opportunity to pass the thing that has presented itself as challenge or obstacle to be learned through, to be met by, in a higher way. Then the worst challenge of your life becomes the greatest teacher of your life. And the great teaching here, if you truly wish to know it, is that you are loved already. You are only in love in the Upper Room. You are loved as you are, in this moment in your idea of time, not someday when you think you might be worthy of it. You are loved as you are, because what we know as God can and will not withhold love. You do this yourselves. You damn the one beside you. You decide God cannot be love where the one is you see, and you release God to your own idea of what should be instead.

We have much to teach today. We will take a short pause for Paul. We will resume with questions after. Indeed, this is in the text. Thank you for your presence. Stop now, please.

DAY TWELVE

Your lives are changing, and the broadcast you sit in today is about equivalencies and what you align to at varying levels of agreement. The small self, you see, who predicates his experience upon fact, what he believes to be so, will seek to find himself in any information that confirms his idea of self. Now, idea of self is the key to this, your idea of who you are, based upon what you’ve experienced and what you have been taught to agree to. The alignment that comes at this level is based on what was, and will rarely transcend itself. The opportunity to transcend what you have agreed to prior comes at the cost of the old, and as you align to the higher octave there is a release that ensues—discomforting, yes, but a requirement of the new. And the challenges that you face in transition from the level of accord you have known yourselves through to what you truly are as the Divine Self is paramount to leaving a village and finding yourself someplace entirely different, where the laws are not the same and logic itself has been replaced by something higher. We may call this knowing, but you may also call it the inherent trust that comes when one knows who he is.

Now, the challenge you face is always the way between the two strata, the two ways of being. Logic would tell you to maintain the old, do what you can to adhere to the laws you have lived with. But when the laws no longer serve you, which means you have outgrown structure, you may perceive chaos, a leaning of one way to the next to grasp at something that you believe will support you. As you are released from the prior patterning—which means the way of knowing self through the laws past, and by law we mean what you expect to be because you have adhered to it prior—you move into a valley. And humanity is in a valley now, between two stages of occupation, two places of residing, two ways of comprehending what manifestation truly is. If you can imagine a tribe, and we use this word intentionally, walking through a valley at night in the assurance that there is another side to it, a pathway to the unknown that you may now reside in—that is in fact where you sit. But not comprehending this, you grab what you can, try to claim identity in a way that you can survive when the ground itself seems to be shifting.

Now, when we teach, we are authorized to reclaim you above and beyond what you think you are. This is the work we offer. And when we say authorized, we actually mean supported in this teaching by the Divine that would claim you each as you truly are. Because we know who you are, we perceive you beyond the small self, perhaps even the tribalism that the spiritual nature has endowed itself with. “Perhaps I am a Christian or a Muslim or a Hindu. Perhaps I am a Jew or an atheist.” It really matters not. The Divine Self has no religion. How could it possibly? It simply presents as it has always been—an aspect of the Divine that has come to be realized. But as each tribe, and we use the word intentionally again, enters a valley, it has the opportunity to replenish itself with the new as the old is discarded. Imagine you carry upon your back what you think should be there, what you require for a long journey. The sense of self that would claim what you think you need was trained in an old logic. “I must need this to go where I go.” But because you do not know where you go, you are doing your best to attend to the known, the relics of the past, in comfort. “I know I have my lunch pail. I will be fine until past noon. I know I have my timepiece. I know when it is time to sit for a tea.” When you walk on a new path and you release the ideas you have held that have been in congruence with the manifest world, you can expect to see the manifest world in disruption, and the valley is not so much of disruption. It is the place between two landings, two states of consciousness, and as the new seeks to be born you traverse through the old to the valley of the unknown in recipience of what may come.

Now, what may come must be understood as the product of agreement. Because you are in a valley, you are not guaranteed to rise up the next mountainside. You may build an encampment in a shadowy place, take up arms there, if you wish. You may learn through what you claim in a lower strata. The new is being born now through the collective. Underline this. It’s very important. It is the collective that decides what it will be. And as you are of a collective—name it as a tribe, a people, a civilization, if you wish—the requirements of change will indeed be brought to you. But the collective has said, “We cannot go on as we were, it cannot be what it was, and we will see all things in a new way.” Those that rely on the darkness to be their teacher will find ways to learn in the darkness, but others of you come to us and say, “I know there is a higher plane, another mountain to scale, a level of vibration where I can perceive those in the valley and perhaps light the way for them.” And in fact that is this teaching, because the claim “Behold, I make all things new” is the announcement of the one who has come that stands on this mountainside in a high broadcast, a firm light, and the beacon of the being you are is what shows the way.

Now, to lift another to the Upper Room in some ways may be seen as calling another out of the darkness, or bringing the light to what requires to be seen for the escalation to begin. You are not robbing anybody of free will through this act of reconciliation. And that simply means that the light that you are has the ability, the authorization, if you wish, because it is the Divine that claims the light that expresses in another even in a darkened state or a shrouded environment. You are not a gatekeeper, you are a gateway. You are not just the light, you are all light in a specific invocation of alignment and agreement. Now, this light is already who you are. How could it be other? But the reclaiming of it at the cost of the old has come first to those who can witness this transformation in a world to support the world in a reconciliation of its true divine nature. If you have already decided that humanity cannot do this, you have built a camp in shadow and expect to stay, expect to get what you think you can have, through prior logic, at the cost of what indeed is being offered to you.

Now, you understand what it means to climb a mountain, and you understand and comprehend what it means to walk through a darkened valley. The one in the darkened valley has only the hope or wish that what exists beyond it will be better. But he, or she, or it, continues the path as best she can because she cannot imagine that this dark place is the only place one may abide. But people do choose this. Humanity has chosen it in the past, and then been reconciled as a new door opens, a new potential makes itself known. As the denial of the light or the denial of God has always been the issue humanity has faced, there have been times in your civilizations where you have known yourselves through darkness, only to claim a higher agreement on the other side.

The challenge in these days is you are not sure where you stand, so we are trying to teach you in metaphor what it means to be in the valley and making choice. Choice has ramification. What you choose in a lower octave, which is in agreement to fear, the desire to damn those people, refuse to be challenged by a new potential of being, is to claim the self in an allegiance to a paradigm that will no longer serve you. The lifting beyond the valley is made in choice. “I am in the Upper Room” is an escalation of frequency, and this choice made in this valley creates opportunity that is then shared with those who abide in the lower template. And by template we mean agreement to what has been. When you lift to the Upper Room or climb the mountainside and perceive what is seen from the higher vantage point, you are not deciding that those people downstairs are wrong. You are claiming them beyond what they think, and the activation of the Monad in another has its own practical expression. When the Monad is ignited, when the Divine Spark is claimed—“You Have Come, You Have Come, You Have Come”—the ability to learn through progress transcends the old. Just as the snake sheds its skin without practical intention—“I guess it is time to shed the skin again”—it simply knows and progresses. And as this progression occurs in humanity, the release of what you thought was so terribly important, what you must be or think, is replaced instead with knowing, realization, in the implicit claim “I know who I am.”

Now, here we go:

“On this day I choose to align every aspect of my being to the choices before me so that any choice I may make will be in alignment with my True Self. And as I agree to this, I release any need I have ever had to foster my claims through indignation or self-righteousness or fear. And as I agree to a high choice, I make myself available to the transformation that will ensue. I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

Now, this is a claim of being, and the reconciliation that you experience in this alignment will release any dilemma that you may encounter in choice. Because the idea of should, which is of benefit to the old paradigm or structure, no longer expresses here, you may operate in “I may,” “I can,” or “I will.” And the highest choice available to you will always be in the highest resonance and continue to lift you up the mountain, if you wish, or within the Upper Room, if you prefer.

Now, imagine this. Every choice has ramification. To deny the will of another is always a low choice. To bless another, regardless of what he or she thinks or does, is always a high choice. To tell others how to feel, or how to pray, or who they should pray to is never a high choice. To become an example of a teaching, to become the prayer in a reconciled state with Source, is of benefit to others, but is not proselytizing. You have nothing to teach because you have become the teaching, and to become the teaching is to know who you are and how you serve in a manifest state.

Now, the claim of the Kingdom, “Behold, I make all things new,” is not only a claim of reconciliation. It is a claim of triumph. Underline those words, friends. When you make the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” you are not suggesting that what you see can or may be claimed in a higher accord. You are announcing it as a thing done. And this is faith, and this is knowing, and this is the quality of agreement you hold as you have chosen this alignment. When you claim for another, “Behold, I make all things new,” you are deciding that what is so is operating in a re-articulated state, which means the Monad that has always been present is agreeing to its benefit as an expressed form. You are not making this so. You can make nothing so at that level. It is the Divine that operates as you that is in triumph. And never mistake this for the personality, blessing things and then pointing back to itself to say, “Look what I have done.”

The alignment you hold today, wherever you may sit in this strange valley, is opportunity. And we will say this for all of you. The valley is an opportunity. You cannot go up the mountain to the new without clearing the path through the old, the residual affect of choice, past claims made into form that would stand in the way of your ascension. We will say this for Paul, who has an interruption. The metaphor of mountain is being used differently here than in prior texts. We are speaking of the valley, a level of unknown reality that seems to preclude light, as a passage one undergoes in ascension. While we have taught the individual what this path is and what they may encounter, we are now speaking of a world, the tribes that comprise a world that perceive themselves in separation, as undergoing this process and making choices that will accrue and require civilization to know itself in expression through what has been chosen.

Those of you who stand on the mountain already, who maintain the vibration of the Upper Room, serve as a light that can be seen, not with the naked eye, but through the vibratory echo that you express as. When you claim, “Behold, I make all things new,” the claim is made in vibration through the claim and the intent that the claim holds. Imagine you stand on a mountain, you hold a lantern high, and you invoke the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” and then the light from the lantern expresses where it is required. The illumination itself is what lifts what it encounters, what shows the high way, perhaps exposes what has been so that the lifting may occur well. He asks a question. “Is there a difference between illumination and lifting?” Nothing can be lifted in darkness. You must bring the light forth first. When the light is present and the thing is re-seen or re-known, it may be lifted to the Upper Room. We have taught this prior. You cannot lift the evil man to the Upper Room, because you have placed him in darkness, but to illumine him, bring the light to him, allows him to be lifted, because the small self is no longer present, deciding who is worthy and who can never be. If there is one human being on this plane who is unworthy of God, then everyone is. Do you understand this? The claim of the Divine, the inherent Divine, that may be languishing, denied, hidden, put away, is still present. And you are the ones, you who claim it in the self, who become its broadcast, its expression, are who claims the world in the higher accord.

“What will come of us,” he asks, “the world in disarray?” You are in change. Change is disarray. It will be complicated until it is easy, but it may be seen as what it truly is, the Divine seeking to express at the cost of what was. And it is the what was, the chasm between love and fear, because indeed that is the valley you are in, the way you have decided who others should be, how others may be loved or hated, which is being attended to now. You are one tribe. Underline those words. You are one tribe, one species in articulation, and your resurrection is an act of the whole, not the individual, because the individual, whether or not he wishes to know this, is of the whole. You are moving from singular relation to plurality, and by plurality we mean the agreement to the Divine that indeed must express as all men, as all beings, as all things. As we continue these teachings, we may reference the valley. But understand the valley as opportunity and not punishment. And an opportunity always claims option, and the high choice will deliver you at every moment, at the expense of the fear that you have chosen prior.

Indeed, this is in the text. Stop now, please.

DAY THIRTEEN

When you ask questions about what will be, and you refer to history in attempt to control an outcome, you are predicting a future based upon ideas that were perhaps once relevant, but may no longer adhere to the requirements of the time you stand in. Each of you says yes to the idea of change as you believe it will benefit you. But in times of great change, when everything is in motion, your attempts to adhere to the old will not claim you in a new encounter. Your attempts to claim the old will simply support you in extending a process of transformation that seeks to be undergone by an individual, and also by a collective, when the requirements of change have become so robust that they cannot be ignored anymore. The times you stand in as a civilization are fundamentally born in the requirements of past action, past thought, past agreement that has collected or amassed density, evidence to the contrary of truth, that must now be revealed as what it has been, a way of mandating what a world should be through a faulty lens, a faulty ideology, a demand of what should be, as a basis, instead of truth.

Now, when truth becomes fundamental to change, and you understand that what you are undergoing is a passage from the old to the new, you can meet the new in an awareness that it is necessary. Underline the word necessary. Indeed, it means required, and, if not so much for an individual, for a collective, because the collective is what is now deciding that the movement is essential, that the retrenchment in a new ground is essential, not only for the survival of the species, but for the benefits that it will accrue. We are speaking to each of you today about the requirements for change, and how to lift the self in a motion of agreement to potential.

Now, when you are lifting in vibration, what is actually happening is that the consciousness you hold is moving in levels beyond constructs of accrued evidence. Imagine a hot air balloon. As you continue to lift, the vantage point changes, and your equivalency, which means the view you hold, is changed through the act of ascension. You move beyond the small, you move beyond the obsolete, to a range of agreement where what can be seen must be in alignment of a higher way of being.

Now, some of you say, “I understand the idea. I can even feel the energy at times. But what has actually happened in my lifting?” What has actually happened is that the level of agreement you hold, which means vibrational accord, has been moved to a new level of frequency, alignment, and expression. And it is expression that is the mandate “Behold, I make all things new.” The agreement to this alignment, at the cost of the old, has fundamental ways of being seen or known. The small self will seek to witness the evidence it has accrued for what a life should be, a world should look like, people should act or behave. Your agreement in the higher way is to transcend the old, not to ignore it, not to paint it a pretty color, but to witness it from the higher and escalate it through your own expression. You are not making it holy. You are operating in an equivalency where the divinity that you are now expressing has a mandate. And that is the mandate—“Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, the transposition of a field, an energetic field, which is the first cause of this claim, may manifest in form as the agreement to the claim has been announced by the recipient. We will explain this for you. You imagine you have a child. The child plays at being a ballerina. The child thinks herself in full range of her potential because she wears the costume. “Look at me and my wonderful dance.” You are agreeing to the child, seeing the wonderful dance, but also seeing beyond the costume, which the child will outgrow, to the realization of the child of full, in full, as full expression of the claim “I Am.” The announcement of being, “Behold, I make all things new,” first encountered in the energetic field, will also move the matter, escalate the vibration, fundamentally, of a thing in form, as long as the thing in form is met by one who knows what he is and how she serves.

Now, by this we mean if you are denying matter—“My body is not what I want, it must not be holy”—you are also in equivalency with the denial of the Divine in other form. The idea of perfection is confused for so many of you. “Well, my body isn’t perfect. You are saying I should pretend it is.” We are not saying you should pretend anything. We are saying to claim it, because fundamentally, at the level of vibration and accord, it is of God, may be known of as perfect, and that is the claim of agreement that supports you in aligning to a higher manifestation of form, not only in you, but anything you encounter. The idea of perfection in a man-made realm means a piece of china without a crack, a house without a leak in the basement, a man without a problem. The man may always have a problem, the roof may leak wonderfully, the house you live in may require work, but the fundamental realization of perfection as God’s expression amplifies the existing presence of the Divine in human beings, in brick and mortar, in earth and sky. You are claiming what already is. You are not pretending something doesn’t exist. You are experiencing what is beyond how it presents. When you know who you are, “I am a divine being,” fundamentally true, it is extremely easy to claim this for another. The challenge of the what, the dense body, the collective agreement to form, is that the mandates of form are understood by you through logic. “The lungs must breathe. The heart must beat. I should be this or that to be who I truly am.” What if in this moment you could move to an acquiescence that because the body expresses in any way, shape, or form, it is operating in its own perfection?

Now, we are speaking of form not as what you think. “Well, I have a blemish on my face, I am not terribly perfect today.” “I have arthritis, I am not terribly perfect today.” We are asking you to move beyond this to fundamental alignment, the Divine where the arthritis is, God as expressed as the blemish, the Divine Source of all things in its perfection. You don’t look at an old woman and say, “If only she were young.” You find the beauty, you perceive the beauty, the inherent Divine that expresses in the elderly. You are not looking at ruin. You are looking at age, and the beauty of age as experience, and the body itself as the vehicle this experience has been known through. What a privilege it is to be in form. What a privilege it is to grow old. What a privilege it is to realize that the Divine is in all things, inclusive of the form that you have taken. And this announcement, once again, “I know what I am,” not ideological knowing, “conceptually I understand that I am of God,” but realization, “I realize form as an expression of God”—and this alignment supports the realization of form in a higher amplitude. Each time you lift in vibrational accord, everything that you encounter may be known at this level. Again, imagine the balloon, imagine climbing the side of a mountain, imagine lifting in any way you prefer. What is seen from the side of the mountain is different from the valley, is different than the apex. And when the balloon is lifting all may be seen from a different vantage point, any way you look.

The idea of perception as equivalency is somewhat misunderstood. Some of you believe we are inviting you to imagine God where something is, but your idea of God, perhaps a pretty picture, perhaps a violent man with attributes of your Great Father who was always angry, has come into play. The perception you hold of the Divine is not embellishment. All you are doing is releasing the interference that has been present, through the denial of God, to reveal what already is. And if you wish to see Paul, or anyone you see, in their perfection, you are agreeing to what already expresses in higher ways. You are not making it so.

Now, the matter, the fundamental presence of the organism in vibration, is known through perception, through how you decide it should be, what it has been. But when you see a form, any form, and claim its inherent divinity, you are aligning it beyond denial, beyond previous prescription, to what can only be. And fundamental act of expression, being, must be understood as the Divine in expression, regardless of what you may think in the small self’s terms. Now, when we teach through Paul and we attempt to instruct you in matter—and by matter we mean form—we are cautious about our language. If we frighten him with a conceit, a possibility, that he will not adhere to as a small self, he will seek to hide from the teaching or move away from the source of the dictation. We will say this for Paul and for any student who questions this. Everything seen is an expression of God at one level of vibration or another. When that is understood, you understand that the claim of something as divine is a realization of what is always true, and that the denial of it is the problem, and the only problem, that you may face. When you understand that equivalency, vibrational accord, is what supports realization, then you can stop trying to do this, and allow this to be, as it seeks to be. “God Is. God Is. God Is.” Stop looking for it, and perceive what is before you. Stop shaming it. Stop deciding what it should be, instead of what it is. In the claim “God Is,” realization occurs, because it is the antithesis of the denial of God.

Now, if you wish, move to an area of your life that seems to be in disarray, that you have claimed in shadow, or are perhaps confused about. Imagine this part of your life as seen by you, which simply means perceived by you, and now make this claim upon what you see: “God Is. God Is. God Is.” This is reclamation. This is the act of alchemy. It is the agreement to what is, beyond the small self’s edict, and transformation occurs, inclusive of matter, shape, or form, at this level of vibrational agreement. You understand that there have been teachings of transformation of body, of object, things being re-created. As this is done, through higher accord, you begin to understand that the dismantling or re-seeing of the old, which is what has precluded the Divine’s expression through your old perception, you can begin to see that the re-knowing of form itself is the elastic expression of Source, prior to articulation. Again, the tree was once a seed, the rock was once lava flow. Everything you see, an expression of Source, was once something other and may be returned to the level of vibration that it was conceived as. You understand that everything was once an idea, everything imaginable once an idea, but you still don’t understand that, once a thing is thought, it claims form, it claims density, it is endowed with meaning, and lowers itself in alignment to the one who created it or mandates what it should be. In other words, “my bad marriage,” “my leaky roof,” “my feet that hurt all day.” When a thing is named and known, it is agreed to at the level of vibration it has been spoken into, and we use that term intentionally.

Now, lifting, in some ways, is the release of the first idea to claim it in form to re-see it beyond structure, beyond what it seems to be. You understand teachings that everything is in motion, everything is energy in oscillation. You comprehend this. You may even see it under a microscope, in a book. You may see it described. But your perception of the world must be understood as commensurate to the level of consciousness that you have adhered to. In other words, when you are less refined in density and more in amplitude, when you are operating in a higher way than you think you can, your experience of manifestation is translated, and, in other words, you may begin to experience form itself in elasticity.

“Now, what is the purpose of our knowing this?” he asks. “You are not teaching us how to turn water into wine. What is this teaching?” This is a fundamental understanding of the entirety of this teaching. The lifting to the Kingdom, in anything, in anyone, is the act of God re-knowing God. Do you understand that? It is not the act of Paul in a magician’s hat. It is not the act of Alice being pious. It is simply the act of expression. “I know how I serve in truth.” Underline truth, which simply means the antithesis of the lie of separation. In union, all things are made new. You are not deciding to improve upon the old. You are reclaiming what must be seen as of its nature, its true Source, at the cost of the old ideas that would hold it in a lower field.

Now, as we teach, we invite you to experience the teaching. The idea that “God Is” can be replaced with the realization of it. God is your companion, your partner, in this exercise. Anything may be known as of God. It already is. And all you are doing is releasing the denial of it. He has too many questions. “Well, if I broke my leg, I have a broken leg. God is my broken leg. Is that what you are saying?” No, we are not saying that. We are saying God is all, inclusive of, may be realized in spite of appearance and what you think the leg is, which is also idea. The leg is energy. Energy is God. When God is known, the energy is restored, realized as what it has always been, and what has been known in matter may also transpose to meet it. You understand healing in medical terms. In vibrational terms, it is something other. We are not excluding medicine. You should be grateful for what you have in this world. It is required. But when you know that the source of all true healing, regeneration, is the Divine, your reliance on the old may claim you in a very different relationship, even to the idea of illness.

Now, we are not teaching medicine, nor are we teaching healing. We are teaching comprehension of manifestation, and the form you have taken, the realization of form that will in fact support re-creation through the claim “Behold, I make all things new.” It is a vibrational act, and the vibration is Source meeting itself in agreement to what it has always been. And the price paid is what you thought it was prior.

This teaching will continue. We wish to take a few minutes for Paul, and then resume. Take a breath, Paul. Take three minutes. Period. Period. Period.

(PAUSE)

Each of you says yes to your own requirements for evolution. Each of you says yes to your own authority to embark on this journey. Each of you says yes to how you comprehend this teaching, and at what level you are willing to engage it.

On this day we say that the text that we write will be divided in two. We will be ending the first part in the coming days. The first part of this text are about the requirements of this teaching. Its manifestation will be the second part. And we are preparing you for where we wish to take you by releasing you from the ideas of how things have been, what you thought they were, so that you may re-know them. We will call this Part One and Part Two. You are finishing Part One in the coming days.

Now, the reliance upon the old to get your way, to meet your needs, must be understood as how you operate until you don’t. Do you understand this? What you require, you must meet yourself with at whatever level of consciousness you have ascribed meaning to. But the day you realize that you don’t need what you thought you did, be it the idea of self and a professional life, the idea of relationship as you thought you needed it, the idea of God as you once thought God to be, you create the opportunity for the new to be known through you. And by through you we mean through your experience of it. As we have said prior, life is your teacher. And your life operates to give you the requirements of the soul’s unfoldment, which must be inclusive of the act of ascension that we are now teaching.

The act of ascension, to operate in the Upper Room in an assumed state, is where we intend to take you. But the bypassing of the old does not mean ignoring what happened. It means re-conceiving what was with new eyes, new comprehension, not in alignment with cultural edicts, but what is always true. And if you begin to work intentionally with the claim “God Is,” and allow God to be God, allow God to know you—“I am known, I am known, I am known”—you will begin to understand that the world itself becomes the expression of God. And all you may encounter within the world, and through your experience, will become your teacher.

We thank you each for your presence. We will continue tomorrow. Period. Period. Period.

DAY FOURTEEN

When you ask questions in prayer—“May I know myself in love,” “May I know myself in peace”—you are actually acquiescing to the Divine that not only will answer but create the circumstances for the prayer itself to be made so. You are not accountable for the circumstances as much as you are accountable for meeting them wherever you stand. “May I know myself in love” will claim you in agreement to love. “May I know myself in peace” will align you to peace. And if you have to act upon an agreement to know it is so, you will be instructed, it will be made apparent, and you may do so.

The agreement to you today is that everything may be in a new way. You must understand the idea here—everything made new in a new way, which means unbound from prior expectation, unbound from the denial of the Divine, unbound from what you think it should be, based upon the old ideas of how it has been seen, what it has been known as. Our agreement to you today is the instruction of the new, and the title of this chapter will be “Beginning the New,” the agreement to the new which must be understood as preparatory for where we wish to take you. Each of you says yes to an idea of the new, the idea of what can be, but only in the ways that you can fathom, or decide can be, based on prior instruction or agreement. The idea of the ocean itself being made new is incomprehensible to you. But, indeed, all things must include an ocean, and the preparation for this is the agreement that it may be. You are so entrenched as you think you have been that you cannot see that other potentials are already present and seeking to be born. He interrupts the teaching. “Do you mean in the same way that we may know peace, we may know the ocean as new?” Indeed, that is exactly right, and the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” the agreement to the new, is first born in the possibility that it may be so.

Now, when something may be, it must be claimed or agreed to, first as potential, and then as actualization. And the instruction in this text thus far has been about the bringing forth of the potential so that indeed it may be claimed. And the idea of the new must be seen as beyond what has been seen or has been chosen, because unless that is so you will be polishing an old car and trying to pass it off as the new article. In fact, when all things are made new, all things are included in what we call the Upper Room through the practice of the Divine as expressed in all things.

Now, we utilize the word practice carefully. We don’t want to misinform you or give you a hard assignment. You aren’t practicing walking anymore. Most of you walk quite well. You are not practicing breathing. It has become a way of expressing. To realize God—“God Is, God Is, God Is”—is in many ways a challenge to what has been, because the predominant feature of humanity has been its misuse of will as it relates to the Divine. When you are no longer operating in this misuse—“I deny God in all I see, I can’t even imagine God being there”—you move to an agreement that God may be seen or known, accepted and realized, as a way of being. Underline the word being. “In God I live and move and have my being.” The expression of you at this level of vibration, the causal body incarnated in a higher octave, the physical form in agreement to its true nature, supports the realization of the manifestation of this awareness in all things. The agreement is here. It can indeed be chosen, is being chosen by you through your alignment to the teaching and your willingness to say, “It may be so.”

Now, “It may be so” sounds too tentative to Paul. “It is God or it is not.” It may be so that you realize God as it is. And, again, God is the Source of all things, the energy that informs all matter, in articulation, the Word itself come as everything you see. So the may is not hesitant. It is permission. It is the agreement to what will be, in actualization, once it is seen, accepted, and agreed to as potential.

Now, the True Self as you, who knows who he/she is, is not questioning this. It is already in accord with this knowledge and this agreement. The challenge then has been to integrate the Divine, the Christed Self, the Monad, if you wish, in all ways so you may be in service to it. Now, in service to it does not mean you are an etheric being having a miserable time on this plane. It means you’ve manifested in a higher agreement, and consequently everything you agree to is in accord with that. You are still enjoying the body, the dive in the sea, the precious sunset. You are still enjoying everything you see, and in fact enjoying it in different ways because you begin to perceive realization as a greeting from God. Do you understand those words? A greeting from God means God is welcoming you in the sunset, in the dive in the sea, in the brisk walk in the cold. You are in union, agreeing to your partner. The idea of walking with God sounds so pious that none of you want it. But walking in God, or in agreement to God, is actually a true state of one who has reached this level of alignment. It is no longer strange. It is present. And because it is present, it is actually seen, perceived, if you prefer, and then known and realized. The alignment that is required to walk as and with the Source of all things is the alignment to the potential in realization. Again, “It may be so.”

Now, a prayer answered—“It may be so” in actualization—is realized in accord with the requirements of the one asking. And if the one asking is asking in fear or desperation, the likelihood is that what you will meet first are the requirements to move beyond that fear or that desperation. This does not mean the prayer is unanswered. But the one who says, “I may know love, may I know love,” as in prayer, may meet the obstacles that have precluded love from being known as love makes its way forward. The challenge for Paul and for others of you is that you already agree to the idea of lack at such a level that to counter that feels too enormous. “It is something I can’t imagine that may be. You say, ‘It may be,’ and I cannot imagine it.”

We are not asking you to imagine it. We are simply saying, “It may be so.” The may is all that’s required. It is the opening of a new door, a new agreement to what may be found beyond it. If you are expecting to find beyond the door what you have left in the last room, why bother walking through it? “Behold, I make all things new,” the claim of the Divine as all things, is not preclusive of your requirements for growth. And the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” announcing itself as all things, has its own requirements for manifestation, because as you still exclude aspects of yourself from this equation—“All things are made new except my bad breath,” “All things are made new except that awful relationship, or that ungrateful child,” “All things are made new except the economic injustice of this world”—you are tying yourself to what you say you don’t want. You are part of the problem, and not the solution.

The world is changing and meeting new requirements. The chaos that you witness is a world seeking to know itself beyond the valley, beyond the shadows it has accrued through past choice and the denial of God. The agreement to the new—“It may be different, and the difference may be good, may be wonderful, may be an expression of God”—is a gateway for some of you who have decided that what God will tell you is that we are all going to hell in a handbasket. In fact the Divine seeks resurrection in manifestation. As all things are in growth, as all things are seeking realization just as the flower reaches to the sun, each human being has the authority to claim his or her true potential as manifest at the level she can come to.

Now, we use those words specifically so that you do not think that you are jumping a fence too high. If it is a high fence, you must build the strength—and, in this case, the amplitude or vibrational frequency—for the leap to be made. You cannot extend consciousness beyond the level that it can be assumed as by you. And when we teach in increments we are teaching that each individual is met as they can be healed, as they can be sung, as they can make all things new through the expression of the Divine that is implicit as them. This is not a race to a finish. It is an escalation in tone and vibrational frequency that supports this agreement. “Behold, I make all things new” is sung from the rooftop, sung from the air, sung from the pinnacle of the mountainside, sung on the stars, sung on the moon. It is sung beyond the template of the known at the scale or agreement of tone and vibration that the small self has been using to obscure the Divine.

Imagine you are lifting beyond a cloud. The cloud has stood in the way of your agreement to sunlight. You have lived in a shrouded world, in half-light. You don’t expect that there is more, but “It may be so, it can be so, it will be so.” And the manifestation of the claim “I know who I am in truth, I know what I am in truth, I know how I serve in truth, I am free, I am free, I am free” is the chord of music or tone or vibration “I Have Come,” sung from the Upper Room where all things are claimed in higher accord or agreement.

Now, you seek to justify the old so you may hold your condemnation, pat yourself on the back for those things you disapprove of—“this awful country,” “those awful people,” “this terrible diagnosis.” It really matters not. It is your agreement to the terror, to the awfulness, to the fear, that makes you complicit to it. And even if you think you are speaking truth and claiming truth, if your intent is to harm or to shame or to blame, you are probably contributing to the problem. He asks, “Why probably?” Well, it’s all about alignment. To instruct a child in a higher way of expressing himself is not to berate the child for wrong expression. It is first to see the child as capable of the higher, and then realize the child as of Source, where this may be made so, not by your jurisdiction, but by the Divine Self of the one you see and claim.

The self-righteousness that masquerades as truth must be seen in a new light. Someone must give voice, yes, to the idea of injustice. You can bring the lantern to shine upon anything. But you are not intending to harm. You are intending to illumine or teach. This is not about passivity. It is about right action. And if you are called to right action in the Upper Room, you will know exactly what you need to do because you are being authorized from this aspect of self who has no question about true will.

He interrupts the teaching. “That sounds dangerous and arrogant. Many people say they are doing God’s will and commit atrocities.” Well, this is not this teaching. What we are teaching instead is that the one who is operating in higher alignment is not operating in fear, and you know what is expected of you because you are not in adherence to the mandate of logic, born in lower strata, that would teach you not to act on divine impulse. There can be no arrogance in this teaching, and there can be no one telling other people what to do. You may offer advice as the small self. But as the True Self, you are always in support of the realization of the one before you, or the masses. And we are introducing this idea now because it will take some time to teach you what it means to be in attendance to the masses. You are not fixing anyone, but you may lift one individual, or lift a million, through your act of expression. “Behold, I make all things new.” As you move from singular to plural in your understanding of humanity, as you understand that the Divine Spark as you, in ignition, may light a million more, as you comprehend that the struggle before you is always born in confusion, mistaken ideas which have a basis in the denial of the Divine, you can claim all things, untangle any knot. You can lift a man to his own awareness of his greatness, his divine nature, his capacity to love, through the expression “I see you in your beauty, I see you in your right to be, in all you have known and may know.” And as you say these words you are witnessing the expression of the Divine that has been shadowed or precluded by fear from announcing itself in perfection.

We use the word perfection again. We wish you to get used to the idea that what is perfect is God, and God’s expressions may be reunited with this nature by agreement to it. It is not the porcelain cup without the crack. It is not the perfect sunny day without the cloud or rain. It is the witnessing of the perfection that is already present, beyond the small self’s agenda of what should be.

“May I know peace. May I know love. May I know myself in gratitude of the gifts of the Kingdom that seek to be bestowed upon me. May I know joy and prosperity. May I know my brother as myself, my sister as myself. May I know all things as they truly are, and not as how I’ve been instructed to see them. May I know God in the air, in the sky, in the earth, in the sea, and in all things. I offer myself to God in this new agreement. Behold, I make all things new.”

This is the end of this chapter. Thank you for your presence. Period. Period. Period.

4

THE ACT OF FEAR

DAY FIFTEEN

You come to us with a small awareness of your true nature, as much as you can hold and acclimate to. And, as we teach, we encourage you, we fan the flame of the Divine, so you may say yes to yourself beyond the known, beyond what you’ve believed could be.

Believed could be is important to understand now, because it is the ceiling you will face. “What I believe can be may be so. What I cannot believe I will not claim. I cannot be seen as a fool. I cannot apply a teaching that I can’t comprehend.” We will tell you this now. This is the teaching beyond the known, beyond what has been comprehended. And as you claim agreement to it you are actually moving beyond a structure of limitation that you have all been attending to without knowing it. The structure of fear, the claim of fear, the mandate of fear, is indeed separation, and as you move beyond fear as a system of agreement—something you expect, anticipate, align to—you are liberated in ways you can’t understand. As we often say, the action of fear is to claim more fear, but to be free from fear is to be free from the agreements that you have made in fear and anticipate without even knowing.

Now, the structure of your world in all ways was claimed by you as a collective to comprehend reality through, and you understand yourselves as a collective within an octave of expression. Because the octave has been so invested in fear, it is as if the fear is playing as music in a dark, low key at such a pace that you don’t even know it. It is just there, informing your sight, causing your relationships to fail, denying the Divine in this and that, without even comprehending that you are party to it. You are party to it by agreement and accord, and the lifting beyond fear, beyond the idea that fear must be there, is beyond comprehension. “A lion fights me. I will lose the fight. I am fearful of the lion.” “The relationship ends. Who am I without the relationship? I am fearful of losing the relationship.”

You idolize fear in some ways. It becomes a thing you pray to, in observance, the action of fear that would encourage you to do as you have in order to maintain a reality or idea of self that you have been agreeing to. When you understand what we are really teaching you, it does not mean you don’t run from the lion. It does not mean you don’t support a healthy relationship. But what it does mean is that the action of fear, which is not self-preservation—that is a high act, to run from the lion, to maintain the body is a high act—but to comprehend that the investment you have had in maintaining fear has been through the collective, and done in ignorance, will begin to support your release of it. And we say of it intentionally, less so from it, because the fear that you hold in the system you know is what aligns to the fear that you see all around you.

Now, a challenge you may face is that your idea of self has been so known through fear. “What do they think of me?” “What if I don’t succeed?” “What if I don’t get my way?” These ideas are so causal to your behaviors that you really can’t fathom what it would even feel like to be without them. So we wish to give you an experience of it. If you would imagine now that you are lifting to the Upper Room through the claims we have offered you—“I am free, I am free, I am free, I am in the Upper Room”—the agreement to be here, beyond fear, must be comprehended, aligned to, so you may know yourselves beyond it. If you come to this place in agreement that there is no fear in the Upper Room, in the octave beyond the known, you can begin to release the ideas you have held in low vibration that cannot be claimed here. Underline cannot. Now, you may choose fear, go back down to the lower octave, have that experience. But the agreement to be in the Upper Room is actually to release self from the fears that have been claiming you, knowingly or unknowingly, to the lower accord.

Now, the choice you make—“I am freeing myself from those things that I have claimed in fear, known and unknown”—would be a claim of the small self. The small self knows itself in fear and will seek to maintain it. So we offer you this instead: “In the Upper Room, I am free of fear.” The claim is then done for you through the acclimation to the high octave, and not through force of will. When you are working in the lower octave, the claims to release are effective. But if you go to the Upper Room and claim yourself as leaving the fear behind, you are still claiming something that cannot truly be known upstairs, and, unwittingly, you are pulling yourself back down. “In the Upper Room, I am free of fear” is a meditation. “In the Upper Room, I know myself as free” is a claim you may make, at any instant, to support your acknowledgment of this new level of acclimation.

Now, when one knows herself as free of fear, she comprehends the idea of fear. She is not ignorant of it, but she is not choosing it because it cannot be chosen here. You understand that you lived on the fifth floor for a while, you knew the view from the fifth-floor window. You no longer live there, you look out a new window, but you understand what you experienced in the lower floor. You learned there, it was useful, and now you are elsewhere. So please don’t expect what your experience has been through the legacy of history to be what your experience can and will be in the Upper Room. That is the challenge now, and what will call you back quickly is your desire to maintain a self that has chosen through fear because it’s the best way you knew how to choose. “Well, how do we choose beyond it?” is the question he asks. “I am not comfortable with this teaching in the least.” When you are in the Upper Room, there is no fear, so it is not even a choice. To choose it is to go back down where it may be claimed. “I am in the Upper Room, free of the fear I have known” is a claim of truth. You are not denying the fear you have known. You are claiming who and what you are beyond it. And in that moment you may realize yourself as no longer being a servant to fear. When you are not a servant to fear, when you are no longer claiming it, choosing from it, expecting it to be your teacher, you have a new mission—to claim a world anew. Now, this is an active mission, a thing done through presence and being. Because the world that you see from the Upper Room does not hold the vibration of fear, everything you lift or re-see or re-know is expressing beyond fear when you are meeting it anew.

Now, the idea of meeting it anew simply means that what you behold is made new in your sight. It is restored to its true nature, beyond the fear that it has been shrouded in. Nothing can be lifted, finally, that is so invested in fear it cannot be moved. But what will be moved is what has always expressed beyond fear—underline the word always—which is the essence of anything in its true nature. He asks for an explanation. Some things cannot be lifted because they are so fraught with fear. The act of murder, the act of degradation, is not what is being lifted to the Upper Room. What is being lifted to the Upper Room is the divine nature of all things, beyond the titles or behaviors. You are not lifting the fistfight to the Upper Room. It is an act of fear. What, indeed, you are lifting is the essence of the fighter, or the beings acting in fighting, re-known and reclaimed beyond the justifications they would use for their behavior, if, indeed, it is known in fear.

Now, you have authority in this. The claim of truth will support you. “I am a divine being.” And then everyone else is, by nature of accord and agreement. Because you are not making them holy, you are seeing them beyond their behavior, beyond the acts chosen, because you are lifting them in realization of who and what they have always been, beyond the known, you are reclaiming them, re-seeing them, and the alignment they hold is indeed altered through this witness. The benefit of the act of seeing—“I know who I am in truth, and therefore I know who you are”—is the act of reclamation to one’s true essence, which is, indeed, always of benefit.

We have to take a moment for Paul, who is questioning the dictation today. In fact, we have not said much new, but where you are nervous is where you anticipate we will take you, which is to the act of alchemy. What happens to the fight when the fighters are no longer who they think they are? What does it mean to behold all things new in the ramifications of what you see? This is very important to understand, and we will be teaching you this, if we are allowed to continue to teach as we wish. What we are doing this morning, in this dictation, is giving you an understanding that there is no fear in the Upper Room. So anything transported or lifted, re-seen at this level, is being seen beyond the fear it has known itself in. What will not be lifted is what cannot be lifted. Imagine the husk that conceals something beautiful. The husk is released, the beautiful thing is removed, re-seen, made new.

We are teaching this morning about re-articulation and manifestation from the Upper Room, beyond the comfort of the old. And sadly, we must say, the comfort of the old, even what you think you love, is still shrouded and known through fear. “Well, why is this?” he says. The lower octave is informed by fear. It is ever present. It is a tint that claims the color of anything, and includes itself in itself, the water that was once clear now tinted with fear, if you wish. The color is altered, but because it is so present you don’t even notice it anymore. It is like white noise, something you have become accustomed to and consistently claim without even acknowledging it.

Now, when we invite you to the Upper Room, and invite yourself to know yourself without fear, we are actually teaching you that you may learn to maintain this. Once you understand the quiet that exists beyond the white noise, once you understand what the clean glass of water is without the colored tint, you have something you know that you can anchor to or align to. And you will understand the difference of the texture of your experience when you are no longer in agreement to the fear that would permeate a reality.

“Well, how is this done?” he says. “I sort of understand that you are taking me to a place where my experience may be different. But the world is full of fear. We are still living in the world. We are being taught to fear, and told what to be fearful of.” Once you understand that in the Upper Room there is no fear, these questions will cease. You are no longer afraid of the aspects of yourselves that you have shielded or hidden. You have aligned them to the light. You are no longer groping for outcome, demanding things be as they should through the small self’s eyes. You have been liberated, and you have been liberated from one thing—the act of fear that would invite you to separation.

Because this text, The Kingdom, is a teaching of unification, we must address the idea of separation as a claim humanity has made, is party to, and is about to transcend. And we say that intentionally. About to transcend means that the species itself is going to challenge the idea of separation, because it can no longer mandate it and continue as it has. And because you need to move beyond the old for the well-being of yourself and others, because the polarity is so extraordinary that everybody can now see it, you will come to a moment of realization of the folly of your behavior, the collective agreement to fear and the ramifications of that—to hoard your wealth, to damn your neighbors, to deny God in favor of what you think you need to perpetuate your ideas of safety. The calamity you face as a civilization is the realization of how foolish you have been, and that is frightening. Imagine you realize that you have been engaged in acts, and harmful acts—yes, perhaps learned through them, but accrued the karma through them that you must now attend to. And by that we simply mean cause, effect, act and outcome, that has placed you all in this challenging moment.

Now, reconciliation, which is the gift of this book, must come with the realization of how far you have gone from your alignment, how fearful you have been. And you are choosing this now, we have to say, and so much of what you see will indeed be re-seen, re-understood, once you decide that you may learn your lessons in a higher way. You understand the gift of God, the presence of God, as unification. And when you understand that God is unification, not an old man in a cloud, but the Source of all things seen finally as present, which is the Kingdom, the claim “God Is, God Is, God Is” will claim all things.

Now, the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” which is the alchemical act of reconciliation, supports the meaning of the claim “God Is.” When all things are made new, or re-perceived, or re-seen, the outcome of that is the simple statement “God Is.” You may work with the claim “God Is” because it is always true at any level of alignment. The fruits of this, though, are fully known when one aligns to the Upper Room, moves beyond fear—because, again, fear cannot exist here—and, in this place of unification, “I am known, I am known, I am known, I see all things with the eyes of the Christ,” the world is indeed made new. And your knowing that “God Is,” beyond the theoretical, beyond any kind of conjecture, is simply the way the world is, without the tint, without fear, supporting what you see. We are all so afraid of losing our money, we hide our wealth. We are all so afraid of what our neighbors may do, we hoard our guns. We are so afraid of the future, we will do anything to distract ourselves from the true needs of the present.

We will say this to each of you. Those who say yes to this teaching will be met by this teaching experientially. The days of theory are over. And the alignment you require to support a world made new is the presence of God, in your knowing and in your action, and in all things that may be seen. As we are your teachers, we anticipate your needs. We understand the growth and the confusion [you encounter when you choose¹] to move beyond a landscape that has been comforting, even in its fear-based nature, to a new level of vibration where you cannot choose in fear, but only in knowing. When you are operating in your knowing, you are never afraid. And any moment in any life you have ever had, when you were truly knowing anything you were unafraid. Did you hear that word? Unafraid, without fear, because you are without fear and you know any action you take will be in accord to your true nature, without a basis in fear. And a new world may be seen, and in fact conceived of, in this way.

DAY SIXTEEN

What you justify, what you wish to be so and would make so, will cause you to adhere to the old, to damn the future. What is before you may be remarkable, unknown, unseen, but your intractability—“It should be as I say”—will claim you, not only in the old, but in defiance of the new, that which seeks to be born. Re-creation of the old, through habit, through indifference, through what you would justify—“It was as this, it must be as that to be what I want”—will contain you in a template, in a way of seeing the world, black and white, if you wish, that stops you, inhibits you, from claiming the new when the new is right before you. Underline this, friends. The new is right before you. You can taste it with your tongue. You can touch it with your fingers. You can breathe in its essence. The legacy of history is releasing and the new is seeking to be known, and your participation in this, this great act of transgressing upon the old in order to allow the new to be born, is essential to the Kingdom’s creation.

The creation of the Kingdom is less a passive act than the reconciliation of what has always been true that has been held in diminished state—lower octave, if you wish—and the realization of the inherent Divine that is the thing that claims things in a higher way. Your reconciliation on an individual level is preparatory for the alchemization of the whole. Now, what this means is that you are seeded. You are blooming. The aroma of your scent is in some ways acceptable to the mass that inhales it. In the inhaling, the recognition of the scent of the bloom that you have become, they embark on their own journey of reconciliation. And the manifestation of this plane, which is always born through collective consciousness, is re-created as enough of you align to the realization of what has always been present, and that is the Kingdom.

Now, you’ve understood that the Kingdom of God is within you. It is an old teaching. It is a true teaching. But it is also without, and the reconciliation of the Divine in the individual is what propels the re-creation of the manifest plane in a higher level. The idealization of what the new should be, always held by the old, is something that will impede you. When you step into the unknown, would you allow the unknown, not only to meet you, but to teach you what it is? When we say this experience, the experience of this text, is in the biology, in the system, in all things expressed, you may understand that what is actually happening in re-creation surmounts the old, releases the old, reclaims you in form and field as you can only be in truth. And the legacy of this claim, “I am free,” must be inclusive of the freedoms that come to one who is no longer bound, no longer sealed, no longer claimed by the legacy of fear that is what dims the light, dampens the love, supports the old, and would see you tethered to a history where humanity has denied God in itself and in all things.

Now, when we use these words through Paul, he has resistance. It appears to him as a religious teaching, and it has never been so. This is not religion. It is realization. And the claim of the Kingdom from the individual to the collective—“You Have Come, You Have Come, You Have Come”—is the anchoring of potential in dominion, which simply means it is claimed and known in form. The requirement of the old, to decide what toe you can stick in the water, to decide if you wish to be in the water, is about to be ended by a dive, a full-body dive, into alignment. And for those of you who say yes to this, we need to support you in comprehending what it means to be immersed in a higher octave as your expression. We must say again, as we take you out of theoretical teachings into the teachings of being, all things may be understood beyond the old language you’ve used, beyond the inherited structures of what it even means to be. Comprehension then comes through knowing, through experience, and through alignment to the Source of all things. It is not an easy transition for the one who wishes to control outcome, but it is a blessed transgression upon the old to release an idea that you thought you needed, that you believed always was, to be presented instead with, not only the new, but the gifts that the new brings.

Now, this amplitude of re-creation that, indeed, comes at the cost of the old has merit to humanity, for what it brings humanity is the realization of love. And the realization of love means that you know love, not as conjecture, but as the new plane of expression, of bounty, that you exist in, just as the lower octave, tainted by fear, knows fear through all things, and your experience of self in the low octave, no matter how you try to fight it or say it is not so, is always anointed by fear because fear is ever present. It is in the mortar of the building, in the foundation of the bank, in what you have known of as religion, as how you love another in fear of their leaving you. It is all these things and more. In the Upper Room, the place you come to, if you wish, the way you stand in preparation for this immersion, you shift in field to the agreement to love, which in fact endows this plane of experience where fear was what you knew prior.

Now, what it means to be at this level—“I am in love, in participation to love, in agreement to love”—is not something sanctimonious. Imagine you are breathing in a scent of a flower, and the flower informs your experience of what you feel and how you experience a landscape. Love is as so. It is participatory. It is transforming. You are looking for something that you can think through. “If I am in love in this way, I will be X, Y, or Z.” If in fact you are in love in this way, you are operating in a landscape in agreement to love. It comes without thought. You are not making it so. It is what is, and you are agreeing to what is because that is how you have aligned.

Now, to trust us when we teach you these things is actually to trust your own capacity to agree and to know. If we say anything to you that you wish to deny, you may do as you wish. When we teach Paul about experience, and he has had many experiences of these things, he still wishes to cling to the old, the security of the idea that he is not loved, or if there is a God it is somewhat indifferent, not only to him, but all of its creations. That is the legacy of separation that we are seeking to lift you from. That is the agreement to separation that you make through fear. You live in the small kingdom, the shadowed room, not even believing anymore that there is something far greater that can and will be known. To justify the old, to make it so as you think it should be, is to lock yourself in to a codified reality, and the codification of this reality has been the belief in separation. Now, as this has accrued evidence throughout the times you have incarnated, it has built itself a fortress, which is separation. “I am separate from my brother, certainly those people over there.” “I must be separate from God because I can’t find God anywhere I seem to seek it.” To know the self as worthy has been a teaching we have offered prior. You are worthy. You were born. You have a right to be. And the Kingdom, we suggest, is the inheritance of the one who has said yes with every fiber of her being to a potential that seeks to be known in expression and in consort with the entirety of reality that the individual experiences.

Now, some of you think this must mean you wear a robe, you are pious, you are smiling in a dazed fashion, as you liquidate the material realm that you no longer have any time for. Nothing could be farther from the truth. Instead, what occurs is a foundation—underline the word foundation—in the Upper Room where the agreement to the presence of the Divine in articulation is what you have come to know yourself through. This is not enlightenment per se. It is realization of the omnipresence of the Divine and your ability to transmute the old vibrational field with your encounter to it, which simply means the light that you are not only transforms the darkness that it encounters, it actually re-creates in the higher that which has been damned to the lower. And we use those words intentionally. What has been damned is what has been put outside of God. It’s so simple. What is blessed is known in the presence of God. And as you become this light, incorporated, manifest, in agreement to the inherent Divine in all, the claim that is made by your energetic field, “Behold, I make all things new,” is the claim of the reclamation of what has been held in fear, and is now liberated.

Now, the manifestation of these teachings will be known by you in your experience of them. If you wish this to be an intellectual text, you are going to put it down now, because where we intend to take you, if indeed we are allowed to teach as we wish, is the dive into integration—again, the field you’ve known, the thing you’ve seen or believed to be self, as newly re-known, newly re-created, newly aligned in the Upper Room beyond the idea of separation. Now, if you understand, friends, separation as idea, we would say that the reconciliation is simply the release of the idea and the evidence that the separation idea has accrued, and the lower octave, in a translated form, is re-seen in alignment to where you now stand.

Our teaching for Paul, on this fine day, is that any choice made in agreement to the Divine will support you in your own revelation of the inherent Divine. Any choice made in denial of the Divine will perpetuate the old. How does he know the difference, he asks? Quite simply. Where is the love in the choice that is made? Where is the agreement to God in the choice that is made? Where do you deny the Divine because it is not convenient to what you have been taught or believed to be? Reconciliation, the dive off the diving board into the completeness of one’s experience, is challenging, yes, but it is nothing other than coming home. Do you understand this? Finally, you get to say, “I Have Come,” and you have come home to the Source of your being while in an incarnation and encountering a world that will be made new through your alignment to it.

As we continue this text, we must find ways to support this teaching, known in language, to bypass the old meanings that the language has intended. We need to learn to sing to you in a new language, where the words are made new, or at least your encounter with them is not operating through a filter born in fear. Revelation is the key here, and if you allow the new to be revealed to you, if you allow the fear that you have known yourself in to be released to claim the higher, the permission will claim you in the Upper Room where the foundation you require can be attended to.

The first part of this text will be called “Foundation and the Old,” and the next section of the text will be “The Manifestation of the Kingdom in Realization.” We will leave this for now. We will continue tomorrow, if we are allowed to teach then. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

DAY SEVENTEEN

When humanity decides to move forward to claim a new way of being, to leave that which has been left by necessity, you must understand that the transition is often not graceful. You understand yourselves through the known, through what you have accrued, decided should be. And when the new comes at the cost of the old, the environment itself may appear to be in cataclysm. Everything is opportunity, and indeed must be seen as such, and to withstand the changes that are before you is to say yes to the highest outcome that may present itself. Now, the highest outcome need not be the most convenient, or perhaps the most comfortable. The high one will be the one that claims you on higher ground, or the Upper Room, if you prefer, which is indeed higher ground as it solidifies in a firmament of faith.

Now, to hold faith through transitional times is to trust outcome beyond what the small self would predicate it on. The idea of self in safety must be discussed now. Your ideas of safety have been accrued through challenges. “I survived the marriage, I am still here.” “I had a hard time through this period, I made it through.” You understand your endurance, or your ability to withstand change, through the small self’s intentions to move beyond a known and find oneself still intact, perhaps in some other way.

What is happening now is rather different, and the understanding of safety must be understood in a new way as well. If your idea of safety is predicated upon what was, and restoration to what was, you will be deeply challenged in the times to come, because as everything lifts, the dross that has collected, the old that seeks to release, becomes pronounced, seen for what it has been. Imagine lifting a bag from the depths of the ocean. As the bag breaks the surface of the water, the water that has collected there begins to pour out the seams. As the bag is lifted, what has been there will have to release because it cannot stand in the higher vibrational field. And the passage an individual undergoes now is the same as the collective.

The evidence of collective change is before you. You decide what you like or what you don’t and you predicate outcomes through what you think should happen or desire should be, based on the old template—again, the idea of restoration to a status quo or what was once known. The restoration you are undergoing is truly different than what you expect it to be. You are being restored to a higher nature, a true template, that is not corrupted through fear, through neglect, through fear of what you truly are, because what you truly are is what is seen when the bag is opened. When you are revealed from the depths of self, you transition to the higher as the bag breaks the wave and releases itself to a new state of being. You are all releasing ideas of what you think should be, based on how things were, and your invitation now is to say yes to the new. “I am willing to learn. I am willing to see. I am willing to decide that what my safety is, is in tenet to my divine nature.”

“What does that mean?” he says. The divine nature, the one you truly are, is your safety. You may call it the God within, or the God that is in all things. But to know this self and to apply this self as the way you navigate change is to comprehend self as willing to change, beyond prior prescription, beyond prior edict, and the claims made upon you of what you should be, through the collective that has known itself in fear.

Now, the fear you see in these times, outpictured before you, are all based on one thing—the denial of the Divine. And the agreement to faith, “I know myself as holy, and consequently I must know all as holy,” will actually transmute fear because the claim of the True Self does not abide in fear. While we have often taught the simple claim “I am free, I am free, I am free,” you don’t really comprehend what this means. The freedom we are teaching you is what happens when you are no longer afraid. Now, some of you mistake this for defiance in the face of fear—to challenge fear with a fist, to try to provoke it with a poke. That is not what we are teaching. If you are still seeking to provoke fear or challenge fear, you are still in alignment to fear. When you lift to the Upper Room, the higher octave where fear is not expressing, you are the exemplar, the one who doesn’t require fear, and consequently you have no need to provoke it, to fight it, to prove yourself right in the face of it. That is always the small self, in her determined way, challenging what she thinks might oppress her, control her, demean her.

The gift of this teaching is that the battle is over. It doesn’t exist in the Upper Room. You are not fighting fear. You are not in ignorance of it. It is simply not present as you navigate the ship that is your life. You are not being fueled by fear. You are not deciding in fear. You are not agreeing to fear and the many faces that fear would wear to disguise itself. What you see as war is fear. What you see as famine is fear. What you see as degradation of others is fear. The challenge now is how to be, beyond the agreement to fear, so that you can lift those you encounter who are floating away in a sea of fear, grappling at anything to stay afloat, even if it means that it comes at the cost of another’s well-being.

The operation here that you are engaging in is transmuting an idea of self that has been known in fear, accrued evidence to it. And the being that is lifted, the suitcase coming from the water that has accrued fear, is given the tools to release it. Each attunement we have offered you has been to your benefit, if indeed they are applied. If they are not applied, if they are not aligned to in truth, they become words without meaning. The meaning the words are invested in are of the True Self. You are not conjuring Spirit. You are allowing Spirit to claim itself in the highest accord or level of manifestation that you may know—again, the denial of the Divine being the challenge you face, and the denial of the Divine being fear itself.

Now, understand yourselves, friends, as multifaceted beings. There is a small self, yes. It is not wrong or bad. There is a small self that seeks safety through the known, whose idea of self is predicated upon the old in maintenance and continuum. Now, imagine that there is a small boat, thrust against a rock. The small boat begins to sink. The idea that the small boat has is that it cannot exist in this way and will do what it can to maintain its identity—fix the hull, man the ship, move the ship away from the rocks it has been thrust on. In fact, what needs to happen is that the ship needs to lift beyond the storm, which means above it, to a peaceful or placid state of reconciliation.

In these times, when so much of what you’ve trusted seems thrown up against the rocks, you have choices to make. Your idea of survival must no longer be predicated upon the things you have known, but must shift instead to the Divine and its true potential. Now, understand this as a gift and opportunity. Beyond the known, which is the teaching that you are receiving, is moving beyond a template where what was predicted historically must ensue in the ways you have known it. The gift of the teaching is beginning to operate foundationally from the Upper Room, where all things are made new.

Now, Paul interrupts the teaching. “Is this a practical teaching? I understand the metaphors you use. I understand the leaky suitcase releasing the old. I understand the ship that seeks to maintain its old shell instead of rising above the stormy water. I understand the ideas that the Upper Room may be maintained. But if one is losing his job, one is losing her health, how do we operate if we cannot reconcile ourselves through past choice, how we have learned to survive past change, and you say that we have?”

This is the question of the day. And if you move to the heart center and invite the Monad, the Divine Spark, the God within, to claim you in this language—“I am one with the Source of all things, I am in union with my divine nature, and I am in agreement [with its true expression”—you begin²] to align to a level of vibration where you may not only maintain a sense of safety in what appears to be a storm, but you may begin to align to what is before you in a higher way.

“How does this work?” he says. We would like to explain this differently than you would like. When you align to the True Self, when you give it purview, when you agree to its expression, when you say yes to the Divine as all things in this simple claim—“God Is, God Is, God Is”—your invocation of the Divine becomes the gateway to your comprehension of your potential in manifestation, which is your safety and always will be so.

Imagine a bedspread that has accrued dust. You hold it out, you shake it loose. There is a cloud of dust before you, the room is not seen clearly. But the dust releases, it settles, and you see the room and what you thought once was in a rather different way. The confusion of these times, in every way, shape, or form, is the dust itself, the residue of challenge, the residue of change, and some of you are blinded by it and you seek to make choices to maintain an idea of safety that will no longer be maintained. “And why?” you ask. Because humanity has decided collectively to grow, to take a step up. And the release of the old, which is the dust you are seeing, has accrued to be moved, to be released, so that you may see beyond it.

Now, the dust that was on the bedspread was less visible until it was shaken up, but now you see it. You cannot deny what you’ve claimed, what the collective has agreed to. And your ability to be challenged or reinforced by the old shepherds you, if you wish, into a dark valley where you say, “Well, here we are.” But the opportunity is other. The opportunity is very different. “I see what we have created. I see how we have chosen to harm one another. I see how I have chosen to deny my divine nature. And, as I understand this, I lift beyond the storm, beyond the old, and beyond the known to what can be claimed in the high octave that has aligned me to my inheritance.”

Your inheritance, friends, is far more vast than you know. Your inheritance, the Kingdom itself, seeks to be born in your recognition of it. It is what exists when the dust has settled, when the air is cleared, when the sky before you is no longer tainted by the residue of fear. The claim we have offered you in the past, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the Divine in manifestation, is what will support you in a new landscape. The Upper Room itself is here to be known experientially. And we would invite you now, if you wish, to say this with us:

“On this day I choose to align every aspect of my being to the Upper Room, so I may begin to know, may begin to say yes, may begin to agree to my alignment there. On this day, I say yes to the manifestation of self, at the cost of the old, that seeks to be born through me. And as I say yes, as I agree, I announce my presence in fullness. I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come. And as I say these words, I affirm my being, in agreement, in alignment, with the truth of all things. God Is. God Is. God Is.”

Now, this agreement is manifest in the energetic field as it is invoked. Your alignment to the claim that you’ve made will be what you occur, what you agree to, through this transition. And these words are the words to use to begin to maintain the new identity that you have chosen:

“I am in agreement to the Divine Self as who and what I truly am. I am free. I am free. I am free. I am in the Upper Room. I Have Come.”

We thank you each for your presence. This is in the text.

DAY EIGHTEEN

When we teach you about what you know, what you comprehend, what you already agree to, you must assess the teaching through your own experience. You know your gender. You know the color of the night sky. You know what it means to breathe—you do it every day. There are many things you know and you already agree to and you are in coherence with. Any true teaching exists beyond the moment it is dictated in, and the teaching that is being received here, a teaching in knowing and being, realization, and agreement to the mastery that is present at the level of the Christ, is not a new teaching, has been present, will always be present, as long as there are ears to hear it.

Now, when we teach you about manifestation, the decree that we offer, “I know who I am,” the agreement to realization of who, the Manifest Divine, is understood by you, more so than known. At the level of the small self, comprehension comes. You don’t know the color of the night sky by the label or color it’s been named. You know the color of the night sky by the experience of it. The name has been added—“that is a dark blue sky,” “that is a black sky,” “that is a nighttime sky”—but your experience of the sky is actually nameless. It simply is. You are not thinking of breathing. You are not saying, “Here is the next breath.” You are in the next breath and experience it. You would be so without the name breath attached to the respiratory system, the act of breathing. It would simply be. The claim “I know who I am,” realization of identity, is the manifestation of the Christed Self beyond the known, in its being, its expression, its alignment to the totality of the Divine that simply is. Underline the words simply is. As long as the small self is trying to use it as an appliqué, something to be aspired to, it will not be known at the level of agreement, which means experience, of the night sky or the breath. When the being is operating in alignment, “I know who I am,” its expression will actually claim you, supersede the old structures of identity, unmask you so you may be revealed as the True Self you always are. Then the being of the Divine, the manifestation of the Divine, and the expression of the Divine is agreed to on multiple levels of vibration—hence, a chord, c-h-o-r-d, of resonance that aligns you to completion.

Now, completion, at this level, must be understood as an act of being—an act of being, not a state of being, an act of being because the resonant field that is expressed is in action as and through you, beyond the known, beyond the old template that you would seek to use to describe it. The act of being, the act of resonance, the resonant sound as expressed in agreement to itself. The act of being, in agreement to the tone of the Divine, the vibratory accord of the Divine, that is instilled in all things because it cannot not be there. The tree knows what it is. It knows identity without conjuring. It is not confused about its birth. Neither is the puppy. Neither is the sloth. Neither is the toad. They know who they are, they are in complete expression, and they understand that their being is in union with something higher. They simply comprehend themselves in the immediacy of the moment, which is the only place that God may be known. They are not naming it God, nor do they need to. They are being in it, as of it, in agreement to it, which is the claim “God Is.”

Now, the small self, in degrees, releases the need to control this. Imagine a seed cracking. The cracking itself is the discomfort. The moment you begin to realize that what is occurring within you is the resurrection, the Divine Self moving towards its full expression, you will stop denying the process, stop seeking to hang on to the old, and align to it as the gift that it truly is. To be gifted at this level is to comprehend “I know who I am.” And the true knowing or realization is not a debate. It is no longer a question. It simply is—as is the night sky, as is the breath. It is the totality of the manifestation at the level of identity.

Now, we say this for Paul. We are speaking quickly through you today to override your resistance to this teaching. If we must continue this way, we will. If you wish us to slow down, you may request it. But we will continue at this pace if we can.

The Divine Self as who and what, identity, expression in manifestation, has been taught. The claim “I know how I serve” is continuous, because the expression of the breath, the expression of the night sky, which always is, must be unfolding in your awareness. You will never stop learning at this level because you have entered the Upper Room, a new plane of expression where what you call to you is what you require, without asking.

Now, here we are speaking of knowledge, the evidence that is accrued of the Divine as who and what, in identity, in form, and in all that is seen, because the gift of being, as the True Self, is the realization of the True Self in all you witness—again, without effort, even without language, if it were a potential for you to simply say, “Yes, God Is,” and move into the alignment or the agreement to the omnipotent and ever-present Divine that is instilled in all manifestation. Paul is seeing a snake charmer trying to lure the snake to sing from its basket, its loud hiss, its large fan, expressing outward. You are not luring God, encouraging God to sing to you. You are realizing that the song has been present and you have been deaf to it, and that is the correct term, unintentionally deafened to the tone of the Divine that is always singing. Underline always. Restoration to your true nature unclogs the ears, unblinds the vision, to a level of vibration in totality that you have dismissed, not only as impossible, but have a small self that would seek to prove that as so.

When you understand that the True Self as who and what, in agreement or accord to union, manifests itself at the cost of the old, the small self will stop trying to escalate this process, demand it be in its way what it should be by its nature. The small self is not the one who aligns. It is the Divine Self who supports the acclimation of every aspect of self to liberate itself from the denial of God. You are not pretending. You are not bypassing. You are claiming what is always true. You are not deciding that something should be seen as holy that you cannot abide personally. You are not deciding that it didn’t matter that you lost both your parents when you were two. You are not deciding that the world is perfect in its politics, in its laws, in its oppression of some and privilege of others. You are knowing God as all things. And, consequently, what you see is re-made in alignment, not through projection, but because you know.

Now, in this knowing that we are teaching you, there are laws, there are some rules, that you must understand. The simple ones have been taught. What you put in darkness calls you to the darkness. But you don’t understand that the acclimation of the vibrational field that you undergo through this alchemical process of alignment states itself as resonance. The claim “I know who I am,” as stated by the True Self, has manifest qualities, which include the release of a sense of self that has been known in separation. The agreement to claim these teachings in a healthy sequence—which simply means you get used to the ocean, the toe first, then to the ankle, then to the waist, then to the neck—supports you in agreement of realization without overwhelming the psyche, the energetic system, and the body. All must undergo a process, not always in the same sequence, that will align you. Once you are immersed in the great ocean of God, you know yourself as there. There is no question. There is no confusion. You are not seeking what has been found. You are allowing what is to be. And the claim you have made, “I am free, I am free, I am free,” operates as the barometer for what you can and will acclimate to.

Now, we will say this to Paul. He is saying, “There are laws? There are laws? Will you tell us what they are?” If you wish to look at a law as something that is always true, you can understand this differently. And if you look at a rule as a guidepost, you can be supported by it. Indeed, you are free, and the acclimation of the will to the higher will, the agreement to be in love, in accord with Source, which is love, to bypass the old simply because you don’t align there, not because you are fighting against it, has its own manifestation. And there are stages, in any system of acclimation to Source, that will benefit you to understand.

The choice to be in fear must now be understood as something you are responsible to. That does not mean in this process you will not experience it. You may indeed purge it from the memory of the body as you undergo this transition. But imagine you are swimming in an ocean and the seaweed is entangling you. You are in the ocean, aware of the presence of the Divine, but you still feel the entanglement, the feeling of the seaweed. This is the permission to go farther out to sea, beyond where the seaweed would entangle you, or, if you wish, above to the Upper Room where there is none.

Now, the refuge of the small self will always be the denial of God. Do you understand this? The refuge of the personality structure will always be the Divine as never present. And asked why, we will say yes, and we will explain. The denial of God has been the home or the template that the small self was reared in, in an energetic agreement with the complete manifestation or structure of reality that you have known yourselves in. So what you are doing, when you get fearful, is returning home to the old base, the old way, where at least you believe you know the rules. In the Upper Room, the foundational experience, which we are beginning to teach you, of being in God—“God Is, God Is, God Is”—will support you in acclimation through agreement.

Now, you may use the word willingness for now. “I am willing to agree to this” or “to align to this.” And we say this for you so that you may understand that the will itself, as it is being braided, does not deny you. You are not being tricked into the Upper Room. You are invited here because it is your true inheritance. You may claim it, “I am in the Upper Room,” and may find yourself there. But the moment you decide to go back to what you knew, you will find yourself busy there. You may forget the teaching. You may choose to dismiss it entirely. And that is fine with us, as long as your learning continues in the lower octave. You chose to incarnate in this field for the opportunities it presents to you. So being a human being, in your learning, is what you chose. But what is offered now is reconciliation at the cost of the old, which does not diminish you, or even supersede your will. It gives you the will in alignment to Source that will claim you in your inheritance, which means you become the gift and the receiver of the gift simultaneously.

Now, if you understand the simple teaching, “God sees God in all things,” the seeing of God as all things is the gift, as is the ability to be the receptor of it. So as the conduit for the Divine, the expresser of the Divine, in the high octave, the tone you have conceded to, by agreement, expresses beyond the mandate of the small self, which is separation. You can choose separation, but it is never true. It’s a way of experiencing reality in a diminished state. When you align to the higher, you release the need for it, just as the shell cracks open to release the sprout that will grow and flower. The shell itself was necessary for a stage of being, and it is moved beyond, in the act of liberation that the seed encounters itself in through the sprouting of the plant. “I am free. I am free. I am free.” As the seed leaves, and as the sprout begins to articulate, as it reaches for the sun and shows itself as what it truly is, you may comprehend the claim “I am in the Upper Room, I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come.” And the scent of the flower, in its expression, is what translates physical reality by nature of its presence. Period. By nature of its presence. You believe this to be passive. Imagine you are walking through a field of flowers. The flowers are not fixing you. They are not asking you to see their beauty. They simply are being. And as the scent reaches you, as you are enveloped in the scent, you are realized through the interaction with the scent, and you leave a different being.

In some ways that is what we do when we teach you the claim “Behold, I make all things new.” But what actually happens to matter in this encounter is far different than you think. You are sensory beings. You only know the color of the sky through what you’ve been told blue is. You only know what heat is through the idea of heat. If you didn’t know the idea of heat, and you scalded your hand, what would have caused it? You have ways to understand reality that are fruitful, that give you agreement to a manifest world. But in the altered state, from the Upper Room, what you are doing alchemically, through re-knowing, is in fact saying, “I know what you have always been. I know what you can only be. I know this through my eyes, through my senses, but, far more importantly, through my expression.” It is your expression, in tone and vibration, that translates the physical, in vibration, to a higher octave of being.

Now, you understand some symbols. A rock may be carved into a shape. It is still the old rock. It has taken a different form. This is not that teaching. This is escalation of tone. This entire text could be sung to you without any language at all, and you would benefit from it. But you would lack context. You would become confused. Imagine, if you wish, that the senses you have held, which as we have stated prior are operating in a diminished state, were suddenly opened wide, the full spectrum of colors, the full spectrum of tone, the absence of linear time, were made known to you. You would find yourself mad. If you were taking a drug, you would thank the drug for the experience, and hopefully return, of sound mind and body, to tell the tale. You don’t need to imbibe a substance to claim the Divine experientially. You need to release the need to operate in coherence with a limited sense of reality and agree to the manifestation that is occurring now, and we said that intentionally—that is occurring now. We are no longer teaching potential. We are teaching actualization for those who are willing to say yes. We will not, and cannot, override will. It is your gift to always choose. And even in the braiding of the will, where you move to unified will, which is simply knowing, in a heightened state, without confusion, there is no need to deliberate. So the choices before you are made well, in agreement to what is always true. But the sanctity of the will, respected by us, will always be present. And your choice to unify, not so much for your well-being, but for your contribution to the escalation on this plane, this act of rebirth that is occurring, will be known, chosen by you, and welcomed by all you encounter.

The times you stand in, times of revolution, times of change, times of dis-ease, times of fear, are in fact temporary. You will not live through this and not see it to another way. Everything is in change. If you find yourself in a riptide, with confluent energies fighting each other, you may find yourself in a storm. And the polarity you experience on some days is the result of the confusion and deception that you have all been party to because you have agreed to fear and still expect it to be your teacher. When fear is no longer your teacher, you may know yourselves beyond it. It is a very limited teacher. It will always teach you in the worst way possible. “What does that mean?” he says. There is really no need to incur pain, to choose suffering. You may learn through those things. But if you can learn through love, agree to love, which stops you from being participatory to the polarization or the confusion or the fighting, you become the calm in the storm that can calm others, as well, through your agreement to their true nature.

We wish to continue, Paul. He is asking for a rest. We wish to complete this teaching, if indeed we are allowed to continue.

The resolute self, the one who truly knows, and claims this identity, not with effort, but through realization, becomes the light that agrees to itself in the face of all you have placed in darkness. Any human being that claims to be acting in a high way, while damning another, is in deception. You must understand this, friends. We do not judge you for your acts. You are responsible to your choices, though, and you do not wish to awaken, see the folly of your deeds, and seek forgiveness for what you have chosen in fear. There is a higher way. We will teach you this, as we are allowed, as we are invited to speak, and as you are willing to listen to the words. The decree “I Am, I am free, I am known” is the articulation of the True Self as expressed by each individual in a knowing of unity.

Now, it is not the small self’s knowing of unity, because the small self doesn’t know it. But it is the Divine Self in reconciliation. And as it is, as you be as it, you are the flower that loses its encasing, you are the light that permeates the darkness, and you have the gift, the deep gift, the profound gift, of realizing matter as of God. You have heard teachings of alchemy where matter is transformed. While these are illustrations of truth, perhaps the act of the yogi, the act of the saint, true alchemy is the realization of matter as invested and expressed as Spirit. And it is the return to Spirit that makes the clay malleable so it may be re-known.

The uplifting of humanity is not done with a hammer or an axe. The old is leaving, or collapsing, or being re-known, re-seen, around you, because that is a casing for the collective to begin to rise beyond. Imagine the earth, in shell, at one level of vibration. The Divine as earth, the Divine as matter, the Divine as all manifestation, begins to vibrate in a higher frequency. It is what expresses at the cost of the old. The shell or encasing, which is separation, is released. Now, it is not necessarily pretty or graceful to see this happen. But it is a gift, because the gift of this release, for humanity itself, is the knowing of who it is—not placid, not pious, not doing God’s will with a sad face. It is simply the agreement to the omnipresent nature of Source as all, so you may enjoy, so you may witness, so, indeed, you may claim the Kingdom.

We will stop now. Indeed, this is in the text. Period. Period. Period.

DAY NINETEEN

Sometimes you decide to rely upon the old because you can’t fathom that the future holds good things. You cannot imagine that what awaits for you, in what we call the Upper Room, is realization of self beyond the octave of fear, where all things are made new. You cannot yet comprehend, after lifetimes of fear, that who in fact you are is far beyond what you have thought and no longer needs the reliance upon the old forms, the old edicts, the old requirements for being that you have all become so accustomed to.

We wish to teach you today about the truth of your being, and your reliance upon truth at the cost of the evidence that might present itself to you to teach you otherwise, your reliance upon the Divine, not an ephemeral God, a true God, a being that is as with you as the air you breathe, as the sunlight on your face, as the rain upon your skin, a being and knowing that is present always. It is here, and the claim “God Is,” the claim of the reliance upon the ever-present Divine, is the true gift of this teaching. The requirement of the old to seek evidence to affirm your ideas of what has been or should be will now be removed and, in fact, replaced with a higher agreement. In the face of evidence that should confirm your fear—underline should—we offer you the option of a way of being where what can be known beyond fear is present for you in the claim “It will be so.”

Now, the claim “It will be so” is not what you want. The claim “It will be so” confirms the identity of the Divine that is present without your evidence to perceive it. “Explain this,” he says. The claim “It will be so” is in fact a mandate of the arrival of the presence of all that is, “God Is, God Is, God Is.” And the claim “It will be,” the translation from the old to the new, is of great benefit to you when you are surrounded by evidence that would seek to confirm fear. “How do we use this claim?” he says. The realization of the Divine, “It will be,” will be claimed for you in the face of any fear. And the it that is being claimed is the omnipresence, “God Is, God Is, God Is.”

He asks a question. We will answer. “It will be seems to set it in the future.” It is in fact not. “It will be” is in fact a command of presence. The Divine is, “It will be”—not someday, not somehow, but in the face of deception, in the requirements of the old that would seek to claim you back. Your authorization at the level of true will in any strata, high, low, or in-between, is to claim your experience. And the claim of the Divine, “I know who I am,” is manifest and confirmed. “It will be. I know what I am. It will be. I know how I serve. It will be.” These confirmations need not be spoken, may be invoked, but in fact each claim will counter fear, will counter old evidence, because the presence of the Divine, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” will be known by you in the claim “It will be.”

“Are these claims used in tandem?” he asks. “It will be, God Is?” In fact, no. They are actually comparable. The claim “God Is, God Is, God Is” in fact transforms alignment to what is seen. What we are teaching you right now is how to attend to what you have seen that has its basis in history that would confound the teachings we offer you. The claim “It will be” presupposes that the Divine is present in the face of a challenge, and your confirmation of this experientially is “God Is.”

Now, we are not contradicting ourselves, as Paul would suspect. This is in fact a singular teaching, and its basis is the present moment that many of you sit in. When you are faced with a dilemma, when you are confused about a choice, when what you read in the news appeals to your lowest nature and invites you to become fearful, the claim “It will be,” the Divine will be, the Creator is, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” actually claims you in the higher accord and releases your bias from past preference. “I am afraid of spiders.” Well, in fact, you have been. “It will be,” in the face of the fear, is not a confirmation of the fear, but the agreement to God to support your new realization and to confirm it with an act of presencing—again, the claim “God Is, God Is, God Is.”

Now, so much of what you fear you have known past in ways that were frightening, or you were invoked by others to have an agreement to fear, what one should be frightened of. In all ways, prior agreements to what you think you are are transmuted or translated in a higher way, so that you no longer hold the bias, or the attachment, predilection, to old fear from where you stand now. Once you stand in the Upper Room, you have a choice to return to the old, to claim the fear of the spider, or to observe the self beyond the fear, beyond the old way of knowing or the old way of painting a probable picture that invokes a future fear. You imagine yourself in fearful states without realizing that this is the way you align to a potential. It is not needed.

We teach you today about your own authority, in Divine Will and in agreement to it, and to be supported in a realization of the truth of your being in spite of evidence to the contrary. When you are frightened of illness, you align to the fear, you are claiming an agreement to a potential. He interrupts the teaching. “But what about prudence? We are prudent. We are doing things to keep ourselves safe and well.” And that is required. As long as you understand that the bathwater is too hot, you do not step in it. You are not frightened of the water. You are waiting for the water to cool. That is prudence. You cannot imagine being fearful of the bathwater.

As we teach you, each of you is about to face some requirements, those things that you’ve demanded be what they were, and allow to release them to a higher state. As each of you encounter yourselves in what we call the Upper Room, you will find very quickly that there are aspects of self that are still requiring attention. You do not deny these things. You comprehend them, not as separate from your Divine Self, but as requiring the Divine Self to re-know them. This is the process of acclimation, and it will continue to be. You are not always working on the self. In fact, this is not work so much as new agreement. And each of you who says, “It will be done,” is confirming the manifestation of the Divine as and through you, and not saying, “Next week maybe, maybe this lifetime, maybe some other.” You are simply aligning in the present moment that it will be so.

Now, you understand the claim “Thy will be done,” which is the Divine invoking itself upon any situation. And “Thy will be done” is less about acquiescence to an outcome than a confirmation that the outcome you perceive is indeed already in alignment to what we would call the higher. “Thy will be done” is not consent through surrender as much as consent or agreement through alignment. The will of the Divine is present. “God Is. God Is. God Is.”

When we began this lecture, we said you could not imagine certain things, and we wish you to know certain things through your own realization of agreement to these teachings. We wish you each to take a walk today, a simple walk wherever you may walk. First close your eyes, and upon opening them make the new claim “It will be done, it will be.” And claim again the phrase, the invocation, the alignment to truth, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” and allow the Divine to become present through your experience of it. Not making it so. You have claimed it. “I am in the Upper Room,” which is the initial claim that is required for you to have a basis in this experience, and then have the experience by yourself without expectation of what it should look like.

As we teach you today, as we claim you in witness, as we authorize this teaching as the required teaching for the student to learn, we wish you to know that where we are intending to take you is to a level of vibration where you can no longer agree to fear. Now, some of you believe that that would be arrogant. We are not inviting you to walk into the lion’s den and be fearless. We are saying you will know yourself without the old attachment or information that would support a reaction that would call you back to the lower vibratory field. This will be done in two ways. Your permission is required. But the release of the old, which will happen in stages, will require you less to face fear than to acknowledge your requirement for it. Now, if you understand that the basis of this idea, this instruction, is that there is an aspect of self who relies upon fear to be her director, his safety, you will understand that that is what is being released. When you are no longer aligned with unconscious intention to re-create the old, the liberation happens.

Imagine you have been holding a bunch of balloons tightly in a fist, and holding them for so long that you forgot you were even holding them. We move your fingers, one after the next, to release what has been held. And, when the palm is opened and outstretched, you may receive the gifts that would come in the place of the old. You don’t realize you hold the balloons. You don’t realize the fear that you have aligned to. You don’t agree that you do this intentionally. But there is an aspect of you, which we are speaking to now, who relies upon the old even when the old is harmful.

Humanity itself is moving through a situation or ordeal where what has been fearful is becoming more pronounced. Imagine you’ve been walking past a hallway, and behind one door there is someone screaming. It’s a quiet scream. You say, “Not my business. Maybe I misheard.” What is happening now is that the scream cannot be ignored. You are required to open the doorway and find the source of the scream, and once you do you may reclaim it. It is you who is screaming, an aspect of you who has been denied, who reaches for fear as a false god for comfort because you cannot believe that there is something higher that you might be held by. And, indeed, that is what happens. You release the attachment to fear. You may be held by the Source that would claim you in its place.

Because you have free will, because you are choosing, because you must escalate in the octave that you have known in order to reach the Upper Room, we are teaching you these things so that you may understand how you may know yourself in these situations. “It will be, the presence will be, in the face of the evidence I see.” “I am re-seeing what has been seen, from the Upper Room.” “I am knowing myself beyond prior agreement to fear.” These are all ways of agreeing to where you will be taken next. And where you will be taken next will be to the manifestation of the Kingdom as may be experienced in form.

As we continue these teachings, we are going to ask for several things: That the dictation continue as regularly as possible so that we may continue in our authority and proceed with our planned teaching without too much interruption. And we ask each of you who attends to these words to begin to say yes to the shifts that you may be required to undertake to meet the teaching as it is gifted to you. As the teachings escalate, in tone, in agreement, you must lift, or at least agree to lift, to the level where you can move into accord with them. And we thank you each for your presence as we continue this text. Period. Period. Period.

Stop now, please.

DAY TWENTY

Why do you ask questions based upon presumption? Why do you assume what should be will be as you wish? Why do you mandate outcome without the idea of the presence of the Divine informing what you see? The Divine as all, the Divine as all, all things, all ways of being, must now be understood as potential that is realized in the claim “It will be so.”

Now, you understand dominion—what should be, based upon outcome, then claimed into form. But what you don’t see is that true dominion is alignment, agreement and alignment to the inherent Divine. When you stop making things so, deciding what they will or should be, you may begin to allow a level of congruence that is inclusive of the act of God, or the presence of the claim “It will be so.” Now, some of you decide that what God wants is what you think it should be and as you think it should be and when you want it. In fact, the Divine Will in plain expression—“Thy will be done,” “It will be so”—is always in perfect timing, because time exists in the universe as a construct that is in fact malleable to the act of God or the presence of the Divine. “It will be so.” It will not be so this moment, or in ten minutes, as I say. It will be so in the eternal expression of the Divine that is in knowing and seeks to express itself in manifestation beyond the tutelage of what the small self would deem appropriate. When you understand that realization, which is knowing, is inclusive of all you see, all things will be met in the higher refrain, “It will be so.” And the claim of the Kingdom, “Behold, I make all things new,” is the announcement of this as manifest. Underline the word as. As means as will be, and its claim upon anything moves to articulation, to the higher, in recognition of the omnipresence of the Divine in expression.

Now, as all things are of God, and have been denied as such, the act of transmutation must be comprehended as the releasing of the husk, or the layer of denial, that would preclude your understanding and its expression of itself. You understand the idea of a vault with precious things inside. You don’t know the combination. Perhaps what’s inside is of less value than what you think, or perhaps much more. Well, the key to the combination, the code that is unlocking it, is as we are teaching you, and the reconciliation of matter in Source, in a higher expression, is what is uncoded. “It will be so. Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, how this is done, first, is in agreement to the innate potential, and you must understand this. Unless you can agree to the innate potential for revelation, for the Divine to receive itself in these claims in realization of what it truly is, you will not work with it well. You will decide what it should be. It is the innate potential for realization that claims everything in form, and it is also the innate potential for realization which actually returns or reconciles all things to the Source of their being. As we have often said, you can make nothing holy, it already is, but you can and have denied the divinity in almost all things, you can understand that the peeling away of the husk, opening the safe, is revealing what has always been present in it, in all ways.

Now, this agreement for reconciliation, to know the self, the I Am Self, in agreement to the I Am in all things, claims plasticity in matter in ways you can’t comprehend yet. You are so busy affirming manifestation as intractable—“That mountain will not be moved”—that you have in fact forgotten that the mountain is earth and stone, and, underneath that, vibration that can be re-assumed in a very different way. Because you wish to counter every possibility of dominion in high tone with the artifacts of history—“It will not be so,” again the denial of God—you have become complicit or in agreement with manifestation as something separate. This is a teaching of inclusivity, not exclusion, not heaven and hell, and even what you understand as the small self is of God, just in a state where it has forgotten its true nature and expression. When you move to inclusion, which is agreement to the All That Is, beyond the superficial exchange, the denial of it, you begin to encounter the Kingdom. When we spoke with you last, we invited you to take a walk to see all things anew, only so that you may understand the plasticity of what is, when seen with new eyes. You have understood the term one must have the eyes to see, which means the capacity to hold the higher vision, and that comes, not through force, but agreement to what already is. Again, the husk and the corn. Without the husk, you may understand that what is there has been always there. With the husk, you cannot see it. It has been denied through circumstance. Because you have experience, you may presume what lays beneath the husk, and actually the same is true at the level of the Divine Self, who is the perceiver. It is the perceiver, the True Self in the throne, that bequeaths the Kingdom, reclaims the Kingdom, adheres to the Kingdom, in all ways.

“What does bequeaths the Kingdom mean?” he asks. Well, in fact, that is what you do through your own realization, not only of another, but of anything. When you are at this level of amplitude, in the Upper Room, in foundation there, everything is called to you at this level of resonance. So your claim of what you see that has been denied God reconciles it to God, and this reconciliation, which you may call a lifting, is how the Kingdom is claimed in the manifest world. “The obvious question,” Paul asks, “is, well, what happens to the matter or the thing or the situation or the person or the problem that is being lifted?” It is actually being assumed in right ways, true alignment, true agreement. The Divine, which sees the Divine in all things, does not have the capacity to deny itself. Do you understand this? The Divine cannot deny the Divine. It is only the small self, in adherence to law, the laws of man, the laws of alignment in lower accord, that can act in denial of the Divine. Now, if you understand the simple premise that God sees God in all, you may now move to the idea that seeing or perceiving in realization, which is knowing, is what reconciles matter. Again, you are not making it holy. You are knowing it as holy. The husk without the corn reveals the corn. You are claiming what has always been.

Now, what has always been is what is lifted to you, without the denial. “Is there new resonance here?” he says. “Does the thing vibrate differently once it is seen this way?” You have done this work, Paul, not only in this lifetime, but in others. And anyone who has done this work—which is, in fact, many of you in prior incarnation—comprehends the idea in a familiar way. When you look at another with love, the person is not only reflected in love, they are re-known in love. If you can imagine being in the arms of someone who loves you, the safety you feel is not just the warmth. It’s the re-knowing of the self as in love. You may be in the arms of someone who could care less, and you would know the difference.

When you perceive another in love, they are changed by that act. When we have invited our students to work in pairs or in groups and claim, “I know who you are in truth, I know what you are in truth, I know how you serve in truth,” and you feel the vibrational field and the physical body move to a new level of comprehension, the structure of the body and the field is always informed by that act. It is the act of acclimation, becoming in agreement to the new attunement, that takes the work, because you are so used to the old, so used to denying your divinity, that you rest there more easily, which is why we are putting emphasis now on the Upper Room as foundational to expression.

To understand the foundation of the Divine as simply who and what you are in a higher expression should claim you in some understanding. It is you who is lifting. But the new you, the one without the fear, the need to damn himself or others, the one who knows or realizes the inherent and implicit Divine that must be so, is the one who becomes operative here—the Divine as Jonathan, the Divine as Sarah, the Divine as all that you see. You are not unmasking Sarah by force. You are not saying, “Sarah, you are not what you think. You have been misguided.” You are seeing them beyond the mask, because the you that sees comprehends behind the mask and is in alignment to it. This new agreement that is being made by us, “It will be so,” is reconciliatory. Underline those words, is reconciliatory. You are reclaiming. You are restoring. And then its announcement in form, “Behold, I make all things new,” is in ways the transgression upon the old, the reclamation or act of the revelation of what was behind the husk, what was hidden in the vault, what was denied God.

Now, understand yourselves, friends. Each of you comes to us with an innate awareness of your ability to do this. Innate means implicit. It came with you into an incarnation. This is not new information. It is very old. It has been hidden in the vault, covered by the husk, which was your own choosing, collectively, to operate in separation. Because the civilization you have built was built in separation, the act of reconciliation for a civilization will at times be abrupt and deeply challenging. Paul is seeing the image of a Band-Aid being ripped from the skin. In fact, that’s what happens, in some cases, so the wound itself may heal and be exposed to light, that the time has come to reveal what has been hidden whose sole purpose is to deny the Divine.

“What does that mean,” he says, “whose sole purpose?” Well, there are several ways to understand this. Again, the act of fear, which is the title of this chapter, is to claim itself in the face of all things. And its primary act is the denial of the Divine, which is the expression of God. Fear is mistaken. It is not evil. It is operating in awareness of its separateness, and seeking to prove itself, claim itself, through all things. When you understand that fear itself is knowing itself as separate from the light, you may claim it as well within the light. You will not do battle with fear, but you will reveal fear by dispelling it, by re-knowing it as of God.

“Now, how is this done?” he asks. To reveal anything to the light is to claim the presence of the Divine upon it. You are not conjuring. You are saying to the child who is frightened of the dark, “There is light where the darkness is.” You are turning on the light, or, in the case of this teaching, becoming the light in an activated state that dispels the darkness. In order for this to occur, the darkness that you hold within you will be brought to the light to be dispelled, because if you operate from the Upper Room you are operating beyond fear, so the one who knows who she is beyond fear can lift anyone or anything beyond it as well. We have said this prior, but you utilize fear as a protector, and it is not a good protector. Do not mistake discernment and prudence for fear. They are confused in your minds, so you are foolhardy in the face of caution, where prudence might serve you far better.

To understand this teaching in fullness is to grant permission for it to be taught through you by your own experience. Understand this, friends. Until this teaching becomes experiential, wherein you know it without words or instruction, it will remain a template for you that you may aspire to through the small self’s decisions of what it should be like or how it should seem, when in fact the act of being, simply being, holds no should, holds no other expectation for what is. To allow the teaching to be taught through you is, again, to make this claim: “It will be so.” It is made manifest, not as you say it should be, but as it will be, in divine timing, or order, or agreement to what is always true.

Our teaching today will conclude this chapter. We are grateful for your presence. It will be so. Period. Period. Period.

PART TWO

The Manifestation of the Kingdom in Realization

5

IT WILL BE SO

DAY TWENTY-ONE

Choice, you see, invested in history—“I will have the lamb because the lamb was good last week”—is always predicated on the expectation that the past has held. You choose things, you see, in ways you don’t understand. You comprehend reality as fact when the reality you see is actually transitional, depending on the day, depending on what you think, and depending upon what the collective is in an encounter with. In times of great change, the known is not present through the fabric that you see. You see the world in change. You see the world in agreement to great transition. You try to reach into this for the solace of what has been known and expect it to be what it was. But it cannot be now, because all is changing.

Now, mankind is choosing this, choosing to acclimate to a higher order of being. This is a choice that has been made through the collective, in the Upper Room or higher level of awareness that each of you is currently attached to, whether or not you agree to it or you know it. There is an aspect of everyone that expresses in the Upper Room, and it is this level of agreement—“We will continue, we will be known anew”—that has been announced and is now seeking expression through humanity on the physical plane.

The abrupt changes you see now are not abrupt in the least. In some ways, when the pimple bursts the skin, the pimple has been present in a festering way, waiting to release in order to heal. And the rage you see, the outpicturings of oppression, the depictions of greed that you see around you, have been present for a very long time and are now making themselves known in fullness so that the healing may occur. When you are at a juncture such as this, you must understand that humanity itself is undergoing change, and not look at it through the small self’s lens, the lens of “I need what I want,” “I should have what I had yesterday,” “I should get what I should have because it is my expectation.” If you release the expectations now, you may be lifted. But any expectation you hold about what the present or future should be, based on past premise, will in fact denounce what is seeking to unfold. What is seeking to unfold is indeed the Kingdom, or the recognition of the inherent Divine.

Now, to Paul this sounds preposterous. “We can’t even get along with our neighbors. How does humanity claim the Kingdom?” In fact, what is happening now, as we have suggested prior, the seed breaking open and moving the earth, is the initial stage of recognition, or reckoning, the facing of the self and all of one’s creations that we have been teaching for a long time. But this initial stage will meet with the resistance that can be met by anyone who chooses to deny it. Imagine sitting in a house that is going up in flames. “There is no smoke. There is no fire.” The denial of what you see around you claims you, engulfed in the changes you see, when perhaps the opportunity was to put out the fire. Perhaps the opportunity now is to recognize that the level of change humanity is undergoing has been provoked by humanity itself in order to comprehend it. You are seeing what you’ve claimed in order to reclaim it.

This first stage of agreement, that what you see before you is in some ways a requirement for what is to come, should soothe you somewhat. You are not being left in the darkness or eternal chaos. The valley is before you. Humanity is in the valley. Some of you are scaling the mountainside to hold the lantern high. And when the light shines fully, all that you will see is what is left standing, what has been claimed anew, what is truly required for humanity to know itself as one race, one species, in accord with the true nature.

“I don’t see it happening,” he says. “I cannot continue.” What you are claiming, Paul, is what we call the denial of the Divine, which is the root of humanity’s problems. The first thing you must understand is that this level of accord—humanity is one species and may know itself as one—is already present in a higher way. You are claiming what is so at the cost of what has been. Your focus, Paul, on the negative is the source of so much pain. And if you understood for a moment that lifting your eyes to the sight of the Divine would reclaim you fully, you would release the suffering you have known. So would humanity, who has decided as one it is time to move forward. “We cannot continue as we have been.”

Now, as this first stage of agreement is made—as the changes are invoked, provoked, if you prefer, by humanity itself to attend to those things that you have been in denial of, complicit to, that need to be re-seen or re-known—the alignment humanity claims in this negotiation is somewhat different than you’ve known. Because you do not trust the past to see you safely through this time, because you cannot imagine a present without the turmoil you see before you, because what you reach for next through this idea of what has been cannot be chosen, you have one option left—to choose in a new way.

Now, a choiceless choice is the thing that occurs, because nothing can be chosen but what is. You understand the idea—the man hanging from the ship deck in the midst of a storm finally lets go of what he has known, and then must trust the sea to capture him, to bring him to safety. You understand the idea that how you have known things, through faith, through agreement to what will be, can be comprehended in a higher way. And in this moment we suggest that the opportunity you have, individually and collectively, is to announce your being in fullness so that the light that you are may begin to gift others in their own awakening. The scaffolding you have used to get to the Upper Room is falling away from you. You are standing on firmament, know it or not. The level of vibration you have come to that is the Upper Room in expression is now present to be acclimated to in fullness. It has been present, but you have been winding up and down the stairs, grasping at things to keep you here. But we will tell you now: “I am in the Upper Room,” the claim of agreement to this, will claim you in solid footing.

“How does this happen?” he asks. “How has it happened?” It is very simple. As this work continues, the collective contributes to the structure of the Upper Room by agreement. It has always been here. We teach you from here. But there are enough of you now who stand surely footed at this level of vibration that the vibration itself has become available to many, many more. It is not that you have created the Upper Room. It has always been present. But this level of alignment, “I am in the Upper Room, I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” has now been chosen to the degree that it may be held, it may be known. And consequently the scaffolding, the underpinnings, the things you think you’ve required to get here, may no longer be needed. What happens instead, if you can imagine this, is that you stand on this new firmament, calling down to others. “Come with me. The air is fine. There is no fear. You may know yourself anew.” This is not done by preaching. It is not done by dogma. It is done by your simple presence, your unequivocally simple presence, the Divine as you in its simple expression announcing itself, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” seeing what is before him or her and realizing it with the eyes that can only know God.

“But I don’t feel like I’m here,” he says. In fact, you are. The aspect of you that has been undergoing this transition is now realized. You don’t see this yet. It is the small self in its mask, still trying to keep the party going on the lower structure. But the aspect of self that moves through re-articulation has mandated the change. So while your experience, Paul, may be not one of realization, the realization occurs, first in the etheric, and then, as you align fully, it mandates its expression as and through you.

Now, this is simple. We say it has been done and will continue to be done. Humanity itself is saying yes. And the ignition of the Divine, the new awareness that is seeking to be born, will come to a head in the coming days. Now, when we say “coming days,” we are not speaking Tuesday to Thursday. We are speaking of a span of time—you understand linear time, so we use it—that this comprehension may indeed occur. The trajectory of humanity as outlined by humanity’s actions thus far is not high. And, in fact, humanity itself is taking a U-turn, veering away from a possible outcome, because humanity understands that, without change, you may not be present as you have been. So the escalation of vibration on this plane is increasing at such a rapid rate that the changes come quickly, and the vibratory field of every living being is actually re-known through this encounter. In other words, the vibrational field you have is having to acclimate so rapidly to withstand these changes that the awareness that you seek, which you may call realization, becomes present for you, not through opportunistic action, but through final surrender to the act of being that is being claimed for you, not so much through circumstance, but by what is moving you through each circumstance to a higher level of realization.

Now, as we teach, as we instruct, we understand the requirements of our students. We always have. We will continue to. The calamities that you see outpictured on the manifest plane are in some ways eruptions or releases of the fear that has been present, as this organism that you all are, and are manifested upon, releases what has accrued. You are experiencing the release of fear that humanity has held, accrued evidence for, built armies upon the need of, and denied God because of. As this release continues, you are in an encounter with it. Paul saw the image the other day of a friend of his, walking along scorched earth, with gaseous substance leaking from the cracks in the earth. What he was seeing was a metaphor for this articulation, which is indeed releasing. But your encounter with what you see is what is frightening to you, when the occurrence itself, the release of the old, is in support of what is to come.

“What is to come,” he says, “so this is not conjecture for me? What is to come so I may trust this passage?” What is before you, Paul, what is before anyone, is uncertainty now. And if uncertainty can be a gift, because it will allow you to step into the new, you may begin to have the experience of the present moment, which is what this uncertainty can provide. “Do I have to have faith in this, that I will be carried through these times?” Indeed, you do. But the simple faith is that “What I will know, what I will see or experience, is beyond what I have been capable of understanding.” And to seek to understand it before it is experienced would only confuse the issue more. So the guarantee now is the unknown. But the Kingdom itself, when it is aligned to, will be its own experience for you. You imagine yourself to be where you have been, in the clothes you’ve been wearing, in the home that you have known. You imagine yourself as a citizen of a country, as of having a president or a way of knowing what it means to be governed. In fact, what is about to happen is a release of structure that has in some ways claimed you in organized ways. And the safety of the known that has been claimed by you is what is about to be left in order for the new to be made manifest and experienced by you all.

This is not tragic. It is change. And change, we suggest, is what is required now, as this transitional reality that you are in an encounter with is allowed to move and be released to what you know of as the past. What exists beyond the valley, what exists beyond the darkness, is another template for vibration. It is a higher template. It is an agreement to humanity as citizens of one light. Religion doesn’t matter here. You may pray as you wish. The economic structures you’ve known, while useful when they have been, may be re-known in a higher way. But what you have claimed through fear thus far must be addressed, prior to the new provoking itself, announcing itself [fully as and in¹] all of you. Now, we say all intentionally. No one is excluded from the Kingdom except the one who seeks to deny it. And as many of you now align to the Upper Room and the claim of the Kingdom, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the essence of your frequency, or your vibrational field in expression, claims the Kingdom into manifestation. “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, when the new is known on this plane, when you are in an encounter with it, when you understand it or comprehend it—by experience and not through forethought—it will not be what you want or think, and this is a gift as well. What you want or think is still in prescription by prior mandate. “I will have the fish. The fish was good last week.” Instead, what you will see is that what it means to be, what it means to know, what it means to gift your presence to another and be in receipt of the gift they are, is the presence of God. It is the presence of God, the knowing of the presence of God, that is the Kingdom. And that is the gift of this second part of this text we are teaching now, the Kingdom. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

DAY TWENTY-TWO

When we teach you about your authority, the true purview of the Divine Self, you anticipate we will tell you that you will now get what you want, what you think you should have, that your needs will be met as you say they should be. In fact, what happens is something rather different. Re-articulation, the Divine Self as who and what you are, in fact aligns the will in agreement to your Source to express through all things.

Now, once aligned, your idea of necessity is also transposed to a higher octave, which simply means what the small self would demand is not what the small self will get from the Upper Room because it is not the small self who is in articulation here. You understand the idea, “as ye measure, so shall ye mete.” What you get, what you are in agreement to, you are in consort with through your vibrational field. You understand that each of you who comes in acceleration of the vibratory field releases the old as she moves beyond it. But you don’t yet see that the equivalency that is present from the Upper Room guarantees you that you will be met in the high octave as is required by you at this level of vibration. In other words, friends, what you have sought to find is now found. What you have sought to receive is now claimed. It is not that you are wanting for nothing. It is that you are not wanting. You are receiving instead. The one who is in complete recipiency of the Divine is always in reception, and the guarantee is made that you will be in reception to whatever requirements you may have. Now, this must include all things.

He interrupts the teaching. “Does this make us passive, receptive? Don’t we have to go to work? Don’t we have to make decisions that have outcomes?” Yes, you do. But your experience is very different. Now the idea of faith as something conjured, “I believe that God will meet my needs,” is suddenly exchanged for this new idea: “I am being met. It will be so. It is come.” Each of you says yes at this level of alignment or agreement to Source, and what happens here is that the gifts of the Kingdom are made available for you as you can receive them. Underline the word as. The as is implicit to the teaching that the one who receives is open to receive, and you will not receive as long as you are mandating outcome. “It will be as I say,” the decree of the small self, is actually transformed to “It will be so” in the Upper Room. The guarantee is not what you are asking for, but that “It will be so.” In other words, your needs are met through congruence, receptivity, and alignment. Do you go to work? Yes. But you are no longer fearful of outcome or that the needs that you have, that you would presuppose you have, will not be met by you from this higher state of articulation.

Now, we are teaching being. You are not used to teachings of being. You are used to teachings of getting and striving and conjuring. “Let me cast the spell.” “Let me say the prayer.” “Let me outline my desires so my desires will be met as I have outlined them.” This is low octave, ultimately—ways of understanding self through appropriation of things. True prayer is always the awareness of the Divine that must be so. Underline must be so. Not “grant me my wishes.” It must be so. And the claim we have offered you prior, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” is the activation to this level of agreement to the manifest as may be received by the one who has come, who knows who she is, and has claimed the Kingdom.

The idea of receptivity must now be understood differently. You are not praying to get what you want. You are receiving what is yours. In the Kingdom, the act of reception is the act of congruence, less so supplication, putting aside the small self’s will, but the will in a transposed state so that you are in a unified expression, which quite simply means you have aligned to knowing, and in your knowing you may act upon it. When you are acting in your knowing, you are acting in true faith. True faith is knowing. And the receptivity at this level, or the congruence to the Divine, is alignment to Source.

Now, as God is all things, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” God is the source of supply, God is the source of peace. And your relevance within the whole has been oppositional through the small self’s mandates. “If God doesn’t give me what I want, I do not want God.” And the old man on the cloud that you have conjured as deceiving you turns away. In fact, God is as all things, and to be the recipient of this is to claim the Kingdom in the knowing or realization that one’s needs will be met in perfect ways. Underline the idea perfect ways. What this means is beyond what the small self would decree as perfect outcome, perfect occurrence, perfect thing that the small self would say, “That must be God’s will because it’s what I dearly wanted.” When the Divine is operative in every aspect of one’s life, one’s life moves into agreement, alignment, in totality. And the claim of totality, which is union, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” will support realization of the manifest world in alignment to itself in the high room, Upper Room, that the Kingdom expresses in and through.

Each of you says yes—“Yes, I may; Yes, I may choose; Yes, I may sing; Yes, I may be”—at the level of alignment that you have come to. And as you say yes to the receptivity here, the agreement to be made manifest at this level, in body, in form, in vibration and expression, is the guarantee of the one who has come. The claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the resurrected self that expresses itself in manifestation, is the alignment to the high Kingdom where all things may be made new.

As we teach through Paul, we modulate his system. He is concerned when he does not repeat the words that we speak to him. As this teaching continues, as the schism he has experienced between self and God is released, the manifestation of this teaching will take different forms. Many of you will discover, as you adhere to these teachings, that what was once effortful becomes quite easy. That boulder that you saw, that you believed would always be there, has in fact disappeared. You will begin to understand that the translated experience from small self to the embodiment of the True Self is the equivalency of moving to another continent, where the laws are quite different, where the language is different, where things may now be chosen that could not have been imagined to you prior.

Now, each of you says, “Oh, yes, I am willing. I want to align to the Kingdom.” And you want to align to the Kingdom because you think it’s better. It’s not so much that it’s better. It’s a different level of vibration that claims you in accordance with Source so that you may be the beneficiary of it. But the mandate of the new, which has been discussed prior, is the release of what you think should be, inclusive of the claims that the small self would mandate—“where I should live, who I should marry, what I want to affirm my need, my desire, my idea of who I have been.” The release of the old, the cracking of the shell that allows the plant to progress through the dirt to reach to the sun, is the agreement to release the idea of what has been withheld from you through your knowing of the self in separation.

The equivalency here is that you know yourself as in worth to be the recipient of the Kingdom, and consequently you align with it, to it, and to its requirements for response to what is necessary for you. Some of you say, “Yes, I am willing to go on this journey, but let me keep that keepsake, that bank account, that relationship that does not work, that thing that I cherish that I cannot imagine being without.” The release of the idea of self correlates with the release of the things that the self has mandated to prove its experience—its existence, even. In other words, when the shell cracks open to reveal what has been withheld, what the shell has been tied to is released as well. That is how the growth occurs.

Now, some of you say, “As much as I would like this, I have mouths to feed, I have a job that requires discernment. I am required to judge people. It is part of my authority. I wish to go where you say, but I will not stop damning those people who do those terrible things.” You may have those things. You may choose those things. You may learn at that level of vibrational accord. But you will not be in the Kingdom. The idea of the release of the old does not mean you don’t choose to feed your family. It does not mean you don’t agree that there are challenging events in the world. It invites you to re-see each thing that would be chosen, because you are in accord to all you see in the Upper Room, so it may be blessed. Again, to bless is to realize or to know the presence of God upon that which you see. If you wish to engage in the battles held in lower vibration, you are cursing even if you say otherwise. This does not mean you don’t speak truth, but the truth that you speak knows itself in agreement to the Divine, and your small self’s opinion, however interesting it is, is not the truth of the Divine Self.

“How do we know the difference?” he asks. Quite simply put, the Divine Self will not damn another, seek to make another wrong, would not deny the light in anyone, because it cannot. Underline cannot. The light cannot bring darkness. It is antithetical to its very expression and existence. The existence of the light illumines all things. Its expression mandates itself be seen, that the light itself be seen. And it is this lifting, this transposition of tone from darkness to light, that we are instructing you in. “Are we judging the darkness?” he asks us. “Are we making it wrong?” It is not wrong. It is just deceived. That which is held in darkness, believes itself in darkness, that has been procured in darkness, may well have forgotten the light, believed its expression as separate. And the name “I know who you are in truth, I know what you are in truth, I know how you serve in truth” reclaims who is seen prior in darkness to their true heritage. As you become the light, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” and align to it as your expression, “Behold, I make all things new,” the beacon that you are assumes all it encounters in the higher octave or field. So you are not readying things for change. You are the doorway that the change occurs through.

“What does that mean?” he says. When we operate through Paul, Paul is the bridge—if you prefer, the medium—of this expression. He is serving in this way. As each of you align to the Divine as who and what you are, you become the bridge, the doorway, the medium to the Upper Room that that which you hold in sight may pass through. “What does that mean,” he says, “hold in sight?” It means all that you perceive, all that you may see, all that you may claim, in fact, as being in expression. The beacon that you are, the light that you are, that will shine on all you see, does not have the discernment of who is worthy and who is not, any more than the sun does. The sun shines upon all. You light all, and become the path or gateway or doorway through the transition that you are undergoing to support others in acclimating in the same way. “How does this happen?” he asks. By being. By being the expression of the Monad that has come as you in new articulation and the vibration which you hold that manifests as expressed in any encounter that you may know yourself through. In other words, friends, you are not trying to be the beacon. You are not trying to illumine anyone. You are not thinking of the self as gateway. You have become this thing, in some ways the translator of vibration, which lifts anything you encounter to the high room.

“What is the effect of this,” he asks, “upon those we see?” To re-know someone in their worth, to claim another in their divinity, to realize them, which is indeed to know them in truth, supports their vibrational field at this level of acclimation through vibrational accord. You are not dragging anybody upstairs. You are perceiving them from the high floor and lifting them to you, because the who that you are witnessing is in a lifted state. Now, understand what this means. The aspect of the being that is ascending before you is already ascended. In other words, you can’t make anything holy. It has just been denied its own heritage. Because you do not deny that heritage, the lifting occurs to what has always been true. Underline the word always. The claim you make for another, “I see you in the Upper Room,” is always true. But the impact of the claim upon another reclaims aspects of them that have been in denial of this and supports their re-articulation.

He interrupts the teaching. “Do we need permission to do this?” No, in fact, you don’t, because you are not overriding will. You are claiming what is always true. If you look at your daughter that you wish to be a ballerina and say, “You are a ballerina,” you are imposing will. But your daughter is already divine, and an aspect of her is already in residence in the Upper Room, so your claim to her, “I see you in your beauty, I see you in your right to be, in all you have known and may know, I see you in the Upper Room,” is a claim of truth, and that truth will align her vibrational field and call it to flower. It is never an act that is decided for you. It is an agreement to what is. Do you understand the difference? You can make nothing holy, but you can deny the Divine in anyone. And often you do, and pat yourselves on the back for doing so.

We will say this now to Paul. Our preference would be that you continue to dictate this text as you have been. We will teach you more, as we are allowed, but we are answering your questions about this text and how this process of response and audience should continue, or can continue by your choice. We will say this now for those of you present. The text that we are dictating, The Kingdom, as we call it, will be the triumphant text of the series. It does not mean it is the last one. But it is the text of triumph. It is the text of agreement, manifestation, embodiment, and, yes, love.

We thank you each for your presence. We will stop for the day. Period. Period. Period. Stop now, please.

DAY TWENTY-THREE

When you decide who you are from the Upper Room, when the claim has been made in fullness, you align to all things that would confirm this identity. Now, confirmation of identity is not what you would expect. It’s simply vibratory accord in agreement to what is always true. The escalation of vibration that you each undergo coincides with new levels of awareness, or perceiving what has always been true. And, in some ways, from the higher vantage point you have great permission to reclaim all things as they may be seen in the highest way.

Now, to be seen in the highest way means without judgment, without the information that the thing has come with, been endowed with over time, but with new eyes who hold truth and claim truth as their benediction. The claim “Behold, I make all things new,” the announcement of the presence of the Divine in and all things, the reclamation of matter, is simply seeing what has been hidden, what has been denied. But the process of receiving the information of what has always been true is confused to you still, because you are still enmeshed in the titles things hold and the mandates they have had to be what the collective requires them to be. When you understand that receiving the Divine is actually receiving truth, and nothing more than that, it actually becomes somewhat simple. If you can imagine dismantling something so that it no longer resembles what it was, you may finally see what it has always been. There is a tree, there is a trunk, there are branches and leaves and bark, but all of these things that make up tree are in vibration of Source and can also be re-known beyond the codification or identity that you have come to know tree as. When you dismantle and examine each thing, all you are really doing is looking at what composes the idea of tree. The idea of tree in totality can be re-seen or re-known without being dismantled, if you invite the tree, in perception, to show you what it truly is.

Now, to become innocent in your sight, to perceive things with new eyes, is not to eliminate old data as much as it is perceiving from a new perspective. You have the idea of a text, words on a page, that you relate to while you hold the book in your hands. You understand the words, you understand the chapter and the title that you are engaging with, but your relationship to the text exists without the text. In other words, you don’t have to hold the book, see the words on the page, to have a relationship with it. It is not so much memory that you are understanding yourself through. “I know this book that I once read.” It is the relationship to the idea of the book that you are engaging with. The idea of the Divine as a principle, as an action that is always unfolding, will be a key for you—the principle, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” and the action of it, “It will be so,” the requirement of the Divine to know itself in matter in manifestation.

Now, Paul sees this as impossible. “I see a tree. I know a tree. I may not know the kind of tree it is, the title that the tree has held, be it oak or elm, birch or spruce, but I know what a tree is. How do I un-know a tree?” You don’t un-know a tree. You re-see the tree, re-know the tree, which means realize the tree through the claim “It will be so” and the manifestation of the claim in ways that you may comprehend.

Now, the comprehension of the claim must be taught now. To perceive something is less an act of seeing actively than becoming receptive to identity of tree, or energy of tree, or the principle that is the tree, without the tree having a name or an idea attached to it. “This is a dying tree” or “a flowering tree.” If something simply is, and is of God, your perception of what is can be claimed by it. Did you understand this? Your perception of the claim is claimed by the thing in relation to you. Just as you no longer hold the book in the hand, the memory of the book or the idea of the book or the energy that creates the book is still present for you. When you understand that you are allowing the manifest world, in a re-articulated state, to begin to claim you, you will have the secret to this text.

Now, by secret we mean, not that which is withheld, but that which must be discovered through the application of it. You are so busy deciding what things mean, and naming things, that you forget to invite what you see to show you what it truly is. The creation of the Kingdom is less so one walking down a path saying, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” and announcing it, but the reception of the claim that is encountered by you through the alignment to it. You can claim “God Is.” It will always be true. But unless you begin to interpret experientially the manifestation of the claim, you will be denying it, implicitly, because it has stayed at the level of invocation without reception.

Now, the idea that “God is the flower,” “God is the night sky,” is easy for most of you, even at a level of conjecture. “I understand. Again, principle. God must be the night sky and the pretty flower.” But what of the rest of the things that you see that you have denied God in? You imagine a bifurcated world where the beautiful things that may be known as God exist, and those things that you don’t want to see are excluded from the equation. But we must invite you now to become inclusive here, because the true growth comes when you can see something that perhaps has been thought of as ungodly, or named as wrong-minded, and claim the presence there. The challenge for most of you is you think you are agreeing to the thing, or confirming or approving of the thing, in the state of denial of the Divine—“the terrible thing,” “the horrible act”—and you cannot do that. But what you will do is begin to claim this through the presence of the Divine that must always be there. “God Is. God Is. God Is.” You are not reflecting back the pain. You are not even excluding the [pain that you see²]. You are claiming the essence of the thing or the act as certainty, and not excluded from the Divine.

“I have a question,” he says. “You have said, in the past, murder is not holy but the murderer must be.” You are not excluding the act from the presence of God. You are reclaiming God where the denial of God has caused action. The act of murder is an act of one who denies. Any pain inflicted intentionally is an act of the denial of God. You are not approving of the act. You are claiming “God Is, God Is, God Is” in agreement that nothing can be excluded from the Divine.

Now, the ramifications of this act, “I lift this thing to the Upper Room,” is implausible to most of you still, but you must work with this in good intention. We are not asking you to claim something that you find horrendous as beautiful. We are simply imagining that the light that you are, which is indeed of God, can reach and reclaim whatever has been shrouded in darkness or denied the light. Each of you says yes to being the light in the identity of the True Self, but you want it your way. You cannot imagine that part of the job of being, which simply means the expression of being, is the inclusion of what you would think of as outside of God.

Now, imagine that the lantern that you are has a field that can be claimed. Imagine for a moment that the claim of the light that you are extends a hundred feet around you. Everything that is seen for a hundred feet around you is touched or illumined and then altered by your expression, because the vibration you hold has its own mandate, to perceive the Divine or to claim the Divine, simply the light in what is or has been seen in darkness. You understand this. The lantern that you are shines upon what it encounters. It does not judge what it sees or what it encounters. Its job is to illumine.

Now, imagine this. The light that you are is not confined—by degree, by length, by proximity. The light that you are, when you move into agreement with the true claim “God Is, God Is, God Is,” is found everywhere, seen in all things. So the light that you are, in broadcast as an expression of the full light, is mandating itself to be re-known in the darkest crevice, the most heinous place that you can imagine. Why do you do this, you ask? Because this is the act of resurrection and reclamation. This plane will not be healed from damning what you see. If you see what you see and you decide to exclude it from God, you have excluded yourself from God because that has been your choice. Now, God is still present, because it always is. But the distinct difference is you have decided what the light cannot shine upon, and in doing that you are the small self who believes itself to be the arbiter of good and evil, or yes or no. God is yes, the true yes to everything seen. Now, yes does not mean approval. “It is a good thing that terrible thing happened.” That would be foolish. This yes is far greater than that. It is agreement to God itself as being. And understand this. When you are acting at this level of vibration, you are beginning to transmute the lower to the high in realization of the omnipresence of the Divine where it has been denied or excluded.

The claim “God Is, God Is, God Is,” reclamation of all things, creates for you a conversation with the Divine that is expressed as all. And, as in any conversation, there is listening. The invocation of the claim “God Is, God Is, God Is” allows you to reflect and move into the reception of the claim, which simply means the echo of the Divine that has been sung by you into agreement must sing back. “What is the response?” he says. “What does the Divine sing back as?” I Am. I Am. I Am. Now, the I Am, the aspect of the Divine as you in singular state, is also the great light that you have always been of and been excluded from through your acts of denial. You have chosen this. Now that you are choosing differently, you have shifted your field to this level of agreement, the conversation ensues, which is you in agreement to the Divine as all.

He interrupts the teaching. “Is this the same as the echo that we were able to feel when you introduced us to the idea ‘I know what you are in truth’? We could feel the refrain as a field of energy returning to us through whatever, from whatever, was claimed in this way.” In some ways, it’s comparable. You are used to saying to the tree, “I know what you are in truth,” or to your neighbor, “I know who you are in truth, I know what you are in truth,” and feeling the reflection or the echo of the claim made in your energetic field. Now, imagine everything is changed. You don’t work with the singular anymore, the one human being, the one tree, the one idea of what you think you see. You move into inclusivity. The claim “God Is, God Is, God Is” is infusing all things with this claim, and the agreement to the claim sings back to you. The vibration of I Am is a cascading light, or a tone heard. The field shifts to say yes as you receive what is yours. “What is ours?” he asks. What is yours is the Kingdom. This is how the Kingdom is known.

Now, you understand the idea, in some ways, of operating in union or beyond the idea of separation. What is actually happening now, in this instruction, is a way of understanding the experience of union as being in constant conversation or awareness with the Source of all things. Because everything is energy, and is singing back to you once it has been announced as of Source, the experience of union at this level is simply a partial understanding of what you come to when you embody fully. The realization of the Monad as who and what you are in truth has claimed you thus far, and the agreement to all things as of God is the stage we are bringing you to—experientially. Now, we are using this term implicitly so that you may understand the indwelling of the Divine that is being claimed for you by each encounter. Understand, friends. You walk a plane, you walk in agreement to a strata of vibration, you comprehend what you see by level of the accord that you have aligned or come to. You are so busy doing, you don’t understand that the wave that you encounter through vibration is the Kingdom itself claiming its being.

Now, Paul sees an image. Somebody walks down a garden path. The roses bloom before her. “What a lovely world.” That is not what happens. What happens is somewhat different. The agreement to the inherent Divine through the invocation “It will be so, God Is, God Is, God Is” reclaims you in your inheritance, encounters you through the vibrational field, and sings to you its full presence. I Am. I Am. I Am.

The teachers of this text—we, each of us, who know who we are—will support all of you who request this experience in these words:

“I am one with the Source of all things. I am receptive to who I truly am. And, as I agree to this, I align to my experience of it through all my senses, in developed or undeveloped states, so that I may begin to know in my own way the True Self in union with all things.”

We will stop this dictation for today. We will say we will convene tomorrow and continue. Thank you each for your presence. Stop now, please.

DAY TWENTY-FOUR

You authorize things without realizing it. “There will be war.” “There will be love.” These are claims of what can be made so. And the requirement for the class today is your understanding your own authority over that which you create.

Now, creation in this case is not conjuring. It’s aligning to. It’s what you see that is already made manifest that will become for you through your agreement to it. “There will be war”—a claim of manifestation. You are not conjuring the war. You are agreeing to the war that is made manifest by nature of your agreement. The small self, you see, in many ways is claiming authority through collective reason. The collective says, “There will be war.” You claim war, you are agreed to it, it is made so.

The claim we are now offering you—“It will be so, it will be,” the claim of the Divine in authority—re-creates what it encounters in the higher octave from which the claim is made. When something is re-known or re-created, its alignment shifts, and the vibratory tone or echo that it holds is actually translated, in some ways made manifest as that which can be re-known from the viewpoint or alignment that the Upper Room brings. A claim made so—“It will be so”—is a claim of agreement. And any claim you make in agreement—“It will be hard,” “It will be frightening,” “It will not be what I want”—is in agreement to what you claim that you then align to. When some of you say to us, “I pray for this thing, but it is not happening,” what you are in fact saying is that what you have decided should be will not be or cannot be in agreement to you. When something is not in agreement to you, there may be several reasons for it. It may not be for your highest good. “I want a this or a that.” You don’t give the fast car to the ten-year-old child whose feet will not reach the pedals. You may be saying, “I want this thing or that, we require this thing or that,” but you don’t hold the agreement to it, which means the alignment you hold cannot align to the manifest that would seek to be born through agreement.

Now, when we lift you to the Upper Room, to this classroom wherein these teachings come, you are saying to yourself, “I am at a level of alignment where what is made manifest will not be diluted or prohibited by the small self’s desires. I am agreeing to what is true, to what is always true. And the claim I make today, ‘It will be so,’ the manifest Divine as and is before me in what I see,” the translation of vibration will call you back in agreement to it. Again, this is co-resonance. When we taught you yesterday about moving to conversation with the Divine that is omnipresent, it simply means that you are in alignment at a level where what you see is resounding. And we use that word intentionally.

You understand in some ways that everything is in tone and vibration. But you have never heard a field of orchids sing. You have never heard a tree talk back. You will not hear these things unless you understand that the language of God is always tone, and tone can be experienced in the vibrational field. When you listen to someone with your heart, you are moving beyond the words they are speaking, the attitude they may hold. You know what they are truly saying. You are realizing it. In some ways, the same is true through your authority in the Upper Room to begin to become in reception to the manifestation in tone that is expressing all around you. When you are at this level of vibration, you are in agreement to omnipresence. There is no selectivity. “This is good or this is evil.” There is simply being, because everyone and everything you see, of God, is in the resounding yes—“Yes, I Am”—that is their true nature.

Now, you understand this only as idea. But you don’t understand that the aspect of you from the Upper Room that is operating at this level cannot decide, would not decide, who is worthy and who is not. You understand the idea that God loves all. It’s impractical to you because your idea of love is conditioned with mandates. “That man doesn’t smell good. I will stay far away.” To understand realization is to experience it. And, if you wish, take an hour today, an hour of your time, and sit and say, “I see all things with the eyes of the Christ. I see each one born with these eyes, and I realize them through the True Self that is present in me, as me, and is present in and as them as well.”

The conditioning you have held—who is worthy, who is not—has aligned you to self-deceit and a belief that there is a God that favors one above the next. When you move to alignment at this level, you are inclusive. The light that you are, in full broadcast, claims all it encounters, and all it encounters at this level already knows what it is. Do you understand this? There is an aspect of any being that knows, that claims, that can only claim its innate nature, its innate energy, that which is of all. And when you begin to operate here as the perceiver of this in tone, the tone and perception of that which you encounter goes into agreement, speaks back, sees back. You are always in witness of God, but you don’t understand this—you are also witnessed. This is the conversation, and this is how union is first known. And first known means that as you begin to sit in this high awareness, in receptivity to the God that is the air, that is in those people, that is in the soil beneath your feet, as you are present here you are not only the receptor, but the conductor for the frequency to support all things in further realization. And by further realization we simply mean that once you understand this level experientially, there are more doorways to walk through and higher rooms still to begin to understand.

He interrupts the teaching. “In past texts you have said that the Upper Room is the highest level of vibration we might attain while maintaining form.” And while this is accurate, yes, your experience of the Upper Room is the experience of a new octave. When you enter the Upper Room and you feel the flush of vibration as you are lifted there, you are experiencing the beginning, the first note that can be played there. But once the music begins in earnest, your experience of each song, each new teaching, through your own receptivity, will claim you in ways you can’t understand yet. We will teach you these things as we are allowed. But we wish to convene our class here in a foundation and begin to have you move to your own authority as the one who claims the Kingdom. It is your authority at the level of the True Self to say, “It will be, it will be so.” It is made so by this agreement. You are not conjuring God. You are simply releasing the denial of God that has precluded your experience of it.

Now, some of you say, “Well, I would like a relationship with God. I want to have it in my pocket for the tough times ahead. I want to trust a little bit that things will be okay or the way I say.” Well, this is not that teaching. That is the totem you stick in your pocket, the holy medal, the set of beads, that you may pray with. Those are useful things, but they are tools to address a need for agreement, and by playing with these things you are in agreement to what they align to. But you now, each of you now, is become the tuning fork, the agreement. In fact, what you are inviting is re-articulation.

“How do you live your life in this way? It sounds overwhelming,” he says. “I am going to the store and the sky is singing to me. Perhaps the milk on the shelf, the eggs in the carton are having a conversation. This seems to me the making of madness.” In fact, that is not what you experience. You experience the self at a level of peace that the resounding yes to God holds in its agreement to be. The resounding yes of the presence of God is not cacophonous. It is not silent. It is the ever-present knowing—the hum, if you wish—of the absolute.

Now, what you experience will not be sound. It will be presence. It will be knowing. And, yes, it may include a shift in the vibrational field that is pronounced for you. If you were to walk out of your door today, become silent for a moment, lift to the Upper Room, and turn in each direction and make the claim “God Is, God Is, God Is, God Is” and feel the resounding yes that the universe will bring you, you will have the first idea of the palpable nature of ascension. Your experience of what is, is what is being translated. And you are the thing, the alignment, the agreement, that makes this translation possible.

Some of you say to us, “Well, I would like this journey, but I don’t want to be alone. This seems like a lonely idea, me and the Divine. No one will know what I am talking about.” In fact, everyone will know what you are, not through ideas, but through vibration. “What does that mean?” he asks. Your idea of solitary is being singular, and the idea of singularity is now being replaced with plurality, the idea of plurality being you are one of many. You know your neighbor, and your neighbor knows you as well. You are not occupying the level of personality in these exchanges. You are not prohibiting personality, but you are experiencing a world through new eyes. And the transmission of your vibrational field creates for you the opportunity to experience all in union by nature of being. Underline that word, being. This is a teaching of being, not a teaching of adapting or asking, but simply being. “It will be.” Underline the be. It is the being of experience, the being of agreement, the alignment to and experience of the omnipotent Monad, the Divine as all, that is and must be present in everything you experience. When you say yes—“Yes, I may choose,” “Yes, I may be”—you are agreeing to the great yes of your potential in a higher accord. In the Upper Room, this will be so. It will be so, and it is.

We thank you for your presence. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

DAY TWENTY-FIVE

Any encounter with fear can become an opportunity to say, “Thank you, no. This is not a requirement for me. This is not a dance I wish to partake in.” Any encounter with love becomes the opportunity to re-know the other, re-know the thing, re-know any possibility in a higher way. When you are in a dance with love, you are in an encounter with God.

Now, when we use the word God, we still understand that for many of you the idea of God is confusing. “What is this God? How do I relate to this idea? How do I go into consort in this dance with love with a God that I can’t see or know, in ways that I understand?” To dance with God, to dance in love, is to move into equation. We use this word intentionally—in equation. When you have a mathematical problem, there is a solution in math. In energy and in vibration, the same holds true. And the equation here is that the Divine as who and what is what moves into consort, and knows and realizes the God as all.

Now, how this happens for you, in simple ways, is through the escalation of the field. But in profound ways it happens in an encounter where the idea of God as all things becomes the primary issue, the true issue, that you are in an encounter with. Each of you says yes to the idea of God in the abstract. “I pray to this thing, to this idea, to this agreement. I align to this thing, this divine being, as I can comprehend it. I will pray to this idea that I know of as God, but it seems distant still, or so far away that my words may not reach it.”

The encounter we are offering you now, the way to know and be known in this description of divine allegiance, alignment, and consort, is the opportunity to become who you are, with the agreement in fact in place, so that you are no longer fearing its absence. This must be understood. You are no longer fearing the absence of the Divine because the Divine is present and always known as who and what you are with. Now, to first understand this idea is to release the idea of God that must be far away, must be somewhere else. The claim of the presence of the Divine, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” is what will call you here. But to move into this in an active and participatory way is to become receptive to the dance that is already present.

He interrupts the teaching. “But I still don’t understand my partner. I don’t understand this God that you say I am in conversation and dancing with.” We will attempt to teach you now, Paul, but you must have the ears to hear this. There is one sound, one note, being played all the time, at varying degrees or decibels, levels of oscillation, that is all that you see. The consciousness that pervades all things, that is implicit in all matter, that is God itself in articulation, is what we call the Divine, or the omnipresent. The Christed Self that operates within you and within all beings is present always, but, again, shrouded or hidden. It is this aspect of self that knows God, sees God, and dances with God.

You are still perceiving it is the small self that is operating in this encounter. “But I still feel like a small self. I still get confused or frightened. I am still a human being. I am not a super-being. I am doing my best.” We agree with everything you just said. You are a being, you do your best, and you hide from your true nature and align instead to those aspects of self that would damn your brother, or fear them, which is in some ways the very same thing.

The agreement we are making now to every aspect of you, including those aspects of self that you are confused by, that you are in reaction to, that you claim that you wish were not so, we say all these aspects of self are re-known, accepted, and in fact loved and re-known as of God through this process we teach. Your own denial of self, finally, we have to say, claims itself in unworthiness, and when you claim yourself in unworthiness you deny the Divine because you cannot hold it because you are the one saying no. The dance ensues, regardless of what you think, because God always is. Because you are always in choice and claiming reactive patterns through old behavior, encounters with fear or anger, your dance partner becomes the denial of God, and then that becomes your experience here. The process of escalation includes the release of those things that obscure the Divine, withheld from you by your own fear. The denial of the Divine is fear itself, and that is the release that we will claim for all of you today.

Here are the words we will speak. We invite you to say them, if this feels truthful to you, and if you are willing to move into this new encounter:

“On this day I choose to re-know myself, all aspects of self, as worthy of God. And as I agree to this, I say yes to the release of the denial of the Divine that I have held, consciously or unconsciously, that contributes to my belief in separation. As I say yes, I allow these aspects of self to move into a new encounter with the potentiality that all things may be made new, inclusive of those aspects of self that I have denied the light in, or anything or anyone that I would deny the Divine in. As I say yes, I am re-known. As I say yes, I am reclaimed. And as I say yes, I align every aspect of my being, in completeness, to the truth of all that is, the Source of all things, in love, which I know of as God. I say this of my own free will. I am willing to know. I am willing to see. I am willing to become who I am in truth.”

We say these words now for Paul. What you are confused about these days is who in fact you are becoming without the old patterning that you have utilized to negotiate your life and those you know. When the old pattern is released, the music has changed that you have been dancing to. The old is replaced by the new. But you have to get used to the quickening of the vibration, you have to get used to the idea that things need not be what they were, and you have to give permission for that which you have outgrown to be released by you in perfect ways. This need not be struggle. This need not be hard. But it requires the willingness to release those things that you have held so tightly it stops you from receiving more.

We will honor you each in this passage. Each of you will undergo a passage through this re-identification of who and what you are, the release of the denial of the Divine, that will require change. And you may find yourself clinging to the old, damning what is new, because you don’t have the answers to what comes yet. You don’t have the evidence yet to align you to the level of trust that you indeed will come to when your firmament and foundation is the Upper Room. We will say this for all of you in passage. Not only is there a light at the end of the tunnel, you are the light. And as you claim the light, the tunnel itself has become the gateway to the Kingdom.

We thank you each for your presence. Indeed, we will stop today’s teaching. Period. Period. Period.

DAY TWENTY-SIX

The idea of who you are as the one who may claim the Kingdom, as the one who may be the one who inherits the gifts of the Kingdom, must now be understood by you. Each of you says yes at the level of authority that you may claim. And by authority we mean agreement to your True Self. You are not mandating in fear. You are not deciding who you should be. It’s really very simple. The one who knows who she is claims in authority, and the idealization that the small self has held about what should be is released completely to the truth of what is, which is the Divine as made manifest as all things.

The requirement for this is absolutely simple, and it’s agreement to the Divine, as and through, as who and what, as made manifest as you may know yourself. And know means realize. The conflict you have has to do with one thing only, the belief that you are not allowed, which claims all things in agreement to it. Each time a human being aligns to this level of manifestation, the light of the world changes. It lifts. It increases. And as you are claiming this, you are lifting the world by nature of your presence and being. And the claim you are authorized to make here, “It will be so; Behold, I make all things new,” is the agreement to the Divine from the one who has the authority to claim it.

Now, true authority may not be what you want, because when you enter this doorway, true authority, the claims that are made by you are authorized at a level of tone or vibration that they catalyze things. You become, in some ways, not only the battery, but the transformer. What you see and claim and know as of God is re-identified at a level of vibration, and in this authority the thing is made new. Now, Paul asks what the practical application of this is. He can imagine seeing something he doesn’t like and claiming the Divine there and praying that it looks better, seems better, seems changed, as a result of the claim. That is not this teaching. In authority you say, “It will be so,” and this is the claim of agreement to the Divine upon the thing or person. And the claim that is made in agreement to this, “Behold, I make all things new,” catalyzes vibration and tone to reunite it with its inherent Source. Reuniting is a good word to use here. When something has been held in darkness, denied God or the Divine, it operates in separation. You become the one who reunites, not through any act of will, but by agreement and in the authority of the one who may claim this.

He interrupts the teaching. “Can this be misused? Can people try to get what they want with this claim? Somebody is acting angrily. I want the angry person to stop. Will this claim make them kind?” In fact, no. It is far different from this. The claim cannot be misused because it is the action of the Divine upon the things seen or claimed that transforms, that realigns, that supports the inheritance of the vibration of God as pronouncing itself through the things seen. So it is the Divine that does the work, not the self that would fix something. Once you understand that at this level of vibrational accord there is less to do and more to be, you begin to understand that you have become the sound, the tone itself, that re-articulates and encounters in all things the inherent Divine to cause the new claim to be made manifest.

“What does that mean?” he asks. When the claim is made, when it is known in being, simply by presence, the action is immediate. Imagine that you are a light walking in a dark room. You illumine what you encounter. You are not trying to be the light, nor are you trying to illumine. You understand this much. But what you don’t understand are the properties of the light. And the property of the light is reclamation, or redemption, if you prefer. You understand the idea of redemption, but what redemption truly is, is reclamation within the light, because it is the light that is the redeemer—not the self that thinks she redeems another, but the light itself. In this agreement, the tone of your vibrational field summons the inherent Divine in what you encounter.

“How is the thing changed?” he asks. It is made new. It is in a new encounter of its being. “Now, what does this look like?” he says. Well, it depends on where you see it from. When you are in the Upper Room, what you are seeing is the Divine. The Divine is the office. The Divine is the office worker. The things piled on her desk are all re-known at a level of vibration that are not in the denial of the Divine. Now, you think that this is extraordinary, but imagine that it’s not. Imagine you are having a joyful day. You walk into the office. You notice the flowers on the desk, the sound of happy typing. You notice those milling around the coffee machine. But these visions are all informed by the joy that you hold. When you become the light, what you see is claimed in the light you see, and that is the only real difference. Again, it’s a conversation that is occurring between the Divine Self that you are and the Divine that is inherent in all manifestation.

Now, when one is lifted, when one is claimed anew, the energetic field that they hold is summoned in a new way. Imagine that there is a bell, or perhaps a cymbal, that is rung, that is struck. The vibration or tone of the cymbal or bell resonates in the energetic field. You know what it feels like to be in a room where a bell is rung. You can feel it in your body. You feel the shift in your field. And then you forget it. In some ways, this is comparable. But when the bell is rung and the energetic system is lifted, the altered state of vibration, through this encounter, supports the one who has been claimed in his or her own acclimation to the higher.

Imagine handing a menu to someone who didn’t know that they could order food. When the menu is handed to them, they realize what’s possible. This thing can be had or known. And in this way the song or tone that you are, in vibration, in tone, claims what you encounter in this same offering. The idea of who you are has been transformed. This does not make your history void. It does not deny your childhood, or perhaps your preferences for this or that. What it re-does is the agreement of being, in a very simple way. Imagine you have become who you have always been and simply forgot your name. Imagine that the life that you’ve lived up until this state of being was the life you were required to learn through, and the lessons were taken well, perhaps utilized well, but in this new day you are becoming the self that is not reliant upon that history to go about his or her day. You are freed from legacy known in fear. You are releasing the tethers of ideas that would bind you to collective rule. You are releasing a tone, an echo, in the energy bodies that are in agreement to those things that vibrate at that tone or level. This is freedom, and it is alchemy, and it is the Kingdom being made known as and through you.

Some of you say, “I just want a nice spiritual life. I want to be in the comfort of my relationship with God, go about my business, not think about the big questions. I just want to enjoy what’s before me.” In fact, you may have that here, because you are not probing, you are not striving, you are not conjuring or figuring out what should be, because you are abiding in the presence of God, where all things are known.

Imagine you stand in a wind. You understand what a wind feels like. Now, turn this wind to a gentle breeze, always caressing you, reminding you it’s there. You move into conversation with the gentle breeze, and you abide there. Perhaps you require a wind to trust that it is there, and some of you will have this experience. You will feel that the foundation of your lives has been rocked, that you have shifted. But when a strong wind comes, you seek balance, and what most of you will do is retreat to the known. So we suggest a gentle breeze, God as the breeze, as the gentle light that will build through you, increase through you, as you acclimate to it.

You are lifting the world in agreement to what is, and it is your experience of what is that will make this so. “What does that mean?” he asks. The challenge we face in this text is description. We may use metaphor, ice upon the lake, a breeze upon your cheek, for you to understand the idea of old foundations leaving, and the presence of God with you. But until it is your experience and you may claim it as so, it will remain conjecture. The authority you have, and we suggest you begin to work with, is the authority of the one who may know herself in agreement to union, know himself in accord with the Divine—“It will be so,” which claims it as present, and “Behold, I make all things new,” which encounters all things through the sight of the one who has claimed dominion.

Now, Paul asks questions. “Well, there is much in the world that seems wrong to me. Do I get to go about changing these things?” You get to go about realizing these things, Paul. The change is not your job. The realization of the Divine is. Now, back to the breeze, or perhaps the wind. Imagine there is a dusty room. You open the doors and windows wide. The wind fills the room, clears the room of the dust it’s acquired. It is the wind that does the work. All you have done is claim it by opening the window and letting the wind come forth and do its job.

“What does it feel like to be here,” he says, “either for me or perhaps the one claimed?” When you begin to operate at this level, the requirement for being is very simple—to remain at the high octave on the new foundation and to support what you see in its alignment by presence of being. What you encounter is different because your perception has changed, and what you encounter is in fact changed because of your presence. You don’t understand yet what it means to be the Divine in embodiment. You understand it, perhaps, in relation to stories you’ve been told, this or that master, this or that messiah, this or that saint. Those who came before you showed you what could be done. They all knew who they were, and because they knew who they were, they knew who you are as well.

Here we go, friends:

“On this day I choose to support myself by moving beyond reason, by moving beyond doubt, by moving to a level of agreement to my true nature where all things may be made new, and that I may bear witness in my experience to this transition, to this lifting of all things to the sight of God. I know who I am in truth. I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. It will be so.”

Period. Period. Period. Yes, you may stop now for the day. Period. Period. Period.

DAY TWENTY-SEVEN

When you ask for God to come to you, when you claim, “I am one with God,” when you agree to God as support and presence, you are not conjuring, but you are aligning and agreeing to what is already true. To ask God simply means to invite that the presence that is always so be known to you and by you in all ways. Indeed, it will be so.

This agreement that God is, and is known, and that you abide in God, is the level of alignment of the one who knows herself in fullness, in freedom, and in love. The challenge for so many of you is that you have decided what God should be. And the claim “God Is” conjures the aftereffects of prior presupposition. This agreement, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” is the announcement of the Infinite in its true state. And its true state is the love that is here to be known in you and through all things.

Now, the support you have through prior history—you know your address, you know your bank account, you know your friend’s phone number—is all well and good. But until “God Is” becomes as true and as familiar for you as those old edicts, you will find yourself at times lost, in a way, between two states of being. The idea of “God Is” and the knowing of “God Is” are two very different things. Now, conjecture here, “I understand the idea, God is all things, so indeed God Is,” is in some ways like saying, “I know the sea is deep because it must be.” But until you have encountered the depths of the sea, it is conjecture. And the alignment to “God Is,” the claim of love and freedom, the claim of the being you are, in conversation with Source, is all things, once known and agreed to.

“What does that mean?” he says. God as all things is what we are teaching you. Now, those of you who would deny this—“There are terrible things in the world”—are agreeing to the denial of the Divine. And its sole purpose, “the terrible thing,” is to get you to agree to the denial of the Divine, therefore turning your back on the Source of all things, and ceasing that conversation in favor of this other one. “Look at the terrible thing.” The terrible thing can be re-seen, but not by putting a mask upon it, attempting to make it something other, but to comprehend it as an act of someone, an edict of someone, who forgot who he was and denied the Divine in another. To reclaim them both, both the perpetrator and the one you would call the victim, is in fact to lift them beyond the act to resurrected idealism, and we will explain this. The aspect of each human being that knows itself as of God is what is reclaimed at the cost of the old premise. And when we use the word idealism, we are using it in a rather different way than you may think. The ideal of anything, the perfected state of anything, is what is being claimed through the claim of resurrection, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” and the manifestation of it that you may encounter, which is the thing itself in an altered state. You are not disregarding what happened. The one who owes the debt must pay the debt. You are still claiming them, beyond circumstance, beyond the old agreement, and to lift them both to the Upper Room is to claim them beyond the act, and even, in fact, if you wish, the repercussions of the act itself.

“What does that mean?” he says. Imagine the child who is taunted at school, the bully who taunts him. Because they are children, you forgive them. They don’t know better. Boys will be boys. They are acting in accordance with their age. But the one who has been bullied may bear the scars of the bully for many years to come. And the one who has chosen bullying has learned how to get power, through his fear, through harming another. When they are both lifted and in fact made new through the claims we offer you, the scarring is releasing because there is no need for it. The manifestation of the bullying that has been procured by the energetic system of the one once harmed releases the dross, the scar tissue, to be made new and re-known. The one who bullied, still accountable for his act, must re-know himself—again, beyond the act, where the idea of doing the act again would become impossible.

“What does it mean to be responsible for the act?” he asks. It simply means that the idea of karma is still present. Now, when you lift beyond the old to the true light, to the Divine, even karma may be released, or the result of the act upon what you’ve claimed as it re-informs your life in days to come. The challenge here for some of you is the mandate of punishment that you would see depicted upon those you find wrong-minded or evil. The idea of punishment now must be re-addressed in this light that we call God. When God is present, forgiveness may be known, because God does not punish. You are punished by your act, not for your act, and the idea of punishment in the Upper Room does not exist. There are things that do exist, and the primary one is learning. The bully must understand what he has done and change his ways. One who has been redeemed does not re-enact the old, because there is no need for it.

The idea of penance must now be understood as the release of the attachment to what once was, which may be painful for some. When the small self has become so invested in certain behaviors that he cannot imagine being without, the release of the old is deeply challenging. “Who am I without my fear, without my temper, without my greed? Who am I if I am not made right always?” These attachments to ideas of self, when released, will liberate and reclaim an individual in ways you can’t imagine. But the individual must undergo the release. It is not a magic wand when the actions or behaviors have been deeply entrenched. The one who believes she must lie to get her way must learn the lessons of truth. The one who believes he must always be right, again must learn what it means to release a sense of self that demands this. This is the process that we have spoken of prior.

The escalation to the Upper Room in vibration promises you these encounters, because it is the True Self, the one who is unadorned and unblemished, who resides there. We do not make you wrong for your behaviors. You are learning through them. When we speak to punitive measures, we speak specifically to what an individual does to him- or herself through the denial of the Divine. Any act you take in denial of the divinity of another lowers your vibration. Any act of fear that you engage in lowers your vibration. And through the alignment to the lower, you become enmeshed once again in the web, we would say, of fear that you are always invited to attend to. We have given you the claim of freedom. “I am free. I am free. I am free.” But it is not the small self who extricates herself from the web. It is the Divine, the one who knows who he is, who cannot imagine damning her brother and fighting her sister to prove a point.

The gift of this teaching for many of you will be a comprehension of the requirement for forgiveness to claim the Kingdom. It will not be claimed until you have done so. Now, this does not mean things did not happen that you certainly wish were never true. This does not mean that you wish to dine with one you once perceived as your attacker. But it does mean that they have the right to be. And until you can understand that anyone born has the right to be, you will be operating in shadow. “But what of those people who do terrible things? They have the right to be and do terrible things. Is that a contradiction?” In fact, it is not. They have a right to be, and they are in the denial of the Divine because they cannot act as they do unless that were the case. You may redeem the one who suffers in such ways through reclaiming them in the higher. Love will heal anyone. Hatred never will. Love will claim the world anew. Hatred never will.

Much of what you claim as anger is truly hatred, and you must begin to understand the difference. Hatred requires a victim. Anger does not. You may hit your toe on a piece of stone, cry out in anger or frustration, but you don’t attempt to kill the stone. You do that, though, with your brother, the one who took your wife, who harmed your son, who stole your money. Now, to redeem the one you hate the most in some ways is the greatest gift you may ever have, because once this is truly done the heart is changed forever. And we will explain this. The deepest pain that you have ever experienced, once healed, will also release all the pain that would have been opportunized by that first great pain. When the great anger is released, and inclusive of this the great anger at God for not loving you the way you think you should be loved, when the great anger is released, there is no need for anger.

We have often said that your greatest challenges provide the greatest growth, that indeed you are here to learn. We don’t negate your suffering, or what it was like to experience great harm. We comprehend it truly. But we offer you the way beyond it, not through denying it, but through reconciliation, and indeed forgiveness. The act of forgiveness is done, first and foremost, to liberate self. When you are able to do this, you have unchained yourself in profound ways, and you may unchain others as well. The claim “I am free, I am free, I am free,” when truly known, can be exchanged, can be gifted, can be offered to one who suffers deeply, “You are free, You are free, You are free,” which does not bypass the lessons they need to learn, but redeems them, reclaims them, re-knows them in the face of great suffering. All are holy or no one is. All is holy or nothing is. And to understand that the parasite is of God claims you free from the idea that you are being taken from. To claim the one you would call evil as of God offers that human being a possibility that he or she may never have encountered, because the ones who act in most cruelty, or seek to defile others, are the ones who have truly put themselves in darkness. To love the one in darkness is to be as the Christ, who even loved those who would see him dead. You understand this teaching in conjecture. We don’t wish you to experience the pains that are not warranted by your own experiences. You don’t need to justify pain as something you must have and know yourselves through. But you can indeed claim that the Divine as who and what you are, who knows who it is and how it serves, may reclaim all things in agreement to this one truth: “It will be so. God Is. God Is. God Is.”

Now, some of you ask, “Will there come a time when men do not do evil?” We will look at this phrase do evil and tell you what it truly means. Will there become a time when human beings do not act in denial of their own inherent divinity? The moment this happens the idea of evil disappears, because unless it is acted upon and perpetuated in thought and deed, it will dissipate. Just as the action of fear is to claim more fear, when fear is not acted upon, it loses its manner, it loses its weight, it loses its authority.

Each of you says yes to the promise of this teaching, that all men will be free, all human beings will be free, all may be known beyond the fear that you have sought to justify in manifestation through the world you’ve claimed in agreement to it. We are here for you each as you say yes. We are here for you each as you become willing to release the idea that you are unworthy. And we are here for you each as you say yes, you say yes, you say, “Yes, it will be so.”

This is the end of this chapter. “It Will Be So” is the title. Thank you for your presence. Stop now, please.

6

BEHOLD, I MAKE ALL THINGS NEW

DAY TWENTY-EIGHT

You ask for things. You think you need them. You wish for things. You think you should have them. When you stop thinking, you may move to knowing, and move into the receipt, which is the Kingdom in an experiential way.

You understand yourselves, you see, through past indoctrination—what it means to pray, what it means to ask, and even what it means to receive. What you don’t understand yet is that this level of alignment, the Kingdom itself, is the place of being, and consequently the place of receipt. To understand your needs being met through a vibratory accord seems impossible to you. This is not a magic lantern. This is not wish fulfillment. This is realization in the Upper Room, where the amplitude of your vibration claims what it encounters in union with God, and not separate from it.

So much of what you say you should have is somewhere other, your idea of a future, “someday when I may, someday when I can.” When you move into the immediacy of now, which is the Upper Room, the idea of time and space indeed are altered. You go into an agreement with the eternal now, which encompasses all the ideas of time that you have ever learned. The idea of time itself can be comprehended in the eternal now, because the consciousness you hold can claim this.

“What does this mean?” he asks. You understand yourselves in linearity, the idea of past, present, future. In fact there is only now, only now, only now. And the vibration of being, in what we call the Upper Room, claims you in the eternal now, where all things may be re-known, beyond what your idea of time is, which claims you in linearity and puts you in a place of understanding self through a rubric of expectation. “Perhaps someday, maybe when I have, when I am well enough, or holy enough, I will know the Kingdom.”

To understand the Kingdom as a construct is helpful for some of you. When we taught you yesterday, we spoke of an octave that expresses beyond the one you’ve known, but it exists simultaneously with the one you have known yourselves through. You understand radios and changing a channel. The other channel was playing, the other music was playing, but your listening was elsewhere. You didn’t conjure the sound from the radio station, the music playing. By tuning to the channel it plays on, you simply aligned to what was already so. The Kingdom operates in simultaneity of the world you’ve known. In fact, the world you’ve known exists in the Kingdom, but in a higher state of frequency.

Now, if you understand that everything is in an octave, and your idea of cause and effect, known in linear time—“Tomorrow I will wake up and go to work, on Friday I will see my friends, on Sunday I will go to church”—the planful nature of your expression utilizes the linearity that you know of as time, but the construct of time itself is in deceit or in denial of the eternal now. You understand what Sunday is. You know an appointed time on a clock. You make your meeting on time. This is all useful at this level. But in the Kingdom the construct of experience is very different. You may know yourself in time as well as beyond it.

“How does this happen?” he asks. “I can’t understand this.” The self that knows who she is, or the Eternal Self, aligned in the high broadcast, always exists there. You are not conjuring the Kingdom, nor are you claiming the Monad or the Christed Self, the divine being you are, as something other than already expresses in what we call the Upper Room. You align in the Upper Room, which is a place of timelessness, and can move into reception, where the idea of time itself is useful as required, but does not claim you as its servant.

The idea of moving beyond time is not as strange as you think. In your dream state, you experience the self as liberated from time or the need for explanation. You awaken and find yourself on a mountain with the ability to fly. The dream state offers experience where you are unbound by the idea of time and space. To move to the Upper Room is an expansion of consciousness where what you may claim and understand does not have the edict or the claim made for it by your predecessors. On Sundays you go to church, on Fridays you meet your friends, and, when Monday comes, time to go to work again. When you understand who and what you are within the ideological frame that we offer you—“I am free of time as the True Self, and I can move beyond the construct of time in my awareness”—you are breaking every rule you have ever been taught about possibility or plausibility. But you understand imagination, a potential that may be born, and anything that may be thought in fact may be claimed and experienced in what we call the Upper Room.

“Anything?” he asks. Well, yes, in some ways that’s true. Anything may be understood, you may move into reception with anything, because you are vibration and everything you encounter is vibration as well. To move beyond the idea of what can be, in the low octave, to what always is in the high, while maintaining a body, an identity, a way of operating in the world, is in fact what it means to claim the Kingdom. To know the self in the presence of God, whatever you wish God to be, to know the self as free, as the Divine Self is, while maintaining form, is the gift of the Kingdom. And the first step for most of you here will be the articulation of the Monad, as made in form, in a way that you may encounter yourself through.

We will explain this for Paul, who is asking. The claim “I know what I am in truth,” which is a claim of manifestation, the Divine Self experiencing itself as form, brings you into an alignment with the Divine in all things, everything else in form. To understand that all things may be known as of God in an articulated state gives you the opportunity to receive what we call the echo, or the reverberation or tone of the claim made upon a thing, “I know what you are in truth”—again, the mandate of the Divine as experiencing form as of itself. When you do this, you have given permission to a level of acceleration in your energetic field, because to exist in the Kingdom is to release a kind of density that you have accrued through habituation.

It’s important to understand this. Imagine you are a rock that has been thrown to the bottom of the pond. You believe yourself to be heavy, unable to lift. But the rock itself, in its re-knowing of what it is, begins to lift in tone and vibration beyond what it was taught to be. You can’t believe such a thing can be so, but you can imagine a child raised in darkness, with only his fingers to feel the environment around him. The child does not know he is in darkness. It is all he has ever known. When the light claims the child, when the child is illumined in brightness, he may see what was always there and claim a new experience of self beyond what he has been habituated to. The Divine Self as you is this light that illumines each of you, and the broadcast of this light is what claims the Kingdom as made manifest for you. The denial of the Divine, we have said, is what this light encounters. To be raised at this level of vibration, while in form, is in fact the teaching of the Christ.

Now, you understand that the Christ, or Monad, the aspect of the Creator that seeks realization as and through you, seeks realization in all things. Just as the radio station that you have been used to has been playing the old, the high station claims the new, plays the new, if you prefer. And the claim we will teach you today, “Behold, I make all things new,” the claim of articulation in resonant field and the agreement to this, is the stage of indoctrination that you may come to in your study. And this is a study, you see, and your experience of it must be your testament to the teaching’s worth. We will not teach you foolhardy ways of being, nor will we mislead you. But we are telling you this now. For those of you who seek the Kingdom, a way is being impressed and offered for you, a path to follow, a stair to climb, a way of expressing, that will give you the opportunity for your experience of this as you say yes. And “yes” you may say at every stage of learning. We will not force an issue with you. We honor your will. But the first way of knowing the self, in articulation as made manifest, is the conversation you begin to have as an energetic being with the world around you.

You are so used to being separate, to have your experience of separation mandate your knowing of who you are, you don’t yet understand that the alignment you are being offered moves you into an agreement, which is energetic accord, with the manifestation of the Divine that is expressing all around you. Imagine waking in a morning and saying hello to God, not as some ethereal being, but as the substance of your environment, as everyone you meet and see. What if God was all expression, simply aligned at varying levels of intonation, or vibration, or realization? As you rise in vibration, the perception that you hold of all that you encounter meets you where you sit. And that is why we say yes, you have been made new through these teachings, because the eyes that learned, that were taught in the darkened room, that eschew the light because they don’t know it is even there, the being that was in darkness is now re-known. You are made new.

Now, the claim “Behold, I make all things new” must be comprehended by you again as a realized claim, not of the small self fixing, getting his or her way, but the agreement to the Divine that is already present that is no longer denied. “It will be so; Behold, I make all things new.” The equivalency of this claim in a human being’s vibrational field is actually causation. To become the recipient of this is to be the expression of it. Because you become the expression of the Divine or the Monad or Christ in articulation, you are heralding it in all things you encounter—again, the claim of the Kingdom, “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, when one is made new, one is in triumph. One has been lifted beyond the old, reclaimed in the higher, and decided for herself, for himself, that this will be so. The manifestation of the Monad in an articulated state, the Divine as risen and expressed, is the gift of the teaching. And the expression of it has been offered you prior, the claim “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” the announcement of being in the Upper Room, and its mandate “It will be so; Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, we invite you to do an exercise with us now to comprehend yourself, first and foremost, as an energetic being. Imagine, for a moment, that you are a sound, a hum, a bell rung, a resonant tone, and the resonant tone that you are is in an encounter with the tone that expresses as all things. You may make this claim now:

“I am in the Upper Room.”

And feel the vibrational field that is you, shifting to the higher tone that is the Upper Room in expression. Now, claim the manifestation of this as form, as being, as who and what you can only be in truth:

“I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

And, again, feel the field shift to become inclusive of the claim that is being made. Now authorize this, the manifestation of this, as the Divine Self who knows what she is accountable to and what he may claim. And you may say this, in your authority:

“It will be so.”

And as you say this, feel the inheritance, which is the Kingdom, begin to move you, begin to claim you. And now you may say these words to all you encounter and see:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, feel the energetic field that is you expressing around you in conversation with the manifestation and intonation of everything you see, or everything that you can imagine. The Divine as who you are, as what you are, is serving in presence, and reclaiming what has been denied its true nature, its inherent divinity. It is not done by the small, it is done by the True, and hers is the claim, his is the claim, to all he/she encounters:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, the manifestation of this in the energetic field you hold is actually conversation, a dance, if you prefer, of remembrance and knowing. To be remembered as of God, “I am known, I am known, I am known,” is to invoke the same true knowing, in authority, upon all you encounter. “You are known. You are known. You are known.” And the resonance of this claim, in form and field, claims all things with it in the Upper Room. And that is the claim “It will be so; Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, when you abide in the Upper Room, when your foundation has come as this, there is no claim to make, because as here, as this is the station you broadcast as, you are known. And it is the simple act of being that can reclaim what it encounters, beyond your idea of time or the logic that time has accrued, to know all things in a higher altered state. When this claim is impressed upon something made manifest, what has been made manifest is re-known—again, the claim “Behold, I make all things new.”

What has been manifest is re-known as of Source, which simply, if understood correctly, is the release of the denial of God. That is what the claim offers. Imagine the rock lifting from the seabed to break the surface of the water. Imagine the child, reared in darkness, made full of light. Imagine the song you sing, the great I Am, the God within, in service and expression, announcing itself to all that it encounters: “It will be so. It will be so. It will be so.” And, finally, in triumph: “God Is. God Is. God Is.”

Now, when you make this claim, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” you become as the wind, as the sun, the totality of the Divine that may encompass and include all things, because the claim “God Is” claims all things as of itself, and the denial of the Divine is revealed to be the lie that it has always been.

We teach you as you may learn. We teach you to know what you may claim. When you are no longer desiring, you are in receipt. When you are no longer deciding it will happen tomorrow or Thursday, the idea of time is released to claim in experience the nature of God, which is the eternal now, and all things may be known within it. Again, the claim “Behold, I make all things new.”

We thank you each for your presence. Indeed, this is in the text. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

(PAUSE)

You ask questions about what will be. You decide outcomes based upon presupposition, what is expected to happen as a result of something prior. Humanity stands at a precipice. Where will you go next? How will you know yourselves beyond these times? The opportunities that these times present are enormous, but you must be open to the opportunity for change beyond what the small self has agreed to.

Dominion, you see, claiming what is truly yours, happens in high authority. But you may choose in low ways as well. You may choose to fight your neighbor, to damn those people, and incur the consequences that come from separation. To love your brother as yourself has been taught, and it is true. To deny the least of us is to deny all of us is also true. To claim the Kingdom is to become inclusive, aware of the requirements of others, and support them as they may be supported.

Those of you who lift to the light, encompass, become the light, are there to shine for others. This is not a selfish act—far from it. It is not a high act or an estimable act as the egoic structure would like to see it. What the high act is is the relinquishing of the mandate to be who you think you are supposed to be. Even a spiritual identity can become a mandate for the egoic structure to seek to operate through. To know yourself in worth—“I am worthy of the Kingdom”—is to know who others are as well. And the moment any of you decide that someone is not worthy, you have denied yourself entrance. This is the greatest challenge you will face—to know others in their worth, their inherent worth, in spite of how they present or how you were taught to see them.

Many of you have been conditioned, through lifetimes, to discriminate against your fellows, in whatever ways are popular in the century that it occurs. You have been taught to shun some, accept others, pray only this way and don’t look at those who pray otherwise. To move into union is to move beyond the idea of mob rule or systemic oppression, in whatever form it may take. The days before you will show you more opportunity to support your fellows. And the ways you may be asked to serve, in concrete ways, will be testament to your willingness to know God. When one is hungry, feed him. When one is dirty, clean him. When one believes himself as unworthy, or has been taught he is unworthy, know him in his worth.

To know another in his worth is to realize the truth beyond any system of prior agreement that would say, “That cannot be so.” If you truly wish this teaching, you must put down your swords. And your swords may be your language, or what you decide must be true for another. To become peaceful does not mean you sit still. Any action taken in love has a residual affect into eternity. Any act in love is an eternal act, and progresses love as a force, which is the opposite of the denial of the Divine. The denial of the Divine is fear, and fear takes many forms, be it greed, be it avarice, be it anything that denies the Divine in anyone else. To know God in the least of men is to know God as all things.

“But how do we do this?” he asks. “We are not that wise. We are easily fooled and easily confused. We are taught who to despise, who to admire. We are taught what to aspire to, and then if we don’t get it we feel awful. How do we live as you suggest we live?”

That is this teaching, and that is the full teaching that you are experiencing here. If you truly hear what we say, you will understand one thing. The denial of the Divine is the only reason for pain, and the root of all suffering. The denial of the Divine is at the root of all war, and the root of all oppression. The denial of the Divine is a lie. Do you understand this? It is not so much that the material realm is an illusion. While that is so, it is very real at this level of vibration. But the lie is that the Divine is not present, and fear will invite you, not only to deny the Divine in yourself, but in others as well.

You seek to appease fear. You go into agreement with it so much. “Don’t talk to that woman at the party. She is that kind of woman.” “Don’t listen to that man over there. He is that kind of man.” “Well, perhaps it’s so. Perhaps I should not say hello to the woman at the party, listen to the man over there. Perhaps that’s the right thing to do.” And you have become complicit to the acts against the woman or the man, for somebody else’s idea of who they think they are has persuaded you to do so. To deny the God in them is to deny the God in the self. You cannot have it both ways.

Now, the teaching we are teaching you, and will continue to, is the teaching of agreement and vibrational accord. Since our first text we have been teaching you agreement and accord, and the alignment you hold now, through participation in these teachings, is at a level of amplitude where you may actually change the world you see. And by change we mean reveal the world that is true, not the world that stays hidden in shadow and darkness. You become the light that illumines the dark room, where the child in his blindness has been doing his best to comprehend a world that he cannot truly see.

The gift of this teaching for some of you will be love. You may love your neighbor. The gift for others may be great triumph. “I know who I am in a resurrected state, and I offer myself in service to what is before me.” For others of you, it will be an introduction to a great possibility, a mystical path, if you wish, that you may fully take later. There is no race to the light, but there is the act of denying it. And if you take one thing from these teachings, one gift from these teachings, and only one, we would invite you not to participate in persecution of your fellows, but to know who they are, know what they are, and how they serve, because as you do this you claim a walkway that others may walk upon.

As you lift others to their inheritance by claiming their worth, you not only agree to your own, but you agree to the worth of all that they may encounter. Imagine a song sung, perhaps a catchy tune. You hum it under your breath. The person walking by you begins to hum it as well, and then his family, and those they meet. The Divine in expression is the song that you are singing. And the gift of the song is itself, itself in tone, in expression. And it is love. It is only love, and will always be love.

“On this day I claim that all that I may see before me may be re-known in love, that all that I may know may be re-known in love, and that the gift of love, in all things, in all ways, may be made known to me so I may gift it to all I see and meet. I know who I am in love. I know what I am in love. I know how I serve in love. I am free. I am free. I am free.”

Thank you for your presence. This is in the text. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

DAY TWENTY-NINE

You have come to us with willingness to be taught, to be re-known, and to acquiesce an aspect of self that seeks release, and this would be the idea of self knowing itself in separation and seeking confirmation for separation in every aspect of his life. If you understand this teaching, what we call the small self, personality structure, if you wish, believes in separation and claims it in every encounter. This does not make it wrong. It simply makes it habituated to an idea of self that is operating in separation. And separation, in this way, is the implicit denial of God in everything encountered. “I am separate from the dog,” “from the night sky.” “I am separate from love.” The ways of knowing self in separation, the ways of deciding what can and will be through that lens or idea of separation, must be released in order for this teaching to manifest.

Now, when we teach Paul, we understand his life, how he has grown, what he has learned, what he still needs to learn, and what you all need to learn in the same way. Where most of you stand now is at a level of vibration where you are willing. You are saying yes. You know you have capacity. You can feel the vibration of the energetic attunements, have had experiences with them, and perhaps have glimpses of what it means to be in the Upper Room, simply a place without fear where you may truly know beyond prior edict. But from this place you have been taught what is possible, what may now be known. And this is where we wish to bring you—what may now be known.

Now, each teaching we have brought forth in our sequence of instruction has had a manifestation on the energetic plane of those who have withstood them or aligned to them. Those of you who have been taught have amassed a level of vibration and awareness that is ready to claim itself in yet another strata. The newer student is learning well. She is coming to a place of saying, “Yes, perhaps it will be, perhaps I may know, perhaps it will be made so.” And we comprehend you in your willingness, and we reach out our arms to take your hands to help you cross the river to the new way of being. We are here to support each of you at the level of agreement that you might align to. And this might, this may well be, must be understood as the willingness of the self to undergo the transformation to the Upper Room in order to claim the experience of it.

Now, some of you wish a taste. “I want to know God a little bit.” Some of you wish to dive into God and to disappear into it. And, in fact, what we are teaching is not about disappearing into God, but claiming your rightful place as of God in agreement to the manifest world. The manifest world is also God, and mankind’s exclusion of the Divine from form has created separation in most ways for you. To move beyond separation as a way of knowing self is fearful to the small self because she believes that her life depends upon separation. “There must be enough for me.” “I must get my way.” “I must do as I say, exercise this will I have, to prove to myself that I am worthy by the old ways of being known.”

Now, the old ways of being known are being encountered by all of you. “Who am I if I am not my occupation?” “What am I if I am not my gender?” “Who do I become when my idea of self is being transformed beyond my agreement?” Humanity itself is having to claim itself in a higher accord, and what comes of this, what transpires as a result of this, is a new way of being in expression, and a new way of knowing that you have aligned to, whether or not you know it, but have not yet made manifest. We will explain this for Paul, who is asking. When we say it has been made manifest in the Upper Room or the higher octave, humanity has agreed to know itself anew but has not claimed it in form yet. And the process you are undergoing, in fact as a species, is the release of the things that have kept you in low tether, bound you to the old and the reliance upon the old that is now seeking to be made new.

The process of acclimation to a higher energy field, and you may call it that, if you wish, requires you to release those aspects of self, or at least offer them for release, so that they may be re-known or reclaimed in the higher octave or energetic field. The claims we have offered you thus far, when aligned to in sequence, catalyze you at every step so that your experience may become modified by each new agreement that you make. When we say an experiential teaching, we simply mean that any instruction we offer you may be utilized practically. But as you are learning, as you are saying yes and no to each experience, you are actually invigorating the vibrational field with the new information. And by information we mean here the codification of the energetic field in higher tone. Imagine a trumpet song, the sound of the trumpet that awakens an aspect of self that will never go to sleep again. That which has been dreaming, that which has been in slumber, is awakened now—but at the cost of the old, the old dream state, the denial of the Divine that you have all chosen to learn through, and is coming to an end.

“But what does it look like?” he asks. “The dream state comes to an end. I understand the idea, but not how it outpictures or is made known to us.” The process of integration of the higher energetic field that we call the Upper Room is here on this plane now. The old is being displaced. You may call it an act of God. You may call it anything you like. But truly it is no different than a new light coming into the room, claiming all things in its brightness. And as a stone is overturned, as a rock is moved away, that which has been withheld or denied the light must be seen anew, a deeply uncomfortable process for the ones of you who would choose sleep, who would decide not to look beneath the rock to what has always been there. Now, when we say move the rock, it is not to blame what exists underneath the rock. It is to bring it to the light so it may be re-known. Because everything must be lifted, all things will be made new.

Now, each of you says yes to engage in this process that humanity itself is undergoing. It is not one culture. Every culture is being impacted. And what has bound each culture to separation, or the denial of the Divine, is being claimed anew. Those of you who’ve claimed greed will learn the lessons from greed. Those of you who’ve chosen to deny your fellows their inherent worth will learn those lessons as well. The denial of the Divine has taken many forms. And as everything is seen anew, is offered again to the light, it is reclaimed. It will be so. It will be re-known. And the acclimation to the new, the new field that seeks to grow where the lava has claimed the land, the new growth that can come after the great storm, is what you will know, and all of you will know, in time.

Now, when we ask you these questions, we ask for honest answers. Do you want to come? If you wish to come, you are welcome. If you don’t wish to come, you will have your own experience of the changes humanity chooses to learn through. The invitation to come must be explained to Paul, who is confused by the invitation. When we invite you to come, to be on this journey with us, we are showing you a way forward that will indeed support you in times of radical change. And that is what is before you. In order to withstand the changes, you cannot cling to what was, but you must claim the new and participate in its creation. This is not to be a doomsayer, not to bemoan the past that is leaving, but to lift what you encounter to the light that has become the broadcast of your expression. When a world is being reborn, when challenges come that seek to be re-known in a very different way than you have attended to them prior, you must perceive great opportunity. And the opportunity of this day, if you wish to come, is to make a new agreement that what the Divine requires of you, to realize itself through you, will be made known to you, which means realized by you in a way that you can hold. To take this step, and it is a big one, we would say, would be tantamount to being renamed or reborn in the high octave.

Now, this doesn’t mean you don’t answer to the name Joshua, or Phyllis, or Jane. It simply means that the fiber of your expression and self-acknowledgment has realigned as the True Self, who cannot complain of feeling separate because it can never be. You understand the idea, yes. The True Self is not separate, can never be, knows itself in union. Now, imagine a corn husk being cleaned, and imagine what is exposed that has always been there. Imagine a being who mistook his name for the name given by his parents, and denied the sonship, the daughtership, if you prefer, her true inheritance that is not only being gifted to you, but has its own mandate, which is re-articulation as the Monad or the light within in order to serve, which is to lift or to light the pathway for those who will follow you. You are not intending to lead. You are not saying, “Come after me.” You are becoming the gateway, the doorway, to the great light. Because your light is shining so, what it calls to it is always in need of revelation.

Now, revelation is re-seeing. And the attunement we offer you today, “Behold, I make all things new,” is the reclamation, not only of identity, but mind itself, in the high octave. To claim mind itself as of God is again to claim what is always true, because it is mind, the small self in projection that utilizes mind, that mandates separation. So to release separation is to acclimate to high mind where separation does not express. “But what does that do to us?” he asks. “It sounds terribly confusing.” Where you sit, Paul, is enormously confusing. What we are offering you is clarity, and release of an idea of who you think you are, so you may be as, and be as so, the Divine as who and what that has come as each of you and seeks to be sung.

“On this day I claim that I will align mind, the small self and the True Self, to the highest equivalency it may know itself through. And in this way I opportunize my acclimation to my true nature in union with the Source of all things. And as I say yes, as I say yes, as I say yes, I sing the song of freedom, and ‘Behold, I make all things new’ becomes the song of my expression.”

You may say this now, if you wish:

“I am willing. I am knowing. I Have Come.”

And this is the sequence:

“I am willing. I am knowing. I Have Come.”

And now you may say this:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, if you feel this in your energetic field, what you may be experiencing is an expansion and lifting, and what you are knowing in this experience is that the self you have known is not separate from its Source, but the Source itself in individuated consciousness. You may be individuated and of the whole simultaneously. You are a student in a class, but you are of the class. You are an articulation of God, but all things are. So the idea of separation may be changed or exchanged for the idea of individuated. Hence, you are not disappearing into the great sea, but you know yourself in union with it.

The gift of this day, for those who wish it, is a great step forward in the alignment to the expression of the Monad, Christ, if you prefer, True Self, True Nature, Universal Self. Whatever you wish to call it, it is all the same. God as all, God as of, and God as with.

We say this now for each of you. As you say yes, as you agree, as you step forward to enter the Kingdom, we say these words to instruct you. Know yourself as worthy. Know yourself as loved. And know yourself as of the great I Am that expresses as all manifestation. We lead you forward now. The Kingdom is present indeed. You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come.

Indeed, this is in the text. Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

(PAUSE)

We ask you this question: Are you willing to be re-known, reclaimed, to know the inheritance that is indeed the Kingdom? If you say yes to this, what will begin will be a process of acclimation to a level of vibration that will be very new for almost all of you. Some of you have glimpsed it, have tasted it, awakened from a dream and said, “I know where I was.” But to acclimate to this vibration in a coherent way, which allows you to operate fully, engage fully, in the lives lived, to lift others to this equation through your presence, will be very different than what you have withstood in prior times.

Each attunement brings with it an opportunity to learn. And the transition one makes to the Kingdom as a place to abide in, a level of consciousness to align in, a level of agreement to come to willingly, as each stage progresses you must understand that the Kingdom and unity require you to see where you have been in self-deception, or denying God in any aspect of your life. Now, Paul is frightened by this. “Enough already. I just want to be there. Enough with the clearing. Enough with the pain.” We didn’t say it was painful. Illumination is not painful. It’s realizing where you have been deceived and how you have contributed to deception that can be quite painful. “I know I was a good mother. He went to the right school. He was well fed. He went on to marry that nice woman.” Your understanding of your son, based on your edicts, will be seen differently and may be challenging. And even the path you have taken of growth or of spiritual awareness may be re-seen and you will know it as other than perhaps you thought.

The acquiescence at this level is an act of faith, and we must say it this way. Faith as you say it, belief in the unseen, is not what we are referencing. The faith here is that you will be shown and be able to identify and then reclaim the self in these areas where you have chosen self-deceit, or inherited structures of self-deceit that you have aligned to. The gift of this is that your experience becomes testament to this growth, this new alignment. “I see where I have deceived myself in the denial of the Divine of this man or that woman. I see where I have been complicit, in arrogance or in confusion, to systems that are harmful to others. I understand that my idea of a dream, a cultural dream, what I should aspire to, was born in greed, and not in truth.”

To come to these levels of awareness need not be terrifying—perhaps, maybe, uncomfortable. But please remember this, because it is our teaching and it is so. What is true is always true, and in truth a lie will not be held. And all you will be releasing is that which is not true, be it your judgment of self, your denial of the body, denial of love, denial of others, based upon systematic idealizations of what should be. The claims we make for you today are the claims of the Kingdom in broadcast, and the alignment here is to support you on this new stage of this strange journey. “Why do you use that word strange? I find it uncomfortable, discomforting, if you wish.” We would say it this way. It is strange because it is new, and the Kingdom itself, as where you rise and express and align, is different than what you have thought. But your experience of it, you will find, has great commonality. As one of you begins to attend to this and can speak her experience of it, you will find that others will join you, a way of being. You know a smell. “That’s the smell of roses.” You identify this smell without an artifact. There may be no flower to see, but the scent of rose may permeate the air and you become accustomed to it. No one will tell you that there is not rose permeating the air. And to be in the Kingdom is to be at this level of awareness that this is where you reside.

Now, when we use the word where, we are speaking in a way that is confusing to you, because while the Kingdom is place, an idea of where you reside, it is also frequency or a level of vibration that you have become attuned to. And the agreement to be here, and the agreement at all, is what catalyzes this process of engagement. At all was what we said, Paul. It is the agreement itself that catalyzes this. What you encounter on the way to the well on the other side of the field may be the briar patch, it may be the rosebush, it may be something lovely. But know that the well that you will now drink from is there. And it is so. And it will be known by you.

As we say yes to each of you, as we say yes to the man who speaks our words, as we say yes to humanity, “It will be so,” you may know yourselves anew. You are not a heretic for claiming dominion, for claiming your rightful place at the true table. You are loved. You are saying yes to what is always true. And here is the claim of this manifestation: “God Is. God Is. God Is.”

Now, when this claim is made from the Upper Room, it is invoked. You move to conversation with God as experience, beyond language, but in tone and in field. And at this level the invitation to release the denial of the Divine is immediate, because you are claiming the expression, the abundance, the truth of all things, where denial cannot stay. So in this invocation you will find yourself well. If you find yourself provoked by what you seek or would have God be denied in, the claim that you may offer, “It will be so,” will translate what you see to the higher accord, or transpose the vibration, so you may not be deceived. To be deceived is to deny the Divine. The action of fear is to invoke you, invite you, comprehend you, and claim you in that denial. The action of fear is to claim more fear. Fear is the denial of the Divine.

We bless you each. We see you each. We know who you are. Let the joyful rising commence. Period. Period. Period.

Stop now, please. Yes, in the text.

DAY THIRTY

What you ask for in fear, what you are fearful of incurring, exists in one way as a potential, and only as a potential. As you continue to affirm it, you concretize it, you give it authority, and it becomes an agreement for you. “I will know myself in fear.” To know the self in fear is to know the self in separation, or the denial of God, outpictured as your experience.

Now, your experience is always conducted at the level of consciousness. Your perception, you see, how you perceive and what you claim as what you see, is always decided by you. Others may tell you what to see, you may go into agreement with what you see, decide that what you see is so. But perception itself, the meaning that things have, the meanings that they have been endowed with, are always the act of individuals. We will explain this for Paul. “Look at that beautiful boat,” you may say to the boat that you see lined up on the shore. Someone else will say, “Look at that leaky boat, look at that dinghy, look at that thing that is an eyesore.” The perception that you hold in individuated consciousness confirms identity and meaning of what you see. And what you are looking at has in many ways been dictated for you by prior prescription—what a dinghy is, an eyesore is, a big boat is, or a beautiful one. Your idealization of outcome holds this same content—“a good event,” “an impossible event,” “an event that I would run from.” What you endow meaning with claims you in relationship to it.

Now, so much of what you see that is in motion now seems to be in tumult, but in fact what is happening is re-creation and the re-knowing of matter as received through each of you at a higher level of agreement. When things are changing, you don’t see outcome, but you predict outcome—“this fearful thing,” “this wonderful event.” You give it meaning and ascribe it power. In times of great change, you cannot discern what cake is baking. You only know that something is in the oven. It may be poison, it may be delicious, but it’s happening somehow.

Here is the opportunity: “Everything that I perceive may be seen in a higher way, known in a higher form, and any outcome I predict must be informed by the inherent Divine that must always be present.” When you operate this way, you’re confirming the Divine in any outcome, regardless of what the small self would think or how it would be named by him or her. As you agree to this, you become in agreement to opportunity that may be not known as a small self. In other words, the outcome of any situation will be seen as of God, even when you would not decide that from the vantage or view of the small self.

Now, as we are teaching, we are listening to Paul’s questions in the background. When he questions the teachings as we dictate, we are having to override him. Here are his questions. “Well, what is a good outcome, then? There are things I am frightened of seeing. I don’t want to get this illness that many are getting. I don’t want to live in a country that I am not trusting or proud of. What are we to do with the questions we have? Indeed, all things are in change, but we have decisions to make about how to live our lives.”

Here is the gift, Paul. You don’t get to know. You get to know that any outcome that holds the seed of the Divine, or the inherent Divine, will be productive—perhaps not comfortable, perhaps not enjoyable as you would wish it. But the gift of each outcome becomes a new way to learn, a new way to be. In the escalated vibration that you are all experiencing, the dust storm has been kicked up. You cannot see much in a dust storm. Perhaps you can move an inch or two, a foot or two, holding your hands before you, waiting for it to clear. But until the dust settles you will not see where you stand. But you must trust, Paul, and you all must trust, that where you will find yourselves standing is of a higher plane, a resonant field, the Upper Room, if you wish to call it this. As one aligns to his or her promise to be the one who claims the Kingdom, who knows his authority to claim the Divine in spite of any evidence to the contrary—“It will be so”—you begin to understand that everything you see is outpictured consciousness.

Now, you are all so used to living at the level of the singular—“my creation,” “my fear,” “my idea of what should be”—that you forget, many of you, that you are of a whole. And the collective consciousness is informing the landscape—with ideology, with fear, with intended outcome. Imagine this, friends. You are all in the dust storm, bumping into one another in this shared landscape of change. Now, when an individual realizes who and what she is, and when she lifts beyond the dust storm, because in the Upper Room it is not present, she begins to operate in an agreement to plurality. Now, plurality is of the whole. Individuated consciousness is still present, but at the level of Christ Mind you are no longer operating in separation, and separation is what predicates the idea of solitary or singular expression. You realize that the resonant tone that you hold is claiming all things into coherence with it. Again, the claim “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, the all is the key word here. You are claiming all. Your individuated dominion actually extends beyond the personal idea of a life lived. Once you begin to understand that you are of the whole, you begin to operate in a new authority. “I am of the whole. I am one with Source.” To become one with Source is to move into union. And everybody you meet, those you may never meet, those who have not been born, and those who have lived and died, are indeed of the whole. All things new. The claim Behold: “I witness, I claim, I perceive. The consciousness that I hold is in extension to hold all things.” And made new: Re-perceived, re-known, reclaimed, and yes, friends, resurrected, in the high octave from which you have claimed this, a world made new. A being who knows herself as of the whole claims the world anew.

Now, Paul interrupts. “You have spoken some about what this feels like, or what this must be like. I still don’t understand fully.” Nor will you, friend, until you abide here. But you may taste it soon, you may know the feeling of it soon, as soon as you say, “It will be so.” Now, the claim “It will be so,” which supports the presence of the Divine where it has prior been denied, will support this, and your agreement to the claim is simply your alignment to and with it. To behold the Kingdom is to claim all things outside of the idea of separation, and since separation is just an idea, consequently malleable to thought, you may know yourself at this level of vibration. The alignment that is required for it has been described, you have been instructed in, we have brought to you in prior texts. In the text that we write now, we are speaking of the demonstration, the foundational demonstration, of being as and in the Kingdom. To be as the Kingdom is simply to know the self as of it. And the claim of the Kingdom—“Thy will be done”—is the realization of the presence of the Divine as all.

“Thy will be done or It will be so?” he questions. The claim “Thy will be done,” when made from a state of unification, is rather different than you have understood it. You are used to the idea of separation, the small will and the high will operating perhaps in tandem, at best. But the unification of the will in the Upper Room claims you beyond singularity, and the “Thy will be done,” as a statement of expression, is simply confirmation of Divine Will being expressed—not Divine Will “instead of me,” but Divine Will with and as. Once again, to confirm this for the new student: You do not become the Christ. The Christ becomes as you. In other words, your expression in union is that level of alignment, and the broadcast of the will is always Divine Will at this level of being. You are not trying to be holy, presuppose what God wants. The will itself has gone into an agreement to the octave of the Upper Room for realization here to firmly, and, yes, fully, be in expression.

Now, to understand how this feels is to comprehend what it means to know. When you know, you don’t question. You operate in your knowing. There is no fear in this knowing, nor is there conflict. You are in your knowing, operating from knowing, not guessing, not pretending, because those things do not express at this level of agreement, when in one’s knowing and one acting upon one’s knowing must be in alignment with the Source who expresses through will. The key to understanding this is the operative word know. When you know, you are unafraid. And when you act in knowing you are in alignment to high will, or expressing it.

Each of you comes to us with a deep awareness of where you come from, and the where that you come from is not your parents or the circumstances of your heritage by birth. The where that you are of is indeed the Kingdom, and the aspect of self that knows herself as of God is the aspect of self that is God expressing through you, and it is this articulation that you are engaged in through the action and verbiage we support you in.

The way that we teach through Paul, as we are allowed to speak as we wish, is in authority, yes, but also in deep awareness of where you stand—individually, yes, but even more so as a collective. And when we say humanity has chosen to move beyond the old, we comprehend that humanity has a path into the unknown that seems fraught with danger, or fraught with fear. Do not fear the unknown. Look instead to its promise. “Behold, I make all things new.” Look forward to the outcome that holds the Divine within it, and do not be dissuaded by evidence to the contrary.

“What does that mean?” he asks. When you are asked to fear, understand that you are being asked, and choose the higher. This is not about becoming contentious. It’s about lifting beyond the need for the fight to the level of agreement where you may act upon knowing, and not upon fear. “Don’t drink the poison,” somebody says. “I will not drink the poison,” you respond. But you are not frightened of the poison. You know not to drink it.

The amplitude of fear that you are experiencing now on this plane is a release of fear that must come in order for the new to be born. We have talked in the past about a boil being lanced. We have spoken today of dust storms of change. The release of the old at the level of the collective has begun and will continue for some time. But once you understand that the process that is truly being engaged in is the process of resurrection, the Divine in expression in and as all things, you will begin to trust that where you stand, even when you cannot see the road before you, is perhaps where you need to be.

You may also claim this: “I am in my knowing. I am in the Upper Room. I know who I am. I know what I am. I know how I serve.” And the claim “I am free, I am free, I am free,” which releases you from the collective fear that you may have been bound by, will support liberation, not only for you, but all that you may know and see, as well.

We thank you for your presence. Indeed, this is in the text. Stop now, please.

DAY THIRTY-ONE

You ask questions about what might be, what you might know, what you might claim. You encourage us to offer you your potential. “Yes, it may be so. Yes, it may be known. Yes, it may be claimed.” And we ask you this in response. What if there were nothing to ask for? What if all things were known beyond a question? What would it mean to move into an agreement with Divine Mind, where what you thought you were seeking is present, and the questions were answered by nature of being?

To align at this level is not to be the wise one, but to become the innocent, the one reborn, the one re-known. It is not a man with many books behind him, nor is it a woman with her ideas of what should be, contemplating potential. It is a being of expression, the one who has come, who knows who she is, and consequently has aligned to the depth of being, the great well where all things are known. To become as the well, the ever-replenished well which holds all things, is to become the one you truly are. It is not a masquerade, nor is it a new identity claimed. It is the tree without the bark. It is the sun without your idea of the sun precluding its expression. It is Mary, it is John, it is Phyllis, it is George, as you say yes to the aspect of them that is indeed innocent, and is always divine, and seeks no name attached, no presence named. “Look at Phyllis, she is godlike.” “Look at George in his Divine Self.” Your experience of all simply is. You are not emblazoning meaning as much as releasing idea, and the ideas that you’ve attached to—what should be, what must be—are reclaimed in the innocence, the true innocence, of the Divine as being.

Now, you understand in some ways what knowledge is. “I am in my knowing” is a claim we have taught you. But it is not the small self acting on an idea of knowing. It is the depth or the well of knowing making itself known through you. The agreement that you are making with us is that you may be re-known, reclaimed, and consequently aligned to a level of recognition of truth where you stop distinguishing yourself as a separate being, but an aspect of or expression of the whole. It is at this level that alchemy commences, because the conversation you have engaged in—“that looks like a wall,” “that looks like a door,” “that looks like a window”—is replaced instead by the agreement to what is, as idea that can be re-known. “That is the idea of a door, the idea of a window.” The idea itself is what is recognized as construct, and, as construct is understood, what you begin to do is move to the alignment beyond the name and idea, and all things in all ways are perceived by you again in innocence. What would a door be, what would a window be, if you never knew the name, had not been taught what they meant? They would simply be. And in this being, this level of vibrational agreement, you may know door, truly know, truly profoundly agree to something beyond the small self.

Now, we use inanimate objects, ideas, to teach you a principle. But the reliance on the old—“show me the door,” “open the window”—are present for you in ways that you may begin to agree that they are ideas known in form. “This wall needs a door.” “This room requires a window.” And the alignment to these things, or the equation to the rational agreed-upon world, maintain you in a conversation with logic, with rationality, through the senses and through the ideas that have been named, given meaning, by those who came before you. But in the innocence of this teaching, the new eyes you see with, the ones that know themselves as of Source, can re-create anything seen in a higher alignment.

Now, what this means, Paul, is we are about to step you out, leave you out of the configured doorway, close the configured window, and let you read a book while we continue this teaching. He is not going to want to hear this. Once the idea of something is released, once the eyes that see them behold them in new ways—“Behold, I make all things new”—the equation in vibration transforms, and what comprises the doorway, what makes the window a window, can and will be re-known in a higher vibrational field. You understand ideas. An idea may be changed, you may change your mind, but you don’t understand that the rendering or manifestation of an idea can also be reclaimed and matter itself transformed, or, if you wish, transposed, to a higher level of vibration. You understand the idea of molten lava hardening to rock. You understand the idea of seed becoming sprout, then flowering or becoming tree. You understand the idea of infant expressing as adult through the passage of what you know of as time. But you don’t understand that it is the seed of the Divine that is being called forth in alchemy and re-known in a high equation, from the Upper Room, in the claim “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, the riverbed without the river may just be stone and mud. You understand the idea of riverbed. But you don’t understand that everything changes as it is re-known or renamed. And from the high room, the Upper Room, where the Kingdom is claimed and nothing is known in separation, the equation to the principle of manifestation is altered as well. Now, Paul is concerned. He imagines people conjuring. “Where is the water I may walk on, the water I may turn to wine?” And while these are true ideas—they are illustrations of what can be known through a level of mastery when an individual becomes Christ Mind, and therefore Creator, fully in expression—we wish you to understand the principle and the invocation of the claim “Behold, I make all things new” beyond the small self’s ideas of parading ability or showing others what the Divine Self can do. The Divine Self has no need to show others what she is, because she simply is. And you understand, at a version of identity, that the one who holds the dying man is participating in an act of love and agreement to being in release, but the one who holds the dying man and truly knows the dying man in love is transforming the dying man, and his death itself is re-known in a high octave. Now, this is an illustration you can begin to understand, but what you don’t yet understand is that you hold another in vibration in just such a way. Your arms are not required. “Behold, I make all things new” is less benediction than agreement to the manifest God, the first idea, the first tone or song sung into being.

If Paul were to stand before someone and invoke this claim, “Behold, I make all things new,” he would assume one thing—that his energetic field is supporting the other in a recognition of divinity, and that this is the conversation that is ensuing. He would be correct only on the most simplistic level. When one integrates the prior teachings that have claimed the Upper Room, the accord you hold, a-c-c-o-r-d, a-c-h-o-r-d as on a piano, is manifested beyond any idea that you may have known through prior agreement. What we are telling you is that when the Divine is invoked in fullness, the alignment of the individual who is seen in this way is repurposed or re-known in a true agreement to their innate self, or Divine Self.

Paul interrupts. “This sounds very wrong to me, as if we are doing something to someone that should require permission.” In fact, that is not so. You are operating in a higher agreement, the Upper Room itself, in accord with true will. And it is true will, high alignment in agreement, at this level, that claims the invocation “Behold, I make all things new.” And the individual is less changed than restored to his or her true nature.

Now, you cannot wish this into being. “I will claim ‘Behold, I make all things new’ to everyone I perceive as a villain.” If you are perceiving villains, you are not in the Upper Room and seeing with the eyes, in love, whoever stands before you. If you decide “Behold, I make all things new” means that those around you will behave as you wish, you are being foolhardy, because the True Self knows, and it is the small self who wishes others to be as she wishes them to be. The agreement to the Divine, the inherent implicit Divine, in a resurrected state is the claim “Behold, I make all things new.” And its manifestation is the Divine within the other reclaiming itself, because it has been aligned in a high way, witnessed in a high way, and sung into being. That is correct, Paul. Sung into being.

Now, while the language has been identified, “Behold, I make all things new” in invocation is a tonal attunement, in intention, sung into being or intoned by the Divine Self who lifts all things to the Kingdom. The claim “You are in the Upper Room” or “I see you in the Upper Room,” alchemical itself, is the lifting of another to the idea of Upper Room. And you do this in intention, less so through acting and speaking it, but from being at this level where you lift what you encounter by nature of being. The difference in the two claims—“I see you in the Upper Room” or “You are in the Upper Room” to the claim “Behold, I make all things new”—is very specific. The one who is in witness, as the Kingdom progresses and unfolds before you, is the one who claims all things in innocence with the eyes that have not been conditioned to deny the Divine. Because you are not denying the Divine, you become in agreement to the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” and the manifestation of this is re-articulation. Re-articulation is the tone of God, the initial principle or the Word, re-creating itself in acknowledgment of its true being. Anything you can name, be it toad, be it airplane, be it sky, be it sunset, be it male or female, may now be re-known as of the one tone that is itself its imprinting, its causation—the causation of sky, the causation of sunset, male, female, toad, all one tone in articulation or manifest with properties in agreement to what they need to be expressed as. The claim “Behold, I make all things new” claims all—underline all—as the one resonant tone, the one tone that is all things. And all things indeed respond, or are activated, and, as they are witnessed, realigned and transformed to the high octave of the Upper Room and made manifest within what we call the Kingdom.

Now, we have said prior that everything exists in multiple octaves or levels of intonation, that the Divine is inherent, but has been denied. What you do in these claims is you release the denial of the Divine, which was an illusion, an agreed-upon illusion to separation, and restore what is seen to its inheritance, indeed the Kingdom. And the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” the reclamation of Kingdom, in the mountains, in the seas, the lowest valley, the deepest despair, highest joy, the reclamation of the Divine upon this land claims it as the promised land, the Kingdom, the omnipresence of God as all things.

Re-articulation happens instantaneously in the high realm, because everything already expresses in the high realm. The act of things being restored to it, becoming re-known, often require the alchemical process of release. Paul is feeling cold energy around him. He is releasing things that are very old to the ideas that are being re-known through this teaching. The release of an idea must also impart the release of the structure that the idea has been party to the creation of. So if Paul transforms the idea of small self, the idea of infirmity, the idea of ill health, he may transcend or release the attachment he has procured through self-identification through the old ideas. So the passage for some is in equivalency to re-knowing what is always so, releasing what pretends to be. For others, it is instantaneous because the release is such, the denial of God in release is such, that restoration to true identity, true inheritance, is immediate.

Now, we teach you as you hold the vibration. To claim “Behold, I make all things new” to what you see before you is not sanctioning change. You are not overpowering a thing seen with the properties of divinity. You are reclaiming what is seen to its inherent divinity, and how an individual releases and uplifts herself through these claims is no business of yours. You understand this, yes. The Divine is the actor, the one who acts, the one who re-creates. The Divine who has come as you is the initiator. You are not there to put the finishing touches on what you wish to prepare for the unfoldment for another. You are there to claim, and to be as the claim you make. And the claim you are making, “Behold, I make all things new,” the true invocation of the Divine re-knowing itself as form—and underline this, all form—brings you to the stage where innocence in what you see, and the agreement to the Divine in what you see, are not only one and the same, but what allows for you to know yourself most fully as an instrument and expression of God, and all that is as of God, in agreement.

We sing your song for you so that you may learn the words. And on this day we claim for each of you and support you in your own awakening in these words:

You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come. Behold, I make all things new.

Accept the gift. Say yes, if you wish.

This is in the text. Indeed, the end of the chapter. Yes, you may call it “Behold, I Make All Things New.” Stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

7

A NEW REVELATION

DAY THIRTY-TWO

When you stand before us as you truly are, we see you as you can only be seen—in your beauty, your perfection, and in your true alignment and knowing of the being you are as of God. Now, of God must be understood. It means not separate from, but of the whole—the finger to the hand, the lips to the face. The idea of self as of God, your emanation is of Source, has always been, will always be. In a diminished state, you have operated in agreement to conform to what is before you, that which has been shrouded in fear. But in an elevated state, from the vibratory accord that indeed is the Upper Room, the manifestation of the Divine is heralded through you. A new day is made through you.

Now, the consequence of this level of occupation of the Upper Room as who you are is deeply significant. Those who abide here, in a resonant field of love, become love, and the expression of love that transmutes darkness reclaims all things as of itself, and the denial of the Divine, the only issue you really face as a civilization, as a species, is rectified through the act of reclamation. To be reclaimed in the light is to be seen fully, and the shame you have held, born in the denial of the Divine, the rage you feel, again the denial of the Divine, is actually transposed so that you may be sung perfectly. To be sung perfectly simply means you are in tandem with the true note, the Word, the foundation of all expression, the Word indeed made flesh as each of you contributes to the new song that is being sung on this manifest plane.

Now, Paul gets concerned when we appropriate language that he believes is religious. It frightens him because it carries weight. But our intention has always been the reclamation of this language so it may be understood and then applied for all human beings. The Christ has come as all, the manifestation of the Divine as all. And the song of the Divine, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” creates an escalation in the energetic field of this plane and lifts you and all things to what you know of as a higher experience of expression. The manifestation of this is now ongoing, and the tumult you see in most ways is the release of the denial of the Divine, which exposes it for what it has always been.

Now, some of you believe there must be a leveling of all things. You must arise from the ashes of your prior creations. And we will say this is not so. But what you must do is remain present for these times, to be the light and contribute to the reclamation that is happening now and will continue for quite some time. Things need not be burned or destroyed, but they may release the forms they have taken and the ways they have been known. And, indeed, for many that may seem ruinous. But it is just the beginning, it is just the husk being stripped from the corn, the seed breaking open, the caterpillar finally emerging as the butterfly after this process of reconciliation with True Self, true nature, has progressed to a level where it is pronounced. What the Kingdom is, as we often say, is the realization of the Divine in the physical form in all things that can be seen or claimed from the Upper Room. And the True Self there is active, not only as an organism, but as a being in an act of re-creation.

Now, the embodiment of the Divine as each of you is an active state of expression. The claim “I know how I serve,” the realized being in expression, will not deny God, or cannot, in anyone or anything. The refusal of the Divine is an act of the lower vibrational field, and anyone who would teach you that true spirituality involves damning another is refuting the Divine in that statement. It cannot be so. But the reconciliation of matter and Spirit or substance and God in an articulated state, the alchemical act of re-creation, is what you will now undergo in order to offer it to all you encounter. Some of you may say, “I want the old, still. I like my job. I like the life I’ve created. I don’t want things to change.” You may like anything you wish. There is no need to release what you like. Your personality has benefit to you. Your predilections to this or that may be things you learn from. They remain as you require them. But the light that you are reclaims all things, and the substance of your expression must now change too.

We are going to speak to Paul for a moment, because he has concerns about health and well-being. The escalation of vibration that you are now attending to is attempting to be processed through the form that you have taken. You are withstanding much change, more than you can see. And you must understand that how the form responds is in agreement to both the old and the new, until the new is fully claimed. In other words, you understand form through the image in the mirror, you understand well-being through prior prescription, but as the new is claimed through you, the identity you hold is in schism. “I know I am a divine being, but I don’t think this is what a divine being should look like.” It is the thinking that is at issue, and the idea of self, through the old idea of what should be, that claims you in shadow. When the two states coincide—“I know who I am as I truly am, and I think I know what I’ve been as I have known it”—you are in an imbalance that for most is part of the process of re-creation. The highest way to attend to these things is through supplication and offering of each aspect of self to the Divine that expresses through you, which must include health and well-being.

Now, while the claim “I am Word through my body, Word I am Word” will support identity in form and an acclimation to the frequency of embodiment, the manifestation of embodiment comes in a different way. The removal of the obstacles to well-being, perhaps not what you would suspect they are, perhaps creations made by you in fear and unknowing, ways of protecting the self, ways of shielding the self from an emotional life that was distorted or born in turmoil, these ways of being must become reconciled through this process of re-identification and, indeed, re-articulation. So supplication here, which is the offering of every aspect of self, inclusive of form, is beneficial to you, because then the small self does not decide how it should look, how it should occur, and what it should look like as a finished product.

For anyone who is on this path, there will be ways of knowing the self in distortion that are re-seen in perfection, re-known without blame, and reconsidered beyond what the small self would have decided was the meaning of something. “My father had a temper. My mother was overbearing. My brother competed with me. This is why I am as I am.” These are ways of knowing self through prior identification that are lessened, first, and then finally re-seen, because even your understanding of psychology is predicated on outlines or subjective opinions that you seek to attach identity to. “Oh, this must be my problem, and this must be the solution,” says the small self in her efforts to improve.

Here we go again, friends. We wish to bring you higher to a level of reconciliation in a practical manner as the one who beholds the Kingdom. And in this text there will be several stages of acclimation. We are taking you to the second one now, which is indeed appreciation for everything that you have encountered, every moment of any incarnation, re-seen through a lens of agreement to the Divine. If every instance of your life has brought you to this moment, if every lifetime you have known yourself in has colluded to this precious moment of awakening, there is no fear, there is no blame, and there is no need to blot out an idea, pretend something didn’t happen, or burn someone at the stake for what you would have them have been or done to you.

The offering now is not just memory, but the encoding of memory as you have known it, not only in your experience, but in the collective agreement to what history is. Your understanding of dates and times, the important events of a country or world, are known by you through collective agreement, perhaps filtered by culture. But all memory, at this level, is inherited wisdom, inherited information, and inherited idea. When you move to your personal life and expression, you move to an agreement that every encounter you have had with anyone or anything must be to benefit, at some level, your comprehension of self, or your relationship, not only to others, but to Source as well. To understand that every memory is now operating beyond the old, or reclaimed beyond distortion, the small self’s filter, will in fact reclaim every aspect of you as a new being. There is nothing wrong with memory. You remember your honeymoon, your child’s first birthday, the wonderful first kiss with your beloved. You remember these things well. But you have been scarred in other ways by other identifications—“that terrible attack,” “those terrible losses,” “the public shaming,” whatever they have been for you. And you wear these memories in the energetic field and in the body itself, because memory resides, not only in body, but in the vibrational field. You are not losing memory. You are releasing distortion. And you are relying upon the new to reclaim you beyond the codified ways you have been indoctrinated to believe a self to be. And we say a self intentionally. Even the idea of separation, which you have so agreed to, is a manifestation of a collective agreement to know self through separation. But since it’s just an idea that has been made so through form in agreement to an experience, even this may be re-known in perpetuity.

We sing your song for you now. And as we sing for you now, we will agree to you at a level of vibration where memory itself may become illumined. Memory itself, the ideas of what was, may be re-shapened, may be reconsidered, and indeed made new. We will say these words for you first, and we say this to you from the high place where this may be made so:

On this day we claim that all who hear these words, read these words, know these words, will move into a progression of re-articulation where all memory must be reconsidered, re-known, re-seen, and delivered to the Divine for reconciliation.

If you can imagine a river running through you now, running through the energetic field and the body itself, and the purpose of the river is to redeem self beyond false idea, false consideration, false memory, the need to be right, the need to decide what was to convey an idea of self that feels sanctified, if you agree to this and allow the river to become God, you align yourself now in the majesty of re-creation. And you may say this now to both the body and the energetic structures that comprise the energetic field, to be re-known beyond all memory, beyond all decision of what was, so that all aspects of self may be delivered to the highest amplitude that you may know yourself through. You may say this now, first to the body:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

And now you may say this to the subtle bodies that comprise the energetic field:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

And now you may say this to any impediment or any attachment from others’ memories of you or designs for you that would claim you in agreement to their memory in a way that would claim you through separation:

“Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, this agreement to become manifest in this light comes at only one cost—any lie you have known that you have been in agreement to through memory, yours or others, individual or collective. And this must include all agreement to the belief in separation, all agreement that you could be separate from Source and not the extension of it or the expression of it in perfect ways. As you say these words, please understand what you are invoking:

“I am gifted with the opportunity now to be re-known in union, in body and in field. And all memory of separation or belief in separation may be lifted, may be reclaimed by the light in perfect ease, in perfect ways, in agreement to my true nature, my true inheritance, and my right to express as it. I know who I am in truth. I know what I am in truth. I know how I serve in truth. I Have Come. I Have Come. I Have Come.”

And now we say this for each of you, each who stands before us in their perfection, in their willingness to be known. You have never been separate. You never will be. You’ve had an experience of it, you have learned through it, and if indeed you are willing, we will turn the page to the next chapter of your experience of being, beyond separation.

We thank you each for your presence. Indeed, this is in the text. Stop now, please.

DAY THIRTY-THREE

Where you stand today, know it or not, is at a cliff of sorts, a precipice, and a great opportunity to fly. Now, when one knows who he is, there is no fear of the cliff, nor of the precipice. It becomes opportunity for experience, for re-knowing, re-seeing all things that lie before you. When you understand that this is an opportunity for realization, every step you take confirms it, becomes the opportunity for the next new idea to be born in the place of the old, each new idea the confirmation of the Divine where the old has been present, where the sense of lack has been present, where the denial of God has announced itself, now to be re-seen, reclaimed, as the Kingdom unfolds.

The unfolding of the Kingdom, the idea that the manifest world may be re-known and reclaimed in high order, is the teaching of the day. And the announcement of presence—“God Is, God Is, God Is,” which is the song one sings as one takes each step, sees each thing anew, and creates equivalency or vibrational accord with the manifest world—is the gift one gives when one knows who she is, and it is a gift of expression and, finally, being. Everything you have ever known, ever believed to be true, known through old equivalency, has moored you to the ideas of history. And on this day, in the release of memory, the release of what was, the new not only unfolds, but comes to greet you in song—“I Am, I Am, I Am,” the Divine as all things singing back to you, claiming itself in its unfoldment. The path you will now walk, from here on in, is the path of the Creator.

Now, when we say these words, he gets confused and worried about the true meaning. “We are of the Creator. We are not the Creator.” In fact, what you become, the expression of the Creator, the announcement of being that claims all things new, is the high act of creation, not born in the idea of the small self’s will, but in the agreement to the higher. And the song you are expressing, Paul, now, know it or not, and all of the students here, who have attended to these teachings well, is the gift of the presence of the Creator in every opportunity. “What does that mean?” he asks. Every opportunity, every moment itself, becomes a moment of a new idea. Imagine a flower, always unfolding, its petals always unfurling. You are as the flower, always in unfoldment, and your expression the beautiful scent of the flower confirming itself in all you encounter. As the flower unfolds, as the scent permeates, the Kingdom is known in manifestation. This is the key to the teaching. In manifestation means that you are not supposing that the Divine is present in what you see. You are acknowledging the truth of it, knowing it as so, in spite of anything you would pretend to be contrary to it. “It will be so,” the Divine as present, and your acclimation to the Kingdom and to the Divine in all, is what supports this unfoldment.

Each reckoning you have with an aspect of self that has been put in shadow, each trial you have experienced on this way to the Upper Room, each life you’ve lived that has been supporting this benediction, “Behold, I make all things new,” will now be re-known in one utterance, one announcement, one true claim made known through all things. And, again, the claim “God Is, God Is, God Is,” not benediction, but revelation—the revealing of God where it has been presupposed not to be, the expression of God where it has been denied made manifest, yes—is not only the action of this text, but the action of your expression. Revelation, you see, the revealing of the innate Divine, must become concretized in the manifest world.

This moment of standing at this cliff, at this precipice, is the willingness to fully integrate all that we have taught you so that you may continue to learn, not through our words, but through your expression, each encounter, each opportunity to know God—and underline know, it means realize—in all circumstance. Each day becomes the opportunity to claim all things new. Each day becomes the opportunity to claim “God Is.” And each day becomes the opportunity to lift this world to the high octave so that it may unfurl, just as you are, as a flower, in continual unfoldment, in continual awareness of divine presence.

Each octave, you see, that may be known by a human being has alignment attached to it, and the alignment we bring you to, “I am in the Upper Room,” reclaims you in energetic coherence. But the manifestation of this coherence goes beyond your sight, goes beyond your idea of what can be. It simply unfolds, God unfolding as itself, the omnipotent one, the great tone, the great song of being, in manifold expression. Every day becomes the opportunity, not only to bear witness, but to reclaim and reveal the inherent divinity in the manifest world, and indeed in circumstance, because Paul just asked, “Does this inform circumstance?” When you understand that circumstance is outpicturing of idea, and even circumstance is named, called what it has been, for you to comprehend it, you will begin to understand that the coherence you hold now, the alchemist you have become, can translate anything and everything to its inherent perfection. It does not mean you are stopping the violence that you may witness. It means you are re-knowing all and everything in the Upper Room. So the coherence there, which translates as other than it has been, renounces the old, releases the old, and in fact defies the old, because in love there is no fear.

Now, you are not overriding others’ will. You are not deciding what it will be through the old lens. It is the Divine that witnesses, without fear, without judgment, and in agreement only to itself. Again, the Divine in agreement to itself. The level of oscillation of any encounter is altered by the one who has come at this level. You cannot pretend to be here. It is announced through you, less by you as you would wish, but through expression. “I know how I serve.” And its manifestation may often be well beyond what you would prescribe or assume could even be so. You understand that the waters may be stilled, the skies may open. You understand and comprehend the manifest world as vibration. And you are not superseding it. You are simply agreeing to it from the high accord of the one who has come, and now can claim his or her true inheritance. The Kingdom, you see, is your right being, in right expression. And right does not make other things wrong. It simply means agreed upon from this level of alignment. And the teachings you have received, and will continue to, about this accord must now be known as present and manifest.

We would invite you each to see one thing in your life with new eyes, new accord, from the Upper Room. It may be anything, situationally, physically, anything that has been seen in the old that can now be seen anew. And if you understand that this thing that is being seen by you is of God, you have taken the first step to this translation. And from the Upper Room, when you say these words, “It will be so; Behold, I make all things new,” your re-creation through alignment of the thing witnessed will claim you in a new alignment to the thing seen. When the thing seen is transformed, your relationship to it and even its history may be transposed to be sung in the Upper Room.

The equivalency here, the simple fact that the one that is one is in agreement to the one in all, should support your understanding here. You are denying separation, not through effort, but through unification. You are singing the song of freedom, not through denying the old, but because the old does not express here. And the lifting that occurs, not only for you but what you encounter, holds itself in alignment to the one note, the true note, sung as all things.

This will be the end of this teaching for the day. When we meet you tomorrow or thereafter, we will sing to you about the Divine that has come as all things and seeks to recognize you as of itself. Period. Period. Period.

Q: I’m still questioning what happens to event, what happens to matter? I mean they’re saying things like the sea can be still, the clouds can part. Is that what we’re doing? What is the real affect? They asked everybody to choose something in their life to work with, so I just am wondering what does that do? I’m going to go in and ask since I, Paul, just posed the question.

A: We would like to answer this, thank you. This is revelation. We will continue this teaching tomorrow. When something is revealed or seen or known anew, it is transformed. And the claim “Behold, I make all things new” is the authoritative statement to claim this into being. When it is claimed in dominion by one who knows who she is, from the Upper Room or this level of equivalency, manifestation changes. You are limiting yourself, Paul. You are also limiting us in your confusion. Please do not. When we tell you that the water can be turned to wine, we are actually teaching truth. It is not that you will do this, but that is the act of one who knows what matter is, and can reclaim it in an altered form. Underline altered. Because energy is always present and it cannot be decided against, it must be transformed. It will not be eliminated. It is matter. It is tone. It is vibration. It will always be there, but can be known in a higher way. Now, you understand alchemy as a spiritual principle, first and foremost, because that is why we instruct it this way. It is a spiritual principle. It is not trying to make gold out of other substance. It’s about re-knowing what is as of Spirit that has been condensed or limited in lower vibration through language, name, and history, the meaning things have been given. You understand that the pumpkin was turned into a coach in the fairytale. That was alchemy. In fact, the pumpkin and the coach are of one vibration, but one who knows what vibration is can actually translate it to a higher accord. Now, some of you say to us, “But that is use of will. You are fixing or changing things.” And that would be true in a lower octave. The magician seeks to do these things. But the one who has incarnated in the higher octave of, indeed, the Upper Room is not a magician in this way. Because will has been unified in high equivalency, the statement he will make, this alchemist will make, will be in alignment to truth. So you are not trying to get things. You are not trying to fix things. You are simply seeing what is always true. And if manifestation occurs through these claims of witness, you will see what is true and is of God that can express in the Upper Room. If you understand, very simply, that the teaching here is not one of obedience to what you have been taught prior, but liberation to what is always true, you will stop limiting the teaching and, in fact, sing its song to begin to have its experience. Paul interrupts. “Is this part of the teaching of the day?” If you wish to append it to the teaching, you may. It is of explanation. But perhaps we will attend to these words in a different way when we speak again to you next. Period. Period. Period.

Q: The part that I am wondering about that has come up for me is as I make things new, as I am more of the Creator in participation with matter around me, how does the collective shape what happens? My experience as an individual in unity and then the collective’s decisions that feed into the unity is still something that I don’t know how to think about.

A: You’re lifting it. You’re lifting the collective in resolution to true nature and true identity. Again, please don’t limit the teaching. You are not separate from it. You are singing to it, and claiming it with you. The teaching of union is a broadcast of vibration. It is not a doctrine. It is not what you should do. It’s how you be. And your being or presence in relation to the collective must inform the collective. You must see yourself as participating in the collective, but from a higher vantage point. You will not lift them from the level of indoctrination that they have come to. You cannot. It will not be done. But you can rise above and sing to them. Paul is seeing the image of a fishnet gathering thousands of fish. In some ways that is appropriate. But you are not fishers of men, and you are not the net. What you are doing is lifting, reclaiming, revealing what is always so, and that is the act of expression, and, in fact, finally, the true meaning of the teaching “I know how I serve.” Period.

Q: I wanted to ask about acts of violence, because I gleaned at some point that there are different distinctions, and the question specifically is I’m in an environment where I kill mosquitoes and also, when I pull ticks off me, deer ticks, which I do almost every day, I kill them. And I wanted to know what they have to say about that.

A: Well, you’re choosing it, and indeed there are ramifications. They are subtle ones, but it’s really much more about how you experience life. And any diminishment of life, we would have to say, has manifestation. It changes the way you see the world. We’re not saying don’t kill the flea that is biting your baby in the crib. Protect your baby. But also understand that you are sanctifying life, both by self-protection and the choice, in this case, to release the vermin which can harm you. You are acting in your own behalf on this level. When you kill an animal, in fact you diminish life, but the animal itself is eternal, as you are, and its vibration will continue onward in some other form. You think that only what is alive, in form, as you know form, is holy. In fact the vibration that informs form, that creates form, is what is truly sanctified. Everything else is a temporary vessel. Now, you may choose to eat meat. You may choose to not. You may kill the fly. You may escort it out the window, if you are able. You don’t have to be frightened of these choices. But, ultimately, we would suggest, when you think of something as disposable, as not important, you decrease importance. And the claim “All is holy, all is holy, all is holy” will support your higher awareness.

Paul: Well, I guess that means you can kill the flea, but know that you’re doing it, you’re choosing it.

A: Know that you’re choosing it. Most of what you do you do without thought, unconsciously. If you are going to kill it, know that you are killing it, if that is the choice that you are making. You don’t have to make it an evil choice. But it’s very different than pretending it’s not doing what it is.

Q: I do want to go one step further on the killing-of-the-fly thing, because I’m curious. When I do choose things like that, I do pray and I affirm my oneness with the creature, and that might just be for my own comfort, or is that actually an Upper Room choice that makes a difference?

A: It does make a difference. In fact, you are blessing it in this act. You are knowing its oneness. Now, the Divine Self that knows itself as eternal knows eternal life in all things. It’s the aspect of you that knows you will outgrow form that is frightened of death that is challenged by these teachings. He interrupts. “We’re still killing something. Is this wrong or right?” You make it right or wrong by your act and the consciousness that informs the act. If you bless the meal before you, if you bless the chicken that is going to be killed and cooked, you’re recognizing the inherent Divine and being grateful for its substance. When you kill a mouse that is squeaking in the corner and you could have thrown it out the window, you’ve made the choice to kill unnecessarily. “But do we kill animals?” he says. “Should we stop eating meat?” Again, the should. You can stop eating meat and contributing to the carnage that has invested this plane in cruelty. The hunter who kills his dinner is taking full accountability for his act. He sees the blood, he carries the carcass, he skins it, he cuts it, and then he eats it. The entire process is one of agreement to the act done. It is in choice, and perhaps in high choice. If you would not eat the cow that you killed yourself, perhaps you should look at why you eat meat, because you are pretending that you are not party to its death. Indeed, you are. You are just not looking at the carnage. Period. Period. Period.

Q: So if you wouldn’t kill it yourself, ask why you’re eating it?

A: That’s correct.

DAY THIRTY-FOUR

When you ask questions about what will be and you reference history, you itemize potential from probabilities once known. When you say, “I am here,” in this present moment, in agreement to all that is, what you encounter is the new, because the new unfolds before you. When you know who and what you are, when the claim is made by you, “I am free, I am free, I am free,” when you are releasing the old, claiming the new, and encountering the Divine in every footstep, you participate in a great act of re-creation that will be occurring on this plane for some time to come.

Re-creation, you see, a new alignment, prospers you, reclaims you, in accord with the benefits of the Kingdom. And the benefits of the Kingdom, because there is no denial of God, is a release from fear, born in lack, and born in negotiating outcomes from the old list of probabilities—“good outcome,” “bad outcome,” as you would reference them from prior experience. Now, we are not taking away your lives or your experiences. You continue to learn through all things you wish. But the monitoring here in the higher octave, the notes that comprise the high octave, will always support you and leave you in agreement to the Source of manifestation so you are no longer confused by what you see through the old data. “Behold, I make all things new.” The new is revealed through the utterance and agreement to the Divine that has, indeed, come.

Now, we will say this to Paul about this teaching as it relates to your life. You are actually experiencing this, and you know that you are, and you want it to be what you want it to be, which is a list of things that you think you require. But if you will look at these times, every need has been met in perfect order and will continue to be through this level of alignment. Your first glimpse of what it means to reside here in participation to a new world being created is upon you now. And, as we said, each step is taken and the known is presented in its perfect way, and by known we mean realized—the realization of the Divine in occurrence, in agreement, and, indeed, in manifestation.

Now, you still seek to justify what you’ve known, through hardship, through fear, through appeals to God to give you what you think you should have, and it’s no longer going to operate that way. The vestiges of the old, the habituated behavior, will linger for some time. But if you can understand that you are focusing on the fish tank, the murky water of the fish tank which you have known yourself in, instead of lifting your eyes to the beauty that is before you, to the splendor of the Divine in the great sea of vibration, you will understand that the emphasis you know through placement upon the old is what renders you in agreement to it. You can be in a wonderful place and focus on the one thing that claims you in disregard.

Now, once habituated behavior is released, or no longer a requirement for one’s sense of safety and being, the release is immediate. When you’re no longer saying, “I should be frightened by this, I should be very worried about that,” when the idea of what should be, even how stimuli should provoke you through the old monitoring, the liberation ensues. At this level of vibration, freedom is present because you even understand that every action you take is in awareness of union, and to be in union indeed is to be free. The will has been aligned in a higher order, seeks to claim itself through every act and every encounter. This does not mean, Paul, that you are not enjoying your life, the pleasures of the senses. It means the pleasures of the senses are even heightened because your alignment now is to omnipresence, that which claims all things, informs all things.

Do you have good days and bad days? Of course, indeed you do. You are still having human experience—but not in the way you have known. You are no longer compartmentalizing aspects of the self, and the idea of a spiritual life being a vocation or a thing done is completely replaced by the act of being. The act of being, at this level, is the spiritual life. It requires no name, no codified entry, no specific way of prayer. You simply are in alignment with what is. And you are not negotiating this. You are in it, and of it, and an expression of it.

“Now, what happens to identity at this level?” you may be asking. If your name is Alice, it’s still Alice. If you are Paul, you are Paul. And while indeed the Divine has become these things, or aligned to them, the fabric of your expression becomes such that even the name you carry, a way of being known, is simply something that is, not something that must be invested in.

“I will be a better Paul,” “a finer Alice.” The Divine has expressed through the being you are to the level of identification, where you become of it and as it in a unified state.

“But we still know ourselves as separate, yes?” Again, the finger to the hand. It is an extension of it, of course of it and participatory to it, but you don’t call the finger the palm. The finger and the palm are both of God, perfect expressions of God, and you are in tandem with it while maintaining identity. Now, for some of you this means you get to release any idea of what it should be or must look like in your high state. “In my high state, I am prayerful, I am wonderful. I do what I wish in the awareness of God.” Well, that is so, up to a point, but here is the truth. You are simply being, and knowing, and responding to knowing. It is the vibrational field that is ensuing reclamation and participatory to the act of re-creation, which is the foundation of this teaching, the Word as all things and reclaimed as such in dominion.

How do you participate in this, but by agreement or accord. Now, if you see a spiderweb on a window, you may remove it, or you may see it and say, “That is there. Indeed, it will be.” You are claiming the Divine. You are not precluding action, or deciding what action should be. The alignment you hold becomes the directive.

“How do we know if we are doing this?” you are asking. Because there will be no question. When you stand in the sunlight and you feel the sun beating upon you, there is no question to the experience of it. When you begin operating in your knowing at this level of agreement, you are not questioning. You may be inquiring, pursuing things, in an availability to logic. But inquiry, in this case, is simply saying yes to the methodology of something. You are not trying to be. If you have an injured right hand, you open the window with your left. Perhaps that is the level of inquiry. You are not inquiring whether or not to open the window. Indeed, you know.

Now, questioning of this teaching is indeed welcomed. And you will have them, many questions, as your path unfolds. But the first thing that you must understand about the path that you have undertaken—the path of the mystic, if you wish, or the one who is no longer contributing to the mayhem on this plane that you have known yourself through, but instead bringing light and peace—the questions you will ask in your own experience will be of a different kind. “How am I being?” And you will understand quickly. If the old resonant field, the desire to act in fear, the temptation to hurt or criticize or cause pain, which cannot express in the Upper Room, when these occur you understand what you must do. Because you have come, and because you know, the ability to transform even those ways of being can and will become immediate.

Many people now are fearful of the possibility of what comes when the unknown has become so pronounced that you no longer know what you can attach to, what will provide safety, which in this case is certainty. And as a result of this some are building totems, ways of claiming the world from a perch that will give them a sense of control. Others are saying, “Bring me underground, let me hide from outcomes, let me see the world in an insular way so I need not participate in any great changes that may befall us.” You, of course—all of you, of course—are doing something rather different. You are abiding in the Upper Room to lift all you encounter, because you know, and indeed you realize, that at this level the certainty that you are encountering is the eternal.

Now, finally, the claim “I know what I am,” the manifest self that can be in agreement with the manifest in all, can lift all things known in form through co-resonance, must be understood as an agreement that has been made. Underline this. You have made the agreement, and the resonant field is only seeking to support the agreement so that form itself may indeed be re-known. How you encounter the manifest world from wherever you sit now, how you perceive a world with new eyes in the claim “Behold, I make all things new,” is as the True Self, who is not asking, but knowing, who is not fearing, but realizing. And the realization of the Divine, in the darkest corner, in the most bitter feud, in the height of confusion, is to bring peace to what is encountered.

You understand ideas about peace, and you still think of peace as the cessation of war. But as long as your peace is in equivalency to something else not being present, you are still embattled. “We will have peace until there is war.” We have offered the illustration prior, that until you lift beyond the need for war you will have war, must be understood now in light of these teachings. From the Upper Room, where there is no fear, where you are not claiming fear, you have lifted above the predicaments, untangled the self from the predicaments, and re-known yourself as beyond them. It is this lifting, this great lifting to the new, that is undertaken now in the highest way. The claim again, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” in the face of what you see, the reclamation of the promise of the Divine, the true nature of the Divine, “It will be so,” and the re-articulation of matter that must ensue as you come from the higher, is not so much the remedy to war, but what claims you well beyond it. When the consciousness of this plane is able to align to the promise of peace, the true knowing of peace, and the experience of peace, each of you here will know yourself in agreement to a new landscape.

Paul interrupts. “I understand the principle, but I live in a world with war. Because I abide in the Upper Room, I am pretending there is no war?” In fact, the opposite is true. You are claiming the Upper Room, which is always in peace, upon what has been known as war. You are reclaiming it, revealing even the act of war to be a depiction, an enactment, of an idea that is born in separation. As you are reunited, you become the reunitor. As you are lifted, you become the act of lifting. As you are loving, as you become love, you transcend all obstacles.

Now, the body you’ve known yourself through will remain in coherence to the physical realm. You chose to incarnate here. But your experience of the physical realm and the realization of the Divine in form and field is the act of re-knowing and reclamation. And the mandate for this—and we say mandate intentionally, because in your realization you reclaim—is that God’s will will be done. “It will be so.” It will be known. It will be revealed. It will be sung, and sung in a high note, even if the high note requires the old to disassemble.

The challenges an individual faces at this level of the journey perhaps are not what you expect. You have aligned, yes, but you have agreed to levels of experience for your individual soul’s learning that will continue—how you are with a partner, how you are with your children. And the old ways of being and habituated ways of knowing are encountered by you, finally, again, as opportunity. This does not diminish what you’ve learned. In fact, it teaches you that the learning is ongoing. Imagine you always thought that one word meant one thing, and then suddenly you realize there are other definitions beyond any that you knew. This is in some ways what you will now encounter, because the old ways of defining—and this is true for all now—are being released so that the new may be born.

When you encounter violence, it is always known in fear. When you reclaim the Divine in the face of violence, you are lifting what you see beyond appearance to the true nature of the Divine wherein peace may reside. When you know your lover as of God, she stops being your lover, but the perfect expression of God that you love. When you see anyone or anything as your lover, you are in the same agreement. The idea of who and what you should be has been shed. The pod releases the seed, the seed itself in new growth, the alignment you’ve taken in expression, again anew, reclamation at the cost of the old. You have become who you have always been without the small self’s ideas acting to preclude it.

We are here for each of you, as you wish us. And as we continue this text we wish to teach you about accountability in the Upper Room, what you are indeed accountable to, through your acts, through your thinking, and through this idea of lack, of separation, which you are going to know as experiential.

We thank you for your presence. We will stop now, please. Period. Period. Period.

DAY THIRTY-FIVE

We ask you questions now. Who do you think you are? What do you think you are becoming? How do you access this information? Through what template? How do you understand yourself, and through what means? To release the idea of self, as you have known self, to agree to the higher requires you to release the ideas of assessment through the old means—the comprehension of who and what you are through statistics, through outlines, through the understanding others hold of who you are, based on their preconceptions or outlines or ideas of what should be. When you move to the new, you are actually moving to a higher template, and one that expresses free from the fear that has been accrued in the lower vibrational field.

On this day we intend to give you permission to claim who you are in a higher way and in a fuller way, a more realized way than you have thus done. We do this for you and with you, because the key to this is the acknowledgment of the agreement that you have already made, through prior claim, yes, the attunements we have offered you, but also through this: the realization of the Monad as expressed in all ways through the idea of self. Underline the idea of self. To express the Monad, or the Divine Self, the Christ, if you prefer, through the idea of self is to acclimate at every level to the vibrational field that does not store means or ways of self-identifying through the old rules, and consequently the limited abilities that the small self has accrued. When you release the small self’s idea of who and what she is, when you are aligned fully beyond any idea that the small self has utilized to get his or her way, which is always in separation, to a unified way of being, when you comprehend wholeness beyond separation, you have become one. The means of knowing, the ways of identifying, have moved to high agreement, high accord. And beyond the old the new is made seen, revealed, comprehended, and witnessed by you, because the idea of self in diminished state has not only been refuted, but re-known, agreed to, in perfection.

Now, he hates that word. “We are not perfect. We do our best.” But indeed you are perfect, Paul, as are you all. The realization of innate perfection does not mean you don’t have a blemish on your chin, need spectacles to see. Innate perfection at this level is a high agreement to the unfolding of the Monad in its perfect state, as and through you, and for the benefit of all. As you become the well, the ever-replenished well, you may drink fully because you are as the water, and you may support others because you know the supply of the light. The True Self is infinite, without boundary, and unconcealed so that it may be seen. So many of you who have utilized these teachings remain shrouded, keep yourself in limitation, poverty, if you wish, of realization, because of the fear of actually being witnessed in totality. You think it means something that it does not. You are not being burned at the stake, nailed to a cross, run out of town, asked to walk the gangplank for being who you truly are, because the who that you truly are at this level of realization does not announce itself, does not seek acclaim, does not ask to be known as the light she has become, because she is the light, because there is nothing to ask. And the being at this level, the expressed being at this level, the action of this text in its entirety, is the realization of the Christ as may be known in form for the express purpose of claiming the Kingdom, or a new world, into manifestation. When you are not shrouded, when you are not in a box, an old box of identity, when you are no longer seeking to refute the small self because the small self has been assumed in a higher state, the expression in unification and the mandate of it, “Behold, I make all things new,” claims the oscillation of the vibrational field in everything you see in a higher octave.

If you can imagine the symbol of a flower growing as you walk, you would understand the metaphor. The material world of anything and everything is actually re-known by presence at this level. You are not magicians. You are not raising the dead. You have become the tone, the finite one tone of God that has expressed as you and realizes itself in all things. Again, underline all. The confusion for some of you will be that you idealize past perceptions of what is good, what is not good, and you seek to find the good to confirm your idea of the Godhead in manifestation. But in fact it happens rather differently. When the template is changed, the identity replenished, made new, beyond the old boundaries or systems of decision, “how I know good or bad,” you are witnessing something very different. You are witnessing an octave of vibration in shape and form. You are seeing God as sound, as color, beyond the small self’s projections. You still know what a teapot is. You know where you left your shoes. But the experience of expression in a field is no longer limited by past agreement to what should be and how it should be known. That is how things are made new. And the idea of who and what you are, the True Self as manifest, claiming all things by nature of presence, is in fact the Kingdom in response to your being.

Now, the Kingdom has always been here. Everything operates in multiple octaves. You are simply being in the high octave, and it is the octave itself that raises the old, lifts the old, to its coherence with you in this higher way. There is no effort at all, there is simply being, and what you are accountable to, as always, is your level of tone. When the temptation comes still, as it may, to denounce the light, find refuge in a dark place, you know the way through it—the reclamation of the True Self that is as you and has been sung and knows its true name. When you reach this level that we are attempting to teach you, where identity itself and every idea of identity has been reclaimed, you are still operative as a human being, but without the guise, without the shielding, without the need to hide the light that you are finally expressing. Once you come here in fullness—and in recognition of this fullness the final claim, “I know who I am,” as manifest in completeness—you have lifted beyond fear.

Now, the human self, still present, still operative, still learning in its own ways, has agreed to this transition. You are working together, of Spirit and in form, in remarkable stead. The amplitude of language, when spoken or invoked from the Upper Room, will change all things because you will speak things into being. “What does that mean?” he asks. It means that you are accountable to your language, to your acts, and to your thoughts, because you have become creative at a level of vibration where what you think may be invoked, and what you speak may be called into being. It is a level of vibrational accord, as in Source in a unified state, where what is needed is simply claimed, not through request, but by acceptance. As you understand this, you become more accountable to what you think, how you think it, and it becomes easier because the threshold you have crossed from the old to the new, wherein the new stands firm in its awareness, does not subject you to the temptation of old, the old ways of deciding in fear or need for retribution. When none of you are claiming war, there is no war. When none of you are in fear, there is no fear. And the gift of this teaching, a world made new, is in fact the evidence that you will find unfolds before you as you walk this earth as you truly are.

Now, we will say this to Paul. You are well. You are learning. You have no need to fear the ramifications of this transmission. You have no need to worry how others will comprehend this. Those who read this in lower vibrational tone, and would seek to misunderstand, will be corrected, not by your choice, but by the energy that is in fact this text. Imagine a hot stove. You put your hand in, accidentally. You pull it back quickly. When you attempt to utilize these teachings for ill gain, for selfish reasons, the text will respond as such. They won’t pick it up again. Now, the text doesn’t burn, but their aversion to the light will be what claims them without the book in hand. Those who are willing to transform from the old to the new, who are investing in this teaching as student or as one willing to be taught, will be met at every stage, in their willingness, and in our ability to sing to them in tone or vibration so that they may be healed or delivered from the sense of self that would refute the light.

Each self or each aspect of self that you may know yourself through has an investment in maintaining the old. And the caution we give you is not to stampede the Kingdom with your desire, but let each aspect of self become acclimated to the higher, so that you are escorted into this level of vibration at a level you can access and know. The one who storms the Kingdom finds herself in a new landscape, without comprehension, without the language to support herself at this new level, which is why we escort you carefully, in sequence, to this level of demonstration.

The octave of the Christ, the Upper Room, Christ Mind, if you wish, is available to all. But it cannot be maintained when one is angry at the self for not living there all the time. It will not be maintained when you continue to hurt the self through acts of fear, however they may be described. It will not maintain as you disavow the innate divinity in anyone or anything when it seems like it’s the only thing to do. We will say this. We have given you remedy—“It will be so”—to translate misguided evidence to be re-formed or reclaimed in the higher. And we have given you the tools to understand self as operative in the higher room, the benediction of realization and the claims of truth that will support you here. You may maintain the Upper Room, not through effort, but through alignment. You may know yourself in the Upper Room, not through demanding, but through forgiving. You may love yourself, and love God, and love all that you witness through the agreement that such things may be so, and will be revealed in and through you as you progress.

There is much more to be taught. This is the first text of application to the Kingdom. What will follow in ensuing volumes are the remedies to the ideas that have taken form that are now seeking to be revealed in order to be re-known. We are preparing you for this now, because you have become the agent of these teachings. And in your agency you will be called forward, not only in action, but in love for all.

As we continue these chapters, we wish to say that when we are done with these texts we will say, “This is all.” And until we say, “This is all,” we will utilize the means we have to give the dictation through the man in the chair and to the student who listens. And we are blessed, not only by your presence, but through the act of transmission, which for us is an act in love that supports our awareness of the power of the Infinite and its power to be heard in spoken language through a new revelation. And we will call this chapter “A New Revelation.”

The beings that you are, in invocation, less aspiration than announcement of being—“I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come”—are being agreed to in service. And this service need not be occupation. It may be being, simply being, simply agreeing to be, as you can only be in truth.

We thank you for your presence. This is in the text. Period. Period. Period.

Q: They said the “finite one tone” that you will express as and I was wondering why “finite,” not infinite one tone?

A: It’s only one tone. It is finite and infinite, as one. It’s the only tone, finally, that is true, and that’s the level of alignment you are agreeing to.

DAY THIRTY-SIX

What you stand for, what you agree to, what you say yes to, will accompany you in your vibrational field throughout time. When you say yes to the Divine Self, “Yes, I am known, I am in agreement to, and I am claiming all in agreement to my true nature,” the amplitude of frequency that accompanies you is boundless. Underline that word. It is boundless. And by boundless we mean unending, because the Infinite, the Divine as all, expressing even through you, has all things in its purview, the Divine as all, inclusive of you, excluding nothing and no one—hence the Kingdom, that is now revealed, that may be walked upon and through and known as who you are and what you stand for. To stand for the Kingdom is to be the Kingdom. To be the Kingdom is to be the gateway from one sense of realization to a higher one. Even the small self is in realization to her requirements, his environment, the life lived thus far. But to become the portal or doorway is to transpose that vibration, to claim it by nature of being and to lift it to the new. “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, today’s class is about divinity, and about agreement to the past, what was once known that you deny the light in, accrued now to a new potential. If you can imagine pulling moss off a tree, spiderwebs from a nook in the attic, that which is accrued, that which is seen, that which was once upon a time an important idea, painful event, challenging experience, must now be re-known in accord with your true nature. So the release of the detritus accrued in history that you still emblazon with meaning must be attended to, and through this claim: “Behold, I make all things new.”

If you can imagine now an experience in your life, a great challenge you faced, a hardship you knew yourself through where you would deny God in—“God could not have been there, there can be no God in that space and time”—you may use the opportunity to know it from the Upper Room and to claim it in healing, or re-knowing of the presence of the Divine. When you see this incident in your mind’s eye or re-experience it in your form, you simply have to do this, “I am in the Upper Room,” and allow the alignment there to support the re-knowing of even the most painful idea, the most refuted idea, of what can be never in light, and let the light come. You make this claim now to the event as you imagine or remember or experience: “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, in this equivalency, the vibrational field attends to the old—the claim of the new, the re-knowing of what was once shadow into light, the alchemization of old fear or despair in a re-known state, the agreement to the resurrected self who has come and is without this artifact of data informing his or her life. You are no longer appealing to God. “Take this away from me, release me from this pain.” You are claiming, in divine birthright, that the Divine is present and beyond time, so that your new awareness, in equivalency, is what is restoring you. And by this we mean you are not denying God where the incident was. You are claiming God at the time of the incident, and through all ramifications of it.

“What does that look like?” he says. “It sounds like magical thinking to me.” In fact, it is other. What you are doing is reclaiming in the Upper Room that which has been abandoned, shuttered, refuted, denied the light in. And it is the reclamation of the Divine Self that has the amplitude for this level of re-creation. If you were harmed as a child and you hold the scar of the incident, the re-knowing of the incident is not about forgetting about it or denying that it happened. It is re-knowing it and reclaiming the self that was in experience that intended to deny the light to be restored.

Imagine there is an aspect of you that hides in the cellar, crouched in darkness, with her old pain, his old shame, his old confusion, in this denial of God through experience. When the light shines upon the child and the child is restored to the light, the old patterns, the moss, if you wish, the spiderwebs, if you wish, the old ideas that have accrued as the result of experience, are also re-known. Imagine a thread in a quilt being pulled. The idea of the quilt itself is released when the threads release the patterning that have been sewn through prior incident.

You are made new through your own agreement to be made new. And any historical data that you might use or others might use to refute God, or the omnipresence of the vibration of the consciousness that is and always will be God, is made known anew through these claims. You are made new through your agreement to the omnipresence. You are claimed as new in the decree. You are aligned to the new in a beneficent way by the agreement to what is always so. Underline always. God must be present or can never be present. And the realization of that presence in equivalency in your own data accrued in the energetic field is what is liberated. You are free by knowing of what is always true.

On this day we claim that all who hear these words, all who invoke them, are re-known beyond incident, beyond experience that would seek to deny the presence of the Divine. And, as you are re-known, and as every issuance of past agreement is moved to re-articulation, the knowing of who you are in pronounced ways allows you to support the world in its new ideation, its new agreement: “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, some of you will say, “Can it really be so?” And we will say this to you. “It is so. God Is. God Is. God Is.” As the doorway that you will meet others through, that you will lift experience through, as the alignment that supports the alignment of others as witness to the Divine where others would refute it, you become as the camel who can walk across the desert and not thirst. You become as the moonlight who doesn’t try to reflect the light of who she sees—she can only know it. You become as the grace that re-articulates and promises further unfoldment. You become the Divine incarnate, by agreement to what is already true.

We speak your names now, one and all, and we do this as a great sound, a sound that will encircle you, the reader, you who hear these words, and those who may reach you who have been informed by them. And, as we make this sound, as one, a unified tone of agreement to God, your names are unfolded, re-seen, re-known. You are lifted in amplitude, and sung, indeed sung, into grace. On the count of three, Paul.

One. Two. Three.

[The Guides tone through Paul.]

The Word is spoken. It is so. It will be done. We say yes to everything that ever was, that has ever been seen or known. We say yes to any aspect of you who has been refuted, any self that you have embodied who has shunned the light, hidden from grace. We say yes to you in your unfoldment. Let the song, the great song, the perfect song of God, begin. Period. Period. Period. Stop now, please.

DAY THIRTY-SEVEN

When you ask us questions—who are we, and why do we come—we will answer you thus. We are who you are when you truly incarnate as the Divine Self and align to the Source of all things in completion. By completion we mean you are not deciding you are in separation, but in union and collective agreement to the Source of all things. Because we are as you have been in some cases, have known ourselves in separation in some cases, we comprehend the struggles that befall you as you defy the old and release the old to go into an agreement with your true soul’s nature.

Now, when we say some of us have known ourselves in form, have gone on the same journey as you go on now, we will say others of us have been in completion since we were received in totality at the time of our creation. And we say this for Paul. Please step aside. Let us speak our words. We know who we are, and the time has come to begin to articulate this to the students who question. The reason we come is humanity itself, at this crossroads in its decision to align to its completion, has become a moment of opportunity. And while we are always present and in fact always teaching on this plane in one form or another, the times that you sit in hold such promise for great change that we attend to the whole in agreement to who you truly are. Because we comprehend your journeys, what it means to release the old, to claim the new, to sing as one, because we have understood what it means to know form or agree to a form as a way to learn, because we can incarnate, if we choose, still on this plane as you see Paul, as you see the one beside you, because we can know ourselves in form and without, we may know you as well.

Now, the aspect of Paul that delivers the teaching is the aspect of Paul that knows who it is, as of us, in agreement to this work, or this expression, because this work is expression, as delivered, as received, and as utilized. And because we know him as of us, and because the articulation of Paul is only significant in that each of you may hear these words, we will say this to all of you. What befalls the man who denies his true nature is the realization of separation, and that is the key. To claim separation is to deny your true nature. To realize the wholeness in union with the Source of all things is to align to the agreement of what can only be so. Everything else is a mystery. The small self, you see, can only see past her nose. She cannot approach the darkness as the candle she truly is, as the bright light he truly is. At this juncture, the illumination of all, in spite of what he or she has chosen, preferred, or chosen to learn through, is the expression of this plane. While this seems impossible, you must imagine how one candle can light a great blaze, and even the things that would refuse to be lit by that candle flame find themselves alight in agreement to the light that has touched them. You understand through the examples of your sciences what contagion is, how things are passed from one to the other. But you don’t comprehend that the Divine itself is in agreement to this as a way of operating.

“Please explain this,” he says. We are teaching in metaphor, Paul. The idea that the light itself, the light within you or in anyone, can claim the light in another without effort is how the world is made new. Even if the small self that would refute the light is lit by the light, it goes into agreement with the aspect of itself that is the light. You may look at that as a way of relating or aligning to all you see as who you are.

Now, when a world itself is aligning to a higher octave, the release of those things that would seek to obey the shadow, conceal itself from the light, are in some ways incited to refute the light. This is the small self and the act of fear in agreement to its own stasis, its own way of being, beyond the idea of great change. The action of fear, as we often say, to create more fear, has ramifications. But while fear may progress as a cancer may progress, while fear may know itself in form, it is without the light, and consequently does not lift to any other comprehension of itself than it has assumed. In other words, the darkness does not learn. It simply replicates. Because light itself and knowledge are one, the increase of the light on this plane, comprehending itself in all form, increases light and aligns to progress. Because what you see before you now often appears to be destruction, you become frightened and you refute the changes that are upon you. But, again, it is the light that claims all things, that acts as a torch to alight all things, that reclaims all things in its truth.

Now, light and truth are also as one. The many names of God, faces of God, may be comprehended as thus, and you may align to light as truth. But please comprehend that the truth itself holds no bias. It simply is. The light simply is. It does not judge because it cannot. It will not invoke fear because it is not of fear. And the reclamation of this plane in high octave is the progression of the light that you are each claiming, agreeing to, and supporting others in becoming.

You do not override free will when you invoke the light in another because you are quite simply claiming what is always true in the face of the denial of it. Do you understand this? There is no human being born, could never be, who is not of God, but the denial of God, in all its actions, so entrenched that many believe themselves to be in such separation that the idea of refuting God becomes an act of self-reliance. “There is no God, no idea of God that I can align to, so I will fight my way and whoever stands in my way of my idea of safety or well-being.”

Self-preservation at the level of the personality self must be understood as one of the masks of fear. Because the divine light, come as each of you, has no need to defend because it is not operative in fear, what it does is lift an individual above the battle, above the path of those who would war. From this vantage point of agreement, the one above may lift what is below, and this encounter, never an overriding of free will, but a claim of being and presence—“Behold, I make all things new”—will actually claim this plane, finally, we suggest, in its true nature. And its true nature means in agreement to the presence of the Source of all things. This does not mean you pray a certain way or define God through a past tradition. It simply means the innate awareness of something more, and something good. Now, we use the term something good as a way for you to understand the idea of benefit, not to suggest good or bad, but productive change, positive awareness, so that the whole itself may not be frightened of its progress.

Each of you who says yes to the manifestation of the Divine, come as you, must say yes to everyone and everything that you encounter. While this seems impossible, an impossible act, it is less so the moment you understand that it is God itself, operating as and through you, that greets all of its creations in an awareness of itself. So, again, you are not appeasing. You are not saying, “Oh, that’s nice,” to what was previously seen as horrific. You are claiming the divine presence where the thing has been so that it is re-known—“It will be so”—and then lifted to its true nature, which can only be Source.

As stasis progresses, or simply the idea of the darkness claiming things, you must understand that ignorance is the darkness, and truth and wisdom are of the light. When you perceive ignorance in a group of people, in an individual, in a cultural structure, you have the right to claim the presence of God upon the thing. Now, you understand the claim “Let there be light.” But if you do understand the simple claim “It will be so,” the divine expression that seeks encounter with what has denied it is what claims what is seen, and it is the Divine that lifts the veil or shadow of fear or of ignorance to truth and wisdom. A world is made new through alignment to a world that can know itself as new, and the can in this sentence is the important word, because without possibility for change, change is not rendered. Again, the denial of the Divine can be rectified with the presence of the Divine. “It will be so” translates one idea to the other in manifestation. And the agreement to the Divine—“God Is, God Is, God Is”—refutes all denial, because the light of the claim upon all transmutes what has denied God, and claims it anew.

The wisdom of this teaching, if you wish to understand it, is the application of being. Now, being itself is a state of agreement. You are being. But in this being, as of Source, as of truth, as of wisdom, as of love, as is all things in unity, you comprehend manifestation. As we see you, as we comprehend you, as the journeys you take unfold, we witness the greatness, not only of the human spirit who may say yes to its next level of vocation and being, but also the Divine that is as you and now expresses in beauty, in truth, in love, and in an alignment to what is always true.

The teaching of this day is, in fact, in preparation to where we wish to take you next, a move to your own authority as the one who claims the Kingdom. So much of what we have taught you is about the disassembling of the vibrational field that has known itself through fear so that re-articulation or manifestation may ensue. But as we move forward in these teachings, we move you to agreement to the Monad as what in form, and the manifestation of this by nature of being.

The Divine has come. It is, indeed, you all. It is, indeed, all things. And let the light begin to vibrate, to claim all things as itself.

We thank you for your presence. This is the end of the chapter. Period. Period. Period. Stop now, please.

8

GOD IS, GOD IS, GOD IS

DAY THIRTY-EIGHT

What you ask for in agreement to the true nature of your being is received by you in accordance with the idealization of the thing asked for, which means, quite simply, the one who knows who she is, in agreement to all that is, is always in receipt, and even the idea of asking, from this level of vibration, in some ways is an acknowledgment of what is already so. The days of begging, beseeching, pleading with the Divine to do the small self’s will has been replaced by the agreement to the Divine Will in the knowledge that all true needs are met in perfect ways. Now, you decide as a small self what your needs should be. “I must save the house from the bank.” “I must save my child from the illness.” And while indeed these may be things that can be met in the higher will, the True Self as you will now hold the mandate for its requirements of expression. In other words, friends, you are saying yes to Divine Will in the comfort and in the awareness that it is there, will always be there, and you will always be met by it. In this case, in this instance, the True Self is the benefactor and the recipient to the life lived. You are claiming through it, knowing who you are in alignment to it, and receiving as it, the incarnate form you have taken in alignment in what we call the Upper Room.

The transition each of you makes now to a comprehension of this will be rather different than you think. You anticipate awareness. “Oh, here is what they mean. This is evidence of the claims made.” But in fact what will happen will be entirely different than you think. Imagine you are a radio, and your broadcast or consciousness is summoning your alignment in coherence with the reality you see. But the broadcast is about to change, and consequently your experience of being is altered through the tone you emit and are in agreement to. So you are no longer saying, “I see what they mean.” You are knowing who you are, and even our words may no longer be necessary because the alignment you have claimed as the True Self simply is.

Now, you justify the old, even in discipline. “If I pray this way, if I attend to these teachings that way, I will have the outcome promised.” But this is not outcome in the ways that you might think. In some ways, what it is, is a new book, of expression, of experience, in dominion. We will explain this for Paul, who is asking. It is not that the life you are living now has changed. You have changed, and your life must express that. It’s truly that simple. The old book, which we would say is the small idea of self, has been released to an idea of unification. Even the idea of unification is still claimed by the small self, who comprehends herself through idea. When you move beyond idea to true manifestation, you simply are, it simply is, and you know, and you be, and the song of your vibration, in a re-articulated state, is in fact the Kingdom, come in manifest form. That is correct, Paul. They become the Kingdom, you become the Kingdom, the expression of this teaching. And, indeed, this is a new book, with a new title, and new chapters to unfold. It does not mean you are not learning still, because each experience offers you the benefit of insight, realization, and reclamation. Each thought itself becomes expression, and you are understanding yourself, not only in knowing, but in the manifestation of being, which quite simply means wherever you stand, you are, and wherever you are, you be, and wherever you be is in an agreement to unification. Because you can’t understand this through the old template, we have had to lift you to the higher, provide information to support you each in the agreements required to sustain the vibration. We have taken you where we can take you in this authorization, but, as has been said, there comes a time when the bird leaves the nest. There comes a time when the student no longer requires the teacher. Because the incarnation you are about to align to, in expression and amplitude, is its own teacher, you become the thing you truly are, you know what is true because you are true, and you love because you are as love in an expressed state. There is no striving here. There is agreement. You have become the Source in agreement to the manifestation that has come individuated through your expression.

Now, some of you will say this cannot be done. But please remember, friends, this is already done in the Upper Room, or at the level of vibration that the True Self manifests as. The entirety of these teachings has been to bring you here, to a rectified state, to an agreement to the what, manifest form; who, identity; and expression as in service as this True Self. And the acclimation to it is here for you now. The process of acclimating is a process of surrender, complete surrender, we would say. He interrupts the teaching. “You are talking about authority as the Divine Self, and now you are talking of surrender. Aren’t they different?” In fact, they are not. To be in a unified state is to be active in surrender. Do you understand this? You become active in surrender. The unified will, in a truly expressed state, directs you intentionally in its surrender to the high will. If you wish to eat a grape, you may. If you wish to take a walk, you may. If you wish to decide no one day, you may choose that as well. But the alignment you have claimed in this surrender is equivalency to the Monad, and the Monad becomes the expressed self. You understand “Thy will be done.” You understand the idea of unification. But to express as unified, with the will acclimated to the True Self in full expression, not only directs one, but claims all, in its agreement to Source.

Paul is interrupting. “You said we could say no just now. What does that really mean?” Because the will itself is, in fact, braided, you may find instances where the idea of selfishness—“My need will be met first”—may become pronounced. If you decide to do this, you do have authority, and the claim may be made in fear. “I cannot go forward. I cannot release will at this level.” But please understand that once this journey has begun, it will continue, and any lapse or sense of separation becomes new opportunity to learn, and the rectification of the old patterning that aligned in separation will ensue again. In other words, friends, not only has the ship sailed, you are the ship, you are sailing, and will itself is now the wind, is now the rudder, and the direction you are taken is only to one place, to God itself, in agreement to itself, as and in all things.

Unification, you see, is not about displacement. It’s about the new, a new expression. And because the claims we have offered you—“Behold, I make all things new,” “It will be so,” “God Is, God Is, God Is”—are claims of manifestation, each and every one of them, you become the expression of each claim. And your act of being, the Word itself, the energy of the Creator in action, has been made known and will call itself where it is required.

“What do you think you are now?” would be the question of the day. It matters not what you think, because what you think is idea, and ideas at this level of vibration are no longer present as they were. You do not create through the old or with the old template when you have been lifted or been agreed to or are in coherence with the True Self that expresses as and in the Upper Room. “As and in—what does that mean?” Expression as, the exemplar, the manifestation of, the one who has come. You express as and in the Upper Room throughout the life you live.

Now, where you sit today is not only at the dock, about to board the boat, but becoming the boat, as agreed to, and a comprehension that the sea itself, the great sea of God, contains all mysteries, all greatness, all beauty, and all light. The ship is sailing. You are the ship. And the manifestation of the journey is not only the life lived, but the agreement to Source—in the waves, in the sand, in the sky, and in everything else you might encounter.

Paul interrupts the teaching. “I love what you say. But I witness a world in division. I am still frightened of things that could happen. How am I on the ship, let alone being the ship?” We will answer this very simply. You have always been the ship. You have always been the journey. The idea of self is all that’s precluded this truth. And the being you are, on this sailing, on this ship, on this expressed sea, lifts what it encounters to its true nature. So a world divided, a people in conflict, can and will be re-known by the ones who know who those are who would pursue conflict and fear, who know who they are in spite of their acts or behaviors. If you wish to limit God and say God cannot redeem or reclaim what has believed itself to be separate, this teaching has meant nothing to you. Unless the Divine is capable of knowing itself in the darkest places for redemption to occur, there is no need for God. You put God in a thimble, most of you. You decide God can attend to this, but not that. You decide God is what you want it to be when there is something you want. When we claim, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” the walls fall, the sea rises, the sun beams down in an amplified state, which simply means the lifting of vibration, as all, has come, has come, has come.

When the new chapter commences, when the new book is aligned to you, the creations of self are transformed. You will understand this in your experience of it. The amplitude of vibration that is now available must be made manifest, and any resistance, any confusion, can and will be met in these words, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” which is the agreement to the Divine Self as made manifest as and through you. And this amplitude, in full expression, will save, align, and re-create any misguidance, any fear, that you may encounter in any form on this road before you, on this sea you ride.

We will say this for Paul. This will be the last chapter of the text. When it is complete, we will let you know. But you must understand the importance of this dictation. We are saying to them, those who are our students, that they will be met in a re-known state. And, in this state, not only are they known, but they have agreed to this expression as the what that they are, the manifestation of Source that beholds all things anew.

As we continue these teachings, in this text and others, we will remind you that what we hold for you are maps, ways forward, ways you may trust. But you will become the adventurer. And all we offer you are instructions that you may not consider without them. We offer these gifts as you become us. We love you as you are, in realization or without. We see you as you are, when you cannot see. And, as we sing today, we will say these words. Each of you here, each who hears these words, each who says yes, is now lifted, and to the voyage of the lifetime, and the lifetimes, you have agreed to. “Behold, I make all things new.” Period. Period. Period.

Stop now, please. That’s enough for the day.

DAY THIRTY-NINE

As we stand before you, as we witness you in your evolution, as we claim each of you in your divine authority, we offer you this. The days before you are not frightening unless you decide they are. And the only one who will authorize fear is the small self, who may seek to maintain identity at the cost of what is now offered. The trajectory of humanity in the ensuing years is to a witness of itself, unadorned, and, indeed, unafraid, because the Christ has indeed come in manifestation through all human beings. We said all intentionally, because you must understand the equivalency of the claims made here. “Behold, I make all things new.”

Now, you relegate the Christ to the identity of the one who has chosen it, or perhaps realized it, but it is still present in the darkest hour. And the invocation “Behold, I make all things new” indeed in the darkest hour re-creates the manifest Christ in the face of the fear in the shadow in the claim “God Is, God Is, God Is.” Humanity, you see, has chosen this passage, and indeed this passage in some ways is a relinquishing of structure, of form, and what things have meant to be. And by that we mean when a dollar is no longer a dollar, what, in fact, is it? When a system is no longer operable, is it indeed a system?

Now, because you wish for a return to what you once had, because you find solace still in history, you will do what you wish to maintain ideals that give you comfort, or recognition of what they once were. In some ways, what you will see is realization coming to all in the increments that it can be claimed. But finally, we suggest, when the light is full, all will look to the light and say, “Yes, I Am.” The trajectory humanity has chosen, although you cannot see it now, is to new witness of itself in the high octave of the Upper Room, and the translation that humanity undergoes from low to high involves the disassembling of what has been inhibiting the light. The process you each undergo in testament to these teachings is the same process that the collective undergoes. Those of you who complete this process, which quite simply means agree to the process in fullness in articulation, become the light that claims what you see, re-creates itself in the shadow to call the light forth, the inherent light, the Monad, the presence of God that has always been and will always be.

Each of you who says yes to this articulation is in resonant tone, and the tone itself, in agreement to its Source, is what claims all things new, not the self that wishes to appease a god or decides what should be through the intent of the claim. But the being of the claim, you as Kingdom, humanity as Kingdom, in this re-creation, supports realization of all things. And, again, underline all. The trajectory humanity has chosen is to ascend to a higher decibel, intonation, and consequently the creations of humanity are challenged in this passage, and by challenged we mean buffeted, re-known, and reclaimed. Paul sees a ship, and the seawater smacking the sides as the ship progresses. The passage is ongoing, the water is always present, some days stormy, some days calm. You progress anyway. Each of you who stands before us in this agreement is realized through the intonation of the Christ that has come as each of you.

Now, the Christ has come in pluralization, and you must understand this. Each one is the Christ, seeking manifestation. Each one is the Divine, accepting itself as what it truly is. And the agreement to pluralization at the cost of an old idea—“I will be seen for my good works,” “I will be a chosen one,” “I will be one who says yes while others say no”—is released to the Divine that knows itself, singular and plural. The pluralization of being does not come at the cost of the idea of self. In some ways, it assumes it. Jeremy as the Divine. Alice as the Divine. In past teachings, we have said, “the Divine as Alice,” but at this level of vibration, the agreement, in co-resonance, has re-acclimated even identity to its rightful tone. Again, identity, useful in its way, is of God, but need not know itself in separation of the Source.

The triumph of this teaching, as you receive it, is indeed re-articulation. But the manifestation of the re-articulated self claims itself, is done through and by you through co-resonance, and less will than surrender. “I have agreed to this, I have said yes, I have allowed, I Am, I Am, I Am.” The moment of choice indeed was taken, the moment of truth indeed is present, and the manifestation of the Divine, come as each of you, is, is, is of all, and will always be so. The moment of truth, the embodiment of the Divine in form and field, is what the gift of the God is, as it presents itself as and through, and all.

We say this for Paul. The language we use today is intended. Allow the language we use, in its modifications from your past experience, align itself to the requirements of this text. Allow the text itself to be what it requires to be to claim its encounter with the divinity that is now expressed in manifestation—in the reader, in the student, in the one who has, indeed, come.

We will say this to all of you now. When this text is completed, its manifestation will be of an amplitude that supersedes prior issuances. To hold this text, to be in agreement to it, is to, again, modify the vibrational field. To express this text, to know this text as you, is to become the teaching. To become the teaching is to be made manifest as the who, what, you truly are, in full expression. And the claim of being, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” claims you all in the Upper Room of truth.

We sing your songs for you so that you may learn the words, each of you who stands before us, who has said yes, and is now known.

We will stop the dictation in a moment. Indeed, there is more, but we must have you understand what you have chosen, what you have agreed to. You have said yes to a level of being beyond the known, beyond the old template, and your agreement to this is the awakening of all. We say yes, we say yes, we say yes, it is so. Period. Period. Period.

Stop now, please.

DAY FORTY

What you stand before, what you see before you, what you claim as being, is now opportunity, opportunity to be re-seen and re-known and, indeed, lifted by your presence. Each action you take and will ever take has manifestation that changes everything. Do you understand this? Each action you take, whatever you may think of it, leaves the world in a new place. And the act of being that we are teaching you in this text, and its ramifications to make a world new, are the highest acts a being can take in alignment to his true nature, her true expression.

Now, because of this, the manifestation of your life must conform to this new way of being in expression. In other words, friends, what you have known yourself through, defined yourself with or by, is about to be released to a higher way of perceiving it. Nothing is limiting you except that which you create limitation from. And this expression, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” acclimates all things to its innate nature, and your conversation with all things becomes the affirmation of the presence of the Divine. Each step you take, each song you sing, each claim you make, in high vibration, not only claims you, but what you encounter, in an identical reframing of vibration.

“What does that mean,” he says, “identical reframing of vibration?” Well, it is always so. The alignment you hold in the lower realm claims and contributes to a manifest world known through fear, and your participation to this is indeed ending. While you have habit, ways of thinking and knowing that contribute to the old, not only are they lessening, they are releasing, because they are not held at this level of vibrational accord. The re-framing that occurs, and re-patterning of identical ways of expression, means thus: The alignment you hold is claimed through what you encounter. The alignment you hold, in an identical patterning, is reclaimed. In other words, friends, the Divine that has come as you re-acclimates and re-defines what is seen as this template.

Now, we will explain this again. You understand vibrational accord. You understand like attracts like. But the like that is attracting here is not born of personality. The inherent divinity of all things is what is being announced. “God Is. God Is. God Is.” And the one who speaks this into being by becoming the Kingdom—not only the doorway, but the Kingdom itself, an expression of the Divine in form—is in alignment to itself. Now, what the world sees before you is a life that has been lived or perhaps known in ways you have chosen, but what you perceive as the world is the presence of the Divine. Both exist—how one is seen and how one sees, in agreement or vibrational accord. The moment you sit in today, a new moment, a new expression, in realization, is about to sing itself into being before all.

“What does that mean,” he asks, “before all?” Imagine, Paul—imagine, all of you—that you stand upon a great mountain, and the expression of your being, what is seen and known in vibrational accord, must be inclusive of all things because you are as all things upon this mountain. And from this great place of being, the song sung, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” will reflect itself, claim itself, enjoin with all things in lifting to the light that which has been held in darkness, because in this light the darkness cannot abide. In this light, the fears that you have known, even identified as and through, will not abide. The manifestation of the Monad in full expression reclaims a world.

Now, reclamation, the Divine as all things, has not only been discussed, but you have been instructed in its application—through being, through speaking it, the announcement of the Christ, “I Have Come, I Have Come, I Have Come,” and in its expression, “Behold, I make all things new.” But the manifestation in an experiential way must be undergone by the initiate who has aligned at this level, and we will teach you this, not in this text, but in those to follow. As you acclimate in realization before the light that is in all things, the claim of being, in full encounter, a world made new, is sung into being simply by expression.

Some of you will say, “I must do this now. I must know this now.” Perhaps some of you will. It is in vibrational accord that this commences, and your experience of it, your potential realized, is ever present and always available to you. But the lifting of the planet, or your idea of the planet, to its higher accord in experiential ways is the alignment to all things made new. And while you make the claim and align in these ways, the full expression of it is yet to be seen. “What does that mean?” he asks. You Have Come. You Have Come. You Have Come. You have claimed into being a new world. While you hold form in the Upper Room, the alignment you greet, in full agreement to your being, made known as and through you, is what does the work. Your experience of this will vary somewhat as you step into fullness of agreement. But the claim made by this agreement is always so. It is simply your ability to agree to the experience of this in fullness that is awaiting you.

“How do we do this now?” he asks. You say yes to the level of alignment that you can claim and hold in perfect ways. You say yes to the integration of this teaching in spite of what is released through this process of it. You say yes to the willingness for full assumption at the cost of even identity that has been claimed or utilized in small ways. The entirety of your expression is sung anew, and the being of this, the Divine that has come as each of you, is indeed the gift you are giving to the world. We are not creating saints. We are not creating prophets. We are simply claiming each of you without the detritus, without the camouflage, without the mask that has been utilized and maintained by an idea of self that considers herself, himself, still as separate. The great song is singing now. Indeed, you have all come. And, indeed, you are singing. We will say this now to Paul. This is not the end of this text. Will you please stop presupposing? We are completing today. In fact, what we are telling them is that their complete experience in manifestation, which comes as they can hold it, is being readied for them. And by being readied for them we mean they are being made ready for this conception, this agreement, to be re-known. As we sing this text into being, because indeed this text is sung, as we say yes to the students who sit before us and those who will hear these words one day, we will remind you that we are always present, we are always available in the Upper Room for an agreement to you when you seem to forget who you are. We stand before you each in agreement to your light, in agreement to your truth, and as we say these words, “It will be so,” we support you in this incarnation. The claim of the day, “It will be so,” the claim of a lifetime, “God Is, God Is, God Is,” will be known by you now.

On this day we choose to render all things, all that may be seen, all that has been named prior, in true tone, in true expression, in true value, as of God. And, in this teaching, we support each student in the reclamation of being, beyond any frame that has been held prior. And, as we say yes to this, we say yes to each of you—you who stand before us today, you who will stand before us in your idea of time, those of you who sing now, and those of you who will sing. And, as we say yes, as we claim it, we announce you each in recognition of your willingness to serve. Indeed, you have come. Indeed, you are free. And, indeed, the self you have known is transposed to the higher music of your soul’s true calling.

Period. Period. Period. Stop now, please.

DAY FORTY-ONE

What you ask for, what you receive, what you allow, what you claim, what you support, in vibration, in love, is now available to be comprehended. All things may be made new, all things may be re-seen, and all things may encompass any idea of singularity to rectify it in agreement to its true nature. When you move beyond the singular to the pluralization of experience, you begin to re-identify matter beyond what it has been named, but through the experience of the new. And, as the new is born before you, you will no longer seek to name things through the old vocabulary, ways of identifying, because what you are experiencing claims you in accord with manifestation, the unnamed and the nameless, the perfection that is all.

Now, to understand what this means in practical ways is that what you see is no longer telling you what it is through your past ascriptions to it. In other words, you know what a clock is. You look at a clock. You say clock by way of identifying. Now, you perceive what has been clock. You comprehend it. You are not denying the name it has held. But you are seeing it in a very different way. The radical change one undergoes at this level of tonality is you comprehend that manifestation, all things, are of one Source. So the Divine presents itself as what has been named clock, but in the new eyes that you perceive through, in the new wisdom you have claimed, you comprehend clock and all its meanings, including the first idea that rendered clock into form. You become party to the act of creation, beyond the limitations of time. You are not saying, “Once upon a time, there was a thing called clock.” You are comprehending clock and every idea that has ever been layered upon it, and then realizing clock, truly knowing clock, beyond the names, past descriptions, that have weighted it through collective accord.

The challenge for some of you is that you will seek these experiences, try to find them, and they will be presented to you, one after the next, as you have acclimated at this level of vibration. It is a re-comprehension of reality as you have been taught to experience it. You are bringing yourself beyond the window, beyond the glass of separation that has kept you inside, into the wonder of agreement to all things.

Now, the self that you know, still present in form, is also in an act of re-articulation. Your foundations, language, if you wish—“Which is the way to the post office?” “Where is the car parked?”—the practicalities of being are always here. What you have done instead is release the need for over-identification with prior structure. And the release of the prior structure in the claim “Behold, I make all things new” is the claim of resurrection, as all things are being lifted to the high agreement of the Upper Room. What you live in becomes what you are, and this is an important statement. You become the expression and the entity expressed as the Divine that operates in a field that does not support exclusion. It does not support it because it cannot. And you become a way-shower, not through effort, but through presence of being, because you see clearly where things have been operating, how history has held idea, how manifestation has claimed idea in support of an old way of being. And because you are able to re-see, re-know, and re-comprehend anything and all things through the new eyes you hold, the new vision you’ve claimed, “Behold, I make all things new,” you are supporting others in vibrational accord in lifting to the same level.

“But we live in days and weeks and months. How do we journey through this?” you may ask. In fact, you live in a moment that has been decided upon, one moment upon the next, in a sequence you think of as time. Realization, true realization, is always of the moment, and only in the moment of experience. You will not be planning for this. You will encompass the agreement that you have made through your vibrational field. In some ways, you see, what you are becoming is the self with no name, beyond language, and even beyond the mandate for form. When you realize that the physical body is no longer a limitation, your experience of the vastness of consciousness can and will be explored. You can remain in body and travel the universe. You can see God in anything and everything, because you are witness to the Divine through your own inherent nature.

There are no limitations to this teaching, once you understand that the agreement has been made that the Divine that has come as each of you will now express through you and release you from what has tethered you or bound you to the old. Re-articulation, seeing all things in a higher state and receiving the gift of coherence with the higher state, supports your creation of a new landscape. So where you walk, where your mind goes, where the imagination flies, is always in God, because there is nowhere else to be.

Now when we teach Paul, when we speak to Paul about this step, he steps away. “I cannot go where you take us. This feels impossible. I have duties, responsibilities, ways of being in the world.” In fact, Paul, you only have this moment. This is the only moment there ever is. And not only will you come, you are taking a step with your fellows in support of the whole.

We would like you all to imagine now that you step at a precipice. You come to the edge of a wondrous cliff, and before you is the vastness of eternity, the wonder of God expressed as all manifestation. And, as we say yes to you, we will nourish you in your agreement to step off the cliff into the agreement of manifestation, plurality, the knowing of being, in union with Source. And on the count of three we will lift you, one and all.

One. Now, two. Now, three.

Be lifted. Be re-known. And be sung. Become the one note that is all things. Agree to the one note that is all things. And say yes, say yes, say yes, to all that will be revealed.

We say these words now for each of you. The new is born, the Christ has come, the Monad expressed, and the world, we suggest, will never be the same.

We say blessings now to each of you. Indeed, we will complete the text today. When we say these words to Paul, we say it in support of your effort. This is the text that has been intended. It has been rendered well. Allow it to be born. Let our words be heard. And to the students of this work, know this to be so. Not only have you come, but you have come to full expression.

Blessings to each of you. Fly forward. Be known. You are free. You are free. You are free. Stop now, please.

“What is the title of this chapter?” he asks.

“God Is, God Is, God Is.”

Period. Period. Period.

Notes

Introduction

1. Paul

Chapter 4

1. Reconstructed from a brief gap in the recording.

2. Reconstructed from a brief gap in the recording.

Chapter 5

1. Reconstructed from a brief gap in the recording.

2. Reconstructed from a brief gap in the recording.

Acknowledgments

Dustin Bamberg, Noam Ben-Arie, Tim Chambers, Joan Katherine Cramer, Joel Fotinos, Jerilyn Hesse, Kenn Holsten, Amy Hughes, Mark Anthony Lord, Jeannette Meek, Noah Perabo, Brent Starck, Olivia Thirby, Christine Warren, Eric White, and Sacred Garden Retreat, Maui.

Also by Paul Selig

I Am the Word (2010)

The Book of Love and Creation (2012)

The Book of Knowing and Worth (2013)

The Book of Mastery (2016)

The Book of Truth (2017)

The Book of Freedom (2018)

Beyond the Known: Realization (2019)

Beyond the Known: Alchemy (2020)

About the Author

Born in New York City, Paul Selig attended New York University and received his master’s degree from Yale. A spiritual experience in 1987 left him clairvoyant. Selig is considered one of the foremost contributors to the field of channeled literature working today. He served on the faculty of NYU for over twenty-five years and is the former director of the MFA in Creative Writing Program at Goddard College, where he now serves on the Board of Trustees. Information on channeled workshops, online seminars, and private readings can be found at www.paulselig.com. Or sign up for email updates here.

Thank you for buying this

St. Martin’s Press ebook.

To receive special offers, bonus content,

and info on new releases and other great reads,

sign up for our newsletters.

Or visit us online at

us.macmillan.com/newslettersignup

For email updates on the author, click here.

First published in the United States by St. Martin’s Essentials, an imprint of St. Martin’s Publishing Group

The information in this book is not intended to replace the advice of the reader’s own physician or other medical professional. You should consult a medical professional in matters relating to health, especially if you have existing medical conditions, and before starting, stopping or changing the dose of any medication you are taking. Individual readers are solely responsible for their own health care decisions. The author and the publisher do not accept responsibility for any adverse effects individuals may claim to experience, whether directly or indirectly, from the information contained in this book.

THE KINGDOM. Copyright © 2021 by Paul Selig. All rights reserved. For information, address St. Martin’s Publishing Group, 120 Broadway, New York, NY 10271.

www.stmartins.com

Cover design by Kerri Resnick

Cover art © luck luckyfarm/Shutterstock.com

The Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data is available upon request.

ISBN 978-1-250-21262-7 (trade paperback)

ISBN 978-1-250-21263-4 (ebook)

eISBN 9781250212634

Our ebooks may be purchased in bulk for promotional, educational, or business use. Please contact the Macmillan Corporate and Premium Sales Department at 1-800-221-7945, extension 5442, or by email at MacmillanSpecialMarkets@macmillan.com.

First Edition: 2021